table of contents: maxwell 2d table of contentsread.pudn.com/downloads106/ebook/438459/ansoft... ·...

About Help

Go Back

Maxwell Online Help System Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Table of Contents: Maxwell 2D

Index

How to use thetable of contents:

To see the documentationfor a topic, select it fromthe list.

To see a more detailedlisting of a topic, select theExpand button beside it.

To learn more about theonline help system,select About Help.

More

Top

Using the Help SystemMaxwell 2DSolverHotkeysDrawingDefine Model MenuDraw Model

File MenuEdit MenuReshape MenuBoolean MenuArrange MenuObject MenuConstraint MenuModel MenuWindow MenuHelp Menu

Couple ModelGroup ObjectsMaterial ManagerSetup Boundaries/Sources

Electrostatic Boundary ConditionsElectrostatic SourcesMagnetostatic Boundary ConditionsMagnetostatic SourcesEddy Current Boundary ConditionsEddy Current SourcesDC Conduction Boundary ConditionsDC Conduction Sources

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…


Table of Contents: Maxwell 2DHow to use thetable of contents:




Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

AC Conduction Boundary ConditionsAC Conduction SourcesEddy Axial Boundary ConditionsEddy Axial SourcesTransient Boundary ConditionsTransient SourcesEdit Menu (Boundary Manager)Assign MenuFunctional Boundaries and Sources

Setup Executive ParametersSetup Solution OptionsManual Mesh RefinementEMpulseSetting up a Parametric SolutionSolvePost Process

File MenuGlobal MenuWindow MenuShow MenuPost MenuCalc Menu

Introduction to Parametric AnalysisParametrics Post Processing

Edit MenuVariables MenuData MenuPlot Menu

Technical Notes

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…

Ex pand…






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Using the Help SystemThe Topics ListThe Button CommandsLinks in the TextDocument TitleActive Regions on GraphicsSelecting Text and GraphicsThe Menu BarHelp Window Functions

Page NumberScreen Size (Percentage)Screen Size (Step)Page ScrollScroll Bar






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Maxwell 2DMaxwell 2D and Maxwell Control PanelMaxwell 2D and Maxwell 3DTime-stepping SolutionsMaxwell 2D Parametric Analysis ModuleAccessing Maxwell 2DGeneral ProcedureExecutive Commands Window

Executive Commands MenuSolution MonitoringDisplay Area

Changing the View of the Geometric ModelChanging the View of Transient Solutions

Zooming InZooming OutViewing the Entire PlotDisplaying Plot CoordinatesFormatting Transient Plot AxesFormatting Transient Plot Graphs

Batch ProcessingLicensing and Non-Graphical InterfacesBatch Mode for Workstations (UNIX)

Batch Log FileBatch Script File

Batch Mode for Personal Computers (Microsoft Windows)Batch Log File






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

SolverModifying the Solver TypeMaxwell 2D Software Packages

Electric FieldsElectrostatic Field SolverDC Conduction Field SolverThermal Field SolverAC Conduction Field Solver

DC Magnetic FieldsMagnetostatic Field Solver

AC Magnetic FieldsEddy Current Field SolverEddy Axial Field Solver

Transient SolverCompleteParametric Analysis






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Draw ModelModifying the Geometry2D Modeler CommandsTool BarScreen Layout

Menu BarDrawing RegionProject WindowsSubwindows

Subwindow Coordinate SystemsSubwindows Versus Project Windows

Active WindowsStatus BarMessage Bar

Drawing Plane for the ModelGeneral Procedure

Selecting Points With the KeyboardUnitsObject Names and ColorsViewing a Model

Zooming and Panning in SubwindowsDisplaying Objects as Wire Frames or Shaded Solids

Reading, Importing, and Saving ModelsThings to Consider

Keep it SimpleLevel of DetailTreat the Background as an ObjectSizing the Drawing RegionConsider BoundariesObjects within ObjectsPartial Overlapping Not Allowed






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

File MenuFile CommandsFile ExtensionsFile/NewFile/Open

Things to ConsiderRead Only ModeOpening Maxwell 2D Files version 4.33 (or earlier)

File/ImportFile/CloseFile/SaveFile/Save AsFile/RevertFile/Print SetupFile/Print

File/Print/Entire WindowFile/Print/SubwindowFile/Print/RectanglePrint Setup Within the Windows

File/Exit

About Help

Go Back



Index





More

Top

Edit MenuEdit CommandsEdit/Undo ClearEdit/UndoEdit/RedoEdit/CutEdit/CopyEdit/PasteEdit/ClearEdit/Duplicate

Edit/Duplicate/Along LineEdit/Duplicate/Along ArcEdit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate

Edit/SelectEdit/Select/By AreaEdit/Select/By NameEdit/Select/All ItemsEdit/Select/Open ObjectsEdit/Select/Closed ObjectsEdit/Select/Model ObjectsEdit/Select/NonModel Objects

Edit/Deselect AllEdit/Deselect All/Current ProjectEdit/Deselect All/All Projects

Edit/AttributesEdit/Attributes/By Clicking

Object AttributesColorNameModel ObjectShow HatchesShow Orientation

Text Attributes






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

TextColorAlignmentSlant

Edit/Attributes/RecolorEdit/Attributes/Rename

Edit/VisibilityEdit/Visibility/Hide SelectionEdit/Visibility/By Item

Edit/Show AllEdit/Insert RowEdit/Delete RowEdit/Duplicate RowEdit/External Circuit






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Object MenuObject CommandsObjects

Open ObjectsClosed Objects

Simple Closed ObjectsComplex Closed Objects

Entering Points from the KeyboardPicking Points in Several SubwindowsOverlapping ObjectsSelf-Intersecting ObjectsModeling Thin ObjectsImporting Complex Objects

Object/PolylineObject/ArcObject/SplineObject/Text

Scaling TextGenerating Screen Captures

Object/RectangleObject/Circle

Object/Circle/2 PointObject/Circle/3 Point

Object/SpiralObject/Spiral/Rectangular

Square CornersRounded CornersMitered Corners

Object/Spiral/Circular






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Model MenuModel CommandsModel/Measure

MeasurementsModel/Object AttributesModel/Drawing UnitsModel/Drawing Size

Things to ConsiderScroll BarsAdjusting the View

Model/Drawing PlaneModel/SnapTo Mode

Keyboard EntryModel/Defaults

Model/Defaults/ColorModel/Defaults/Text SizeModel/Defaults/Window Settings

Model/Default Color






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Window MenuWindow CommandsWindows

Selecting the Active Project WindowMoving and Resizing Windows Using the MouseEntering Points With the Keyboard

Window/NewWindow/CloseWindow/Tile

Window/Tile/SubwindowsWindow/Tile/ProjectsWindow/Tile/All

Window/CascadeWindow/Cascade/SubwindowsWindow/Cascade/ProjectsWindow/Cascade/All

Window/Change ViewWindow/Change View/Zoom InWindow/Change View/Zoom OutWindow/Change View/Fit AllWindow/Change View/Fit SelectionWindow/Change View/Fit Drawing

Window/Coordinate SystemWindow/Coordinate System/ShiftWindow/Coordinate System/RotateWindow/Coordinate System/Align to EdgeWindow/Coordinate System/Reset

Window/GridDefault Grid SettingsInappropriate Grid SpacingInvisible Grid Points

Window/Fill SolidsWindow/Wire Frame






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Help MenuHelp Menu CommandsHelp/About HelpHelp/On ContextHelp/On ModuleHelp/On Maxwell 2DHelp/ContentsHelp/IndexHelp/Shortcuts

Help/Shortcuts/HotkeysHelp/Shortcuts/Tool Bar






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Group ObjectsGrouping Objects

Ungrouping ObjectsSelecting ObjectsDeselecting ObjectsExiting Group Objects

Effects of GroupingAssigning MaterialsAssigning Boundaries or SourcesSetting up Executive Parameters

Computing MatricesComputing Forces and Torques

Current Distribution in Grouped ObjectsCurrent Distribution in Magnetostatic SimulationsCurrent Distribution in Eddy Current Simulations

Things to ConsiderAdjacent ConductorsParallel Sources and Grouped ObjectsObjects that Appear Differently in Different Cross SectionsGrouping Ground Conductors

About Help

Go Back



Index





More

Top

Material ManagerModifying the Material SetupAccessing the Material Manager from the Control PanelAssigning MaterialsMaterial Database

Global Material DatabaseLocal Material DatabaseInheritanceFunctional and Vector Material Properties

View WindowChanging the View of the Geometric Model

Zoom InZoom OutFit AllFit DrawingFill SolidsWire FrameWindow Commands

Window/MeasureWindow/GridWindow/SnapTo Mode

Adding Materials to the DatabaseDeriving New Materials

Assigning Materials to ObjectsSelecting Several Objects at OnceDeselecting ObjectsMaterials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties

Object Orientation DisplayExcluded Objects

Excluding ObjectsIncluding ObjectsAutomatically Excluded Objects (DC Conduction)

Changing Material Attributes

About Help

Go Back



Index





More

Top

Deleting MaterialsDeleting Derived MaterialsUnderiving and Rederiving Materials

Material AttributesRelative PermittivityRelative PermeabilityConductivityImaginary PermeabilityMagnetic CoercivityMagnetic RetentivityMagnetizationElectric CoercivityElectric RetentivityPolarization

Radial Vector FunctionsTangential Vector Functions

Perfect ConductorsAnisotropic Materials

Entering Anisotropic Material Property ValuesElectrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial SolversAnisotropic Permittivity Tensor

Anisotropic Conductivity Tensor (AC Conduction and Eddy Axial)Anisotropic Permeability Tensor (Eddy Axial Only)Anisotropic Imaginary Relative Permeability Tensor

Magnetostatic and Eddy Current SolversAnisotropic Permeability TensorAnisotropic Imaginary Relative Permeability Tensor (Eddy Current Only)Anisotropic Permittivity Tensor (Eddy Current Only)Anisotropic Conductivity Tensor (Eddy Current Only)

Nonlinear MaterialsNonlinear, Functionally Defined, and Anisotropic MaterialsNonlinear and Linear Permanent MagnetsAdding Nonlinear MaterialsEntering a BH-Curve






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Deleting a BH-CurveModifying B and H values for a BH-CurveAdding Points to a BH-CurveImporting a BH-CurveSaving a BH-CurveAxesView GraphNonlinear Permanent Magnets

In Air DemagnetizationIn Device DemagnetizationOther Device Considerations

Functional Material PropertiesFunctional Properties in RZ SolversOptionsDependent and Independent (Editable) Material Properties

Magnetostatic PropertiesElectrostatic Properties

FunctionsModifying a FunctionDeleting a FunctionTransient Function Variables

Vector Functions






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Setup Boundaries/SourcesModifying the Boundary and Source SetupBoundary Manager CommandsBoundary Manager Tool BarGeneral Procedure

Modifying Boundaries and SourcesDeleting Boundaries and SourcesExiting Setup Boundaries/Sources

Boundaries and SourcesBoundary ConditionsSourcesRequired Electromagnetic SourcesReferences for Electric or Magnetic PotentialFunctional Boundaries and SourcesModeling External FieldsUsing SymmetryBoundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models

Outside BoundariesValue Boundaries in Magnetostatic and Eddy Current ProblemsAxisymmetric External FieldsSymmetry Boundaries






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Assign MenuAssign CommandsGeneral Procedure

Setting Default Boundary ConditionsAssigning Boundary Conditions

SourcesAssign/Boundary

Assign/BoundaryAssign/Boundary/ValueAssign/Boundary/SymmetryAssign/Boundary/BalloonAssign/Boundary/ResistanceAssign/Boundary/ImpedanceAssign/Boundary/MasterAssign/Boundary/Slave

Assign/SourceAssign/Source/Solid

Solid Charge SourcesCharges on Conductors (Floating Conductors)Charges on Dielectrics

Solid Voltage SourcesTransient Voltage Sources

Winding SetupSolid DC Current SourcesSolid AC Current SourcesTransient Current SourcesSolid Thermal Sources

Assign/Source/SheetCharge SheetsCurrent SheetsEdge VoltagesThermal Sheet Sources

Assign/End Connection






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Setup Executive ParametersExecutive Parameters Commands

Available ParametersForce

Viewing the Force SolutionCore Loss

Computing Core LossMatrix

Specifying a Return Path for CurrentSpecifying Signal and Ground LinesViewing the Matrix Solution

TorqueViewing the Torque Solution

Flux LinesViewing Information about Flux LinesViewing the Flux Linkage Solution

Current FlowViewing the Current Flow Solution

Post Processor MacrosExecuting MacrosDefining Macros

Matrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries

Removing Matrix EntriesTailoring a Parametric Problem

Define ModelSetup MaterialsSetup Boundaries/Sources






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Setup Solution OptionsMeshing

Need for a Fine MeshGeneral ProcedureStarting Mesh

Initial MeshCurrent Mesh

Manual MeshSolver ResidualSolver ChoiceFrequencySolve For Fields and ParametersTransient Solution Options

Transient ModelsAdaptive Analysis

Percent Refinement Per PassStopping Criterion

Number of Requested PassesPercent Error

Suggested ValuesUse Control Program

Activating a Control Program






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Manual Mesh RefinementMeshmaker CommandsTool BarGeneral ProcedureMesh Refinement

Undoing a RefinementMesh Menu

Mesh/SeedMesh/Seed/SurfaceMesh/Seed/ObjectMesh/Seed/SkinMesh/Seed/QuadTreeMesh/Seed/DeleteMesh/Seed/SaveSeed

Mesh Seeding for Parametric SweepsDeleting Mesh Seeding Operations

Mesh/MakeTriangle Aspect Ratios

Mesh/Line MatchPoint Placement

Mesh/DeleteMesh/DisplayMesh/Information

Refine MenuRefine/PointRefine/Area

Aborting an Area RefinementRefine/Object

Object InformationRefine Area and Refine NumberAborting an Object Refinement






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

EMpulseTransient ExcitationTransient Motion

Motion AttributesUnits of MotionMotion Setup

General ProcedureMechanical Setup

Functional Mechanical ValuesDeleting SymbolsFunctional Parameter Values

Source VariablesWinding VariablesSolid Conductor VariablesMechanical Transient VariablesMagnetization and Value Boundary Variables

Modifying the Motion SetupRotational MotionTranslational Motion

View WindowChanging the View of the Geometric Model

Zoom InZoom OutFit AllFit DrawingFill SolidsWire FrameWindow Commands

Window/MeasureWindow/GridWindow/SnapTo Mode

Modifying the Motion Status SetupExiting the Motion Setup

About Help

Go Back



Index





More

Top

SolveGenerating SolutionsCompleting the Solution ProcessMonitoring the Solution ProcessAborting the Solution ProcessStopping and Restarting the Solution ProcessRefreshing the PlotViewing the Geometric ModelViewing Executive Parameter Solutions

Solutions/MatrixViewing a Matrix

Distributed MaxwellLumped MaxwellDistributed SPICELumped SPICECoupling Coefficient

OperationsExportSet UnitsMatrix Norm

Solutions/Force/TorqueForceTorque

Solutions/Flux LinesSolutions/Flux Linkage

Modifying Turns and DepthOperations

ExportSet Units

Solutions/Current FlowSolutions/Core LossSolutions/Number RegistersSolutions/Transient Data






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Show CoordsSettings

Viewing Convergence DataNumber of PassesConvergence CriteriaFrequencyConvergence DataConvergence Display

Viewing Profile DataCommand/InfoReal Time and CPU TimeMemory SizeNumber of Elements

Solving a Problem with VariablesSolve/Nominal ProblemSolve/Variables

Solution ProcessAborting a SolutionErrors in Parametric Solutions

Displaying Solution InformationVariablesModel

Nominal GeometryParametric Geometry

SolutionsNominal SolutionsParametric Solutions

ConvergenceNominal ConvergenceParametric Convergence

ProfileGeneral Profile StatisticsParametric Profile Statistics






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Global MenuGlobal CommandsGlobal Settings

Displaying ObjectsMouse BehaviorUnitsZoom, Fill, and SetExecuting Commands

Global/DisplayObject ListsDisplay Object(s)Fill ViewDisplaying ObjectsAdjusting the View

Global/RecolorRecolor Object(s)New Color(s)Changing the Color of Selected Objects

Global/RefreshGlobal/Defaults

UnitsGrids

2D Grid DivisionMouse Grid Spacing

MouseObject SnapGrid SnapKeyboard Entry

Setting Defaults






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Window MenuWindow CommandsWindows and Subwindows

Post Processor WindowsActive SubwindowManipulating WindowsField of ViewResizing and Repositioning Windows

Window/SetupWindow/Setup/Settings

Theta and PhiShow AxisShow GridShow Octant OnlyShow KeyShow Section Key

Window/Setup/Full ScreenWindow/Setup/Quad ScreenWindow/Setup/Quad AllWindow/Setup/On-Off

Window/ZoomWindow/UnZoomWindow/ShiftWindow/MagnifyWindow/RefreshWindow/Measure

Level of Precision

About Help

Go Back



Index





More

Top

Post MenuPost CommandsPlotting Solutions

Line SegmentsPlotting Common Field QuantitiesPlotting Derived Field QuantitiesPlotting Derived Quantities Along a LineAnalyzing Saturation Levels in Nonlinear MaterialsAborting Plots

Post/PlotValues

Electrostatic Field QuantitiesAC and DC Conduction Field QuantitiesMagnetostatic, Transient, and Eddy Current Field QuantitiesEddy Axial Field Quantities

Type of PlotArrow PlotShaded PlotContour PlotGraph (Line Plots)Adjusting a Line Graph’s Display

Zoom InZoom OutFit AllShow CoordinatesSave As

Location of PlotPlaneLine

WindowColorBetter HardcopyPhase

Post/Line






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

General ProcedurePost/Line/Define

Defining Line SegmentsStraight Line SegmentsArcsObject Edges

Modifying Previously Defined Line SegmentsDisplaying Line SegmentsDeleting Line Segments

Post/Line/EntryPost/Line/DisplayPost/Line/PlotPost/Line/Value

Post/PlaneGeneral ProcedureScale to Window or Scale to ProblemPost/Plane/ContourPost/Plane/Contour DisplayPost/Plane/ShadePost/Plane/ArrowPost/Plane/Arrow RegionPost/Plane/Arrow DisplayPost/Plane/Max-MinPost/Plane/Value

Post/BH-ExamineThings to Consider

Post/BH PlotPlot Options

Viewing Nonlinear Permanent Magnet Curves

About Help

Go Back



Index





More

Top

Calc MenuCalc CommandsCalculators

Number CalculatorLine CalculatorPlane CalculatorPlotting

Plotting Over a PlanePlotting Along a LineDirect Plotting

Reading and WritingRegistersCalculator CommandsDisplaying Other Calculators

Calc/PlaneMaterialLoading Field Data

Magnetostatic and Transient Field QuantitiesElectrostatic Field QuantitiesEddy Current Field QuantitiesDC Conduction Field QuantitiesAC Conduction Field QuantitiesEddy Axial Field Quantities

Register OperationsScalar OperationsVector OperationsTransient OperationsGeneral OperationsPhasePlotting the Contents of the Top Plane RegisterCalc/Plane/ExportCalc/Plane/Decompose

Calc/NumberRegister Operations






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Scalar OperationsVector OperationsGeneral OperationsPhase

Calc/LineCreating Line RegistersRegister OperationsScalar OperationsVector OperationsGeneral OperationsPhaseDisplaying the Field in the Top Line Register






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Introduction to Parametric AnalysisNominal and Parametric Models

Nominal ModelParametric Model

Accessing the Parametrics Analysis ModuleGeneral Procedure

Create the ModelSet Up Solutions

Field and Nominal SolutionsSetup the Parametric Solution

Generate SolutionsPost Processing

Batch ProcessingBatch Mode for Workstations (UNIX)

Errors in Parametric SolutionsBatch Mode for Personal Computers

Batch Processing for Windows

About Help

Go Back



Index





More

Top

Technical NotesModules and SolversElectrostatic Field Simulation

TheoryCapacitance

Capacitance in Terms of Charges and VoltagesCapacitance in Terms of Currents and Time Varying VoltagesComputing Capacitance

Virtual Forces (Electrostatic)Virtual Torques (Electrostatic)Flux Linkage (Electrostatic)

Magnetostatic Field SimulationTheoryInductance

Inductance in Terms of Flux Linkage and CurrentsInductance in Terms of Voltages and Time Varying CurrentsComputing an Inductance Matrix

Virtual Forces (Magnetostatic)Virtual Torques (Magnetostatic)Flux Linkage (Magnetostatic)

Eddy Current Field SimulationTheory

Components of Current DensityIntegrating the Current DensityAssumptions

Deriving the Eddy Current EquationMaxwell’s EquationsRelationship of Magnetic and Electric FieldRelationship of Current and Current Density

Eddy Currents and Skin DepthImpedance Matrix

Computing an Impedance MatrixInductanceResistance

About Help

Go Back



Index





More

Top

Inductance and Resistance in Impedance ComputationsVirtual Forces (Eddy Current)Virtual Torques (Eddy Current)Current Flow (Eddy Current)Nonlinear Eddy Current Field Simulation

TheorySinusoidal BSinusoidal H

PermeabilityDC Conduction Field Simulation

TheorySteady-state ConditionsRelevant Time Constant

ConductanceCurrent Flow (DC Conduction)

AC Conduction Field SimulationTheory

AssumptionsAdmittanceCurrent Flow

Eddy Axial Field SimulationTheory

Electromagnetic SourcesAssumptions

Deriving the Eddy Axial Field EquationObtaining Maxwell’s Equations in Terms of HObtaining Currents

Current Flow (Eddy Axial)Axisymmetric Field SimulationTransient Simulation

AssumptionsTime-Dependent Magnetic Field Simulation

Stranded ConductorsSolid Conductors






Go Back

Index

About Help

Top

Solid Conductors with Current SourcesSolid Conductors with Voltage Sources

Translational MotionRotational Motion

Phasor NotationReal and Imaginary Components

Maxwell Online Help System 1 Copyright © 1995-2001 Ansoft Corporation

Maxwell 2D — Online Help SystemTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Using the Help SystemThe Topics ListThe Button CommandsLinks in the TextDocument TitleActive Regions on Graph-ics

Selecting Text and Graph-ics

The Menu BarHelp Window Functions

Using the Help SystemWelcome to the Maxwell Online Help System. The following sections discuss the interfaceof the online help system, and give helpful pointers on using each feature of the system.

The Topics List

The topics list shows topics that are available from the current document. It also highlightswhich topics are currently being viewed. As you move through the help system, the list willchange to display the most detailed list of topics possible.

> To go to the section describing a topic in the list:• Click on the topic in the list.

As you go further into detail, you may lose track of where you are in the “information tree”.The first topic in the list will typically have a higher order list of topics, so by repeatedlyclicking on the first item you can travel up the tree. You can also use the table of contentsto navigate through the manual.

The Button Commands

Links in the Text

Links in the text are always blue. You can follow a hypertext link in the text by clicking on itwith the mouse button. The link will highlight as you click on it, and the command will beexecuted when you release the mouse button. If you move the mouse pointer off of thelink before you release the button, the command will not be executed.

Document Title

The document title will help you to keep track of where you are in the help system.

Forward &Backward

These buttons move you forward and backward by one page in the cur-rent document.

Go Back Every time you click on a hypertext command to jump to a new location,the history of where you’ve been is updated. This button takes you backone hypertext jump.

Contents Takes you directly to the table of contents for the current document.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Using the Help SystemThe Topics ListThe Button CommandsLinks in the TextDocument TitleActive Regions onGraphics

Selecting Text andGraphics


Active Regions on Graphics

Often, a screen capture or other diagram will have active regions. These active regionsexecute hypertext commands when you click on them. The region will highlight when youclick on it, and as you release the button the command will be executed. If you move themouse pointer off of the link before you release the button, the command will not be exe-cuted.

By holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse around, you can see where theactive regions of a graphic are.

Selecting Text and Graphics

If you hold down the Control key on your keyboard, the cursor will change to allow you toselect text and graphics.

> To select document text:1. Hold down the Control key and click the left mouse button where you wish to begin

selecting text.2. Drag the mouse to the end of the text you wish to select.

If you select any text that contains anchored graphics frames, the graphics will becomeselected as well.

The Menu BarFile These commands perform various file operations.

Open Open another document for viewing.Print Print the current document.Close Close the current document window.

Edit These commands are used on the document text and graphics.Copy Copy the selection to the paste buffer.Copy Special Copy various formats from the selection to the paste

buffer, without copying the selection itself.Select All Select every object on the page, or all of the text in the

document, depending on what is selected.Find Search the current document for a specific string, or

other document feature.



Go Back

Contents

Index




Navigation These commands affect which page of the document is displayed in thehelp window. None of the commands affect the hypertext history exceptfor the Go Back command.Go To Page Go to a specific page in the current document.Next Page Go to the next page in the current document.Previous Page Go to the previous page in the current document.First Page Go to the first page in the current document.Last Page Go to the last page in the current document.Go Back Undo the last hypertext jump in the history.DocumentWindows

This cascading menu lists all of the documents thatare currently open in the viewer.

Zoom These commands affect the view of the document, and its window.Zoom In Make the view of the current document more detailed.Zoom Out Make the view of the current document less detailed.Fit Page Fit the page size to the current size of the window.Fit Window Fit the size of the window to the current page size.Zoom to 100 Set the magnification to 100%, the default.



Go Back

Contents

Index




Help Window Functions

Once you have accessed the online documentation, you can change the display of thedocumentation window in the following ways:

Page Number

Use this button to choose the page you wish to be on:

> To choose a page:1. Click on the Page Number button.2. Enter the page you wish to go to.3. Choose Go.

You are taken to the page you specified.

Screen Size (Percentage)

Use this button to specify the size of the documentation window.

> To specify the size of the documentation window:1. Click on and hold the Percentage button. A list of percentage sizes appears.2. Choose the percentage size you refer for the documentation window.3. Choose Fit Window to Page to fit a border to the documentation window.

You can set the steps of the percentage by choosing Set at the bottom of the percentagelist.

Page Number This button allows you to choose the page you wish to be on.Screen Size(Percentage)

Choose this button to change the size of the documentation windowby selecting a percentage size.

Screen Size(Step)

Choose one of the Z buttons to shrink or expand the documentationwindow by one step.

Page Scroll Choose these arrow page buttons to scroll the documentation up ordown by one page.

Scroll Bar Use the scroll bar allows to scroll through the documentation fasterthan using the page scroll buttons.



Go Back

Contents

Index




Screen Size (Step)

These buttons increase or decrease the size of the documentation window by

“steps”. Each step represents a percentage of the normal (100%) size of the page. Usethe Percentage button to view or change the steps.

> To increase the size of the documentation window:• Click on the large Z button. The page increases in size by one step. Use the

Percentage button to resize the window to fit the expanded page.> To decrease the size of the documentation window:

• Click on the small z button. The page decreases in size by one step. Use thePercentage button to resize the window to fit the expanded page.

Page Scroll

Use these to scroll through the online documentation one page at a time.

> To page through the online documentation:• Click on the page arrow buttons.

You are taken one page forward or backward in the documentation.

Scroll Bar

Use the scroll bar to scroll through the online documentation quickly.

> To scroll through the current document:1. Click and hold the scroll bar.2. Move the scroll bar to the section you wish to view in the document.

The online documentation displays the text you wish to see.


Maxwell 2D — IntroductionTopics:

Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Maxwell 2DMaxwell 2D is an interactive software package for analyzing electric and magnetic fieldsin structures with uniform cross-sections or full rotational symmetry — where the field pat-terns in the entire device can be analyzed by modeling the field patterns in its cross-sec-tion.

Depending on which simulator packages you selected, you can:

• Compute the following field quantities:• Static electric fields, forces, torques, and capacitances due to voltage distributions,

permanently polarized materials, and charges.• Static magnetic fields, forces, torques, and inductances due to DC currents, static

external magnetic fields, and permanent magnets. Fields can be simulated instructures that contain linear and nonlinear materials.

• Time-varying magnetic fields, forces, torques, and impedances due to AC currentsand oscillating external magnetic fields.

• Time-varying axial electric fields, displacement currents, and conduction currents.

Maxwell 2DMaxwell 2D and MaxwellControl Panel

Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3DTime-stepping SolutionsMaxwell 2D Parametric Anal-ysis Module

Accessing Maxwell 2DGeneral ProcedureExecutive Commands Win-dow

Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

• DC conduction currents, forces, torques, and conductances due to DC voltagedistributions.

• AC conduction currents, forces, torques, and admittances due to AC voltagedistributions.

• Thermal solutions.• If transient motion capability was purchased, perform time-stepping analyses for the

motion of objects in the model.• If parametric analysis capability was purchased, perform variational analyses of

designs by varying solution frequencies, model dimensions, material properties,excitations, and so forth.

The software’s generalized, finite-element based field solvers allow you to simulate elec-tric and magnetic fields in any type of device — from cross-sections of motors and trans-formers to integrated circuit packages. You must draw the structure and specify relevantmaterial characteristics, boundary conditions describing field behavior, sources of charge,current or voltage, and quantities that you want to compute (such as forces and torques).The simulator generates field solutions and computes the requested quantities. You canview and analyze the fields in the device using the software’s post-processing features.




Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control PanelThe Maxwell Control Panel (shown below) acts as a front end to all Maxwell softwareproducts — including Maxwell 2D. Through the Projects command, it enables you to cre-ate projects (which are used to store all the files relating to a specific structure that isbeing modeled) and access Maxwell 2D. It also handles functions that are common to allMaxwell software packages, such as setting screen colors, printing screen captures, andtranslating files.

In addition, you can access the following software modules from the Maxwell ControlPanel:

• The Project Manager, which accesses other Ansoft software packages that you mayhave purchased (such as Maxwell 3D) and allows you to create new projects.

• The Translation Manager. This allows you to convert different model types into newfile formats.

• The Print Manager. This defines the printer settings.• (UNIX only.) The Process Manager. This allows you to set a time at which to solve

your project.• The Utilities Panel which accesses:

• The 2D Modeler. This allows you to create 2D geometric models representingcross-sections of structures. These 2D models can then be read directly into theMaxwell 2D. The 2D Modeler is also available in Maxwell 2D.

• The Color Manager. This is used to define the default colors in the software.• PlotData. This allows you to generate plots of equations and experimental data.• The Expression Evaluator. This allows you to evaluate algebraic expressions.• The Material Manager. This allows you to define new materials to use in the model.




Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3DMaxwell 2D is sold as a stand-alone product, and is also distributed with Maxwell 3D.Though they perform similar functions, the two packages are used to model differenttypes of structures.

• Use Maxwell 2D to analyze electric and magnetic fields in devices with uniform cross-sections or full rotational symmetry — where a structure’s 3D field patterns can beaccurately modeled by simulating the fields in its cross-section. Such structures canbe analyzed more quickly and easily in Maxwell 2D than in Maxwell 3D.

• Use Maxwell 3D to analyze electric and magnetic fields in 3D structures that do nothave uniform cross-sections or complete rotational symmetry. These types ofstructures require full three-dimensional field simulation, since the behavior of theelectric or magnetic field in the entire device cannot be extrapolated from the behaviorof the field in its cross-section.

The following field quantities may be computed for Maxwell 3D models:

• DC magnetic fields — including fields in structures that contain nonlinear materials.• DC electric fields and voltage distributions.• AC magnetic fields and eddy currents.

Depending on which 3D field solver you selected, forces, torques, capacitance, induc-tance, and impedance may also be computed.

Maxwell 2D geometry files can be saved in the file format used in the 3D modeler, ortranslated into 3D format via the Maxwell Control Panel Translators command. They canthen be read into Maxwell 3D and used to create 3D models. In addition, BH-curves fornonlinear materials have the same format for both software packages.


Maxwell 2D and Maxwell3D

Time-stepping SolutionsMaxwell 2D Parametric Anal-ysis Module


Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

Time-stepping SolutionsIf you purchased EMpulse, Maxwell 2D’s time-stepping solver, you have the ability to per-form motion analysis in the model. This module is an add-on package that allows you tomove an object or group of objects either rotationally or translationally through the modelwithout having to model each individual placement of the objects across several differentmodels.

When creating the 2D model, specify one or more of the following types of objects formotion:

• Stationary objects do not move in the analysis.• Band objects are those in which the actual motion occurs. The mesh outside the band

object remains constant throughout the analysis while the mesh is constantlyregenerated within the band for each new position during the time-stepping sequence.No motion can take place outside a band object.

• Moving objects are those whose motion is defined as rotational or translational.Rotational objects rotate about a fixed point, while translational objects slide acrossthe model within the band object. All moving objects must reside within a band object.

During the transient solution, EMpulse slides or rotates the moving object and analysesthe source and data values at each time step.




Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis ModuleIf you purchased the Maxwell 2D’s Parametric Analysis module, you have the ability toperform variational analysis of your designs. This module is an add-on package thatallows you to simulate design variations using a single Maxwell 2D model, instead of hav-ing to explicitly set up and solve a series of models.

When creating a 2D model, you identify one or more of the following design parametersthat are to be changed during the simulation:

• Geometric dimensions.• Material properties.• Boundary and source excitations.• Solution frequency.

The Parametric Analysis module then sets these design parameters to the values youspecify, and computes a solution for each variation. You can then use the module’s post-processing functions to evaluate each variation on your basic design.


Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3DTime-stepping SolutionsMaxwell 2D ParametricAnalysis Module


Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Accessing Maxwell 2D> After the Maxwell 2D software is installed as described in the Maxwell Installation

Guide, start the software:1. Open the Maxwell Control Panel.

• If you are running the software on a workstation, enter the following command atthe UNIX prompt in an terminal window:

maxwell &

• If you are running the software on a personal computer, double-click the mouse onthe Maxwell Control Panel icon.

2. Choose Projects from the control panel to open the Project Manager window:

3. Specify your project.• For an existing project, move to the directory that contains your Maxwell 2D project

and highlight the desired project.• Alternatively, choose New to create a new project.




Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

4. Choose Open. The Maxwell 2D Executive Commands window appears:

Note: In general, running any software when you are logged in as root can be dan-gerous. As Evi Nemeth, Garth Snyder, and Scott Seebass put in their bookUNIX® System Administration Handbook:

“Using the root login is like driving an expensive sports car; it gets youwhere you need to go quickly, but an accident will result in a big repairbill. You should use the root login with great reverence and caution, andnever take it out for a spin at a time when you wouldn’t trust yourself tooperate an automobile or other heavy machinery.”

Unless you have a specific reason to do so, avoid running the field simulatorif you are logged in as root.




Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

General ProcedureThe general procedure summarized below can be used to create a model of a 2D struc-ture for which you wish to compute electric or magnetic fields.

> Follow this general procedure to create and solve models of 2D structures:1. Select the type of electric or magnetic field solver that you wish to use. Click

Select solver and drawing type

Draw geometric model and

Assign material properties

Assign boundary conditions

Yes

No

Request that force,

Set up solution criteria and

Generate solution

Inspect parameter solutions; view

Compute otherquantities during

solution?

torque, capacitance,inductance, admittance,impedance, flux linkage,

flow be computed duringthe solution process.

(optionally) refine the mesh

solution information; display plots offields and manipulate basic field

quantities

(optionally) identify grouped objects

conductance or current

and sources




Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

on the button next to Solver to view a menu of available field solvers, then selectthe desired solver. Depending on the Maxwell 2D package that you’ve purchased,different electric or magnetic field solvers may be available. If you choose theThermal solver, a new command becomes active in the Draw Model menu.

2. Select the type of model to be created. Choose Drawing. A menu appears.• Choose XY Plane to create a cartesian model — where the 2D model represents

the xy cross-section of a structure that extends infinitely long in the z-direction.• Choose RZ Plane to create an axisymmetric model — where the 2D model

represents a cross-section that’s revolved around an axis of symmetry.3. Create the geometric model of the structure. Choose Define Model, and from

the menu that appears:• Choose Draw Model to create (or modify) the individual objects that make up the

2D cross section of the device for which fields are to be computed.• If you selected the Thermal solver, you may choose Couple Model to define the

thermal model.• Optionally, choose Group Objects to identify objects in your model that are

electrically identical.4. Assign materials to objects in the structure. Choose Setup Materials to

specify the material attributes of objects (such as relative permittivity, relativepermeability, and so forth).

5. Define the desired sources (electromagnetic excitations) and boundaryconditions for the model. Choose Setup Boundaries/Sources to describe thebehavior of the electric or magnetic field at object interfaces and the edges of theproblem region.

6. Compute other quantities of interest during the solution process, such asforces, torques, matrices, or flux linkage. Choose Setup Executive Parameters,and from the menu that appears:• Choose Matrix to compute a capacitance, inductance, impedance, admittance or

conductance matrix for conductors in the structure. The type of matrix that can berequested depends on the solver you selected.

• Choose Force to compute the force on selected objects due to the electric or

Note: If you purchased the Maxwell 2D parametric analysis package, be awarethat some executive commands are accessed differently.




Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

magnetic field in the structure.• Choose Torque to compute the torque on selected objects due to the electric or

magnetic field in the structure.• Choose Flux Linkage to compute a value for the flux linkage across a line (or

lines) you specify.• Choose Current Flow to compute the current flow across a line (or lines) you

specify.7. Enter refinement criteria for the various field solvers and to specify whether

an adaptive analysis should be performed. Choose Setup Solution Options toenter this information (in most cases, accept the defaults.) To computeelectromagnetic fields over a two dimensional space, the Maxwell 2D first createsa finite element mesh that divides the structure into thousands of smaller regions.The field in each sub-region (element) can then be represented with a separatepolynomial. In an adaptive analysis, the field simulator automatically refines thefield solution in regions where the error is highest.Optionally, you can refine the model’s finite element mesh manually to increasethe density of the mesh in areas of interest (such as air gaps). This makes the fieldsolution in these areas more accurate.

8. If you have purchased EMpulse, you can define the motion parameters of theobjects in the model. Choose Setup Solutions/Motion Setup to describe themotion parameters.

9. Compute the desired field solution and any requested parameters (force,torque, and so forth). Choose Solve to generate the solutions.

10.View the results. After the solutions are computed, do the following:• Choose Post Process to display contour, shaded, and arrow plots of the

electromagnetic field patterns and to manipulate the corresponding field solutions.If you run a transient solution, you can also choose this to display any motionresults. Mathematical operations allow you to compute any quantity of interest thatcan be derived from the basic electromagnetic fields.

• Choose Solutions at the top of the Executive Commands window to view the finalresults from any force, torque, flux linkage, current flow, or matrix computation.

In general, these commands must be chosen in the sequence listed. For example, theSetup Materials command is operable only after the Define Model/Draw Model com-mand has been used to draw the structure’s geometry. Commands that cannot beaccessed are greyed out.




Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

Executive Commands WindowThe main areas on the Maxwell 2D Executive Commands window are as follow:

• Executive Commands menu.• Solution Monitoring area.• Display area.

The Executive Commands menu is shown below with a check mark beside each com-mand that has already been completed.

Executive Commands Menu

This area contains the executive commands for Maxwell 2D. There is a general procedurethat gives a brief description of each command. Each command has at least one chapterof this online guide devoted to it.

Executive

Display area (geometric model)

Solution monitoring area

CompletedCommands

Commandsmenu




Executive CommandsMenu

Solution MonitoringDisplay Area

Changing the View ofthe Geometric Model

Changing the View ofTransient Solutions

Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

Solution Monitoring

During Maxwell 2D’s solution process, system messages are displayed in the arealabeled Solution Monitoring.

Display Area

The display area initially shows the geometric model. After a field or parameter solutionhas been generated, it can also display information associated with the solution. Four but-tons appear at the top of the display area:

Variables (Parametrics package only.) Displays the parametric solutions.Model Displays the geometric model of the 2D structure.Solutions Displays the final results of any force, torque, matrix, current flow, or

flux linkage computation requested via the Setup ExecutiveParameters command.

Convergence Displays criteria, such as total system energy, power loss, andenergy error, that allow you to verify whether a field solution hasconverged. Convergence information can be displayed graphicallyor in a table.

Profile Displays a profile of CPU and memory usage associated with eachsolution process.








Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

Changing the View of the Geometric Model

Use the commands that appear beneath the model to change your view of it.

• To zoom in on a section of the geometric model:1. Choose Zoom In.2. Select a point at one corner of the region to be zoomed in on. To do so, move

the cursor to the desired point and click the left mouse button.3. Click the left mouse button on the point in the diagonal corner of the desired

region.The system then expands the portion of the structure in the selected region to fillthe viewing window. This command works in the same way as the 2D ModelerWindow/Change View/Zoom In command.

• To zoom out of a section of the geometric model:1. Choose Zoom Out.2. Select a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed out. To do so,

move the cursor to the desired point and click the left mouse button.3. Click the left mouse button on a point in the diagonal corner of the desired

region.The system then redraws the screen and shrinks the model to fit in the selectedregion. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler Window/Change View/Zoom Out command.

• Choose Fit All to view the entire geometric model in the display area. The Maxwell 2Dautomatically adjusts the field of view, making all objects as large as possible whilekeeping the entire structure visible. This command works in the same way as the 2DModeler Window/Change View/Fit All command.

• Choose Fit Drawing to display the entire drawing region. The drawing region isdefined using the command Model/Drawing Size. This command works in the sameway as the 2D Modeler Window/Change View/Fit Drawing command.

• Choose Fill Solids to display closed geometric objects as filled-in solids. By default,only the outlines of object borders are displayed. Choosing Fill Solids for complexgeometries allows you to better visualize the relationships between each object in themodel. When you choose Fill Solids, its button toggles to Wire Frame. Choose WireFrame to switch back to a wire frame view of the geometric model. These commandswork in the same way as the 2D Modeler Window/Change View/Fill Solids andWindow/Change View/Wire Frame commands.








Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

Changing the View of Transient Solutions

Use the commands that appear beneath the transient solution plots to change your viewof it.

Zooming In> To zoom in on a section of the geometric model:

1. Choose View/Zoom In.2. Select a point at one corner of the region to be zoomed in on. To do so, move

the cursor to the desired point and click the left mouse button.3. Click the left mouse button on the point in the diagonal corner of the desired

region.The system then expands the plot of the structure in the selected region to fill theviewing window.

Zooming Out> To zoom out of a section of the geometric model:

1. Choose View/Zoom Out.2. Select a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed out. To do so,

move the cursor to the desired point and click the left mouse button.3. Click the left mouse button on a point in the diagonal corner of the desired

region.The system then redraws the screen and shrinks the plot to fit in the selectedregion.

Viewing the Entire Plot

Choose View/Fit All to view the entire geometric plot in the display area. Maxwell 2Dautomatically adjusts the field of view, making all axes as large as possible while keepingthe entire plot visible.








Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

Displaying Plot Coordinates

Once a plot has been displayed, choose Show Coords to display the coordinates of aselected point.

> To view the x- and y-coordinates of points on the plot:1. Plot the desired data. To get a closer view of a graph to more accurately determine

its coordinates, use the View/Zoom In command to zoom into that part of the plot.2. Choose Show Coords.3. Move the mouse to the desired point on the plot.4. Click the left mouse button. A window appears showing the coordinates of the

selected point. The point is marked with a cross.5. To view the coordinates of additional points, repeat steps 3 and 4.6. Click the right mouse button to exit the command.

Formatting Transient Plot Axes

Choose Settings/Format Axes to define the plot axes of the transient solution.

This command functions identically to PlotData’s Plot/Format Axes command.

Formatting Transient Plot Graphs

Choose Settings/Format Graphs to define the display of the transient solution plots.

This command functions identically to PlotData’s Plot/Format Graphs command.








Batch Processing



Go Back

Contents

Index

Batch ProcessingAs an alternative to running Maxwell 2D through the Maxwell Control Panel, use the soft-ware’s batch processing features to generate field solutions for your 2D models. You willstill need to follow the general procedures described below for each model in order forbatch mode to work properly:

• Select the type of field to be computed.• Create the geometric model.• Define material characteristics.• Set up boundaries.• Request forces, torques, and other quantities of interest.• Enter the desired solution parameters.

Batch mode operates differently on workstations and Windows personal computers. Youcan also use batch mode when you are doing Parametric Analysis of a 2D structure. For acomplete list of batch processing flags, consult the License Manager on the Non-Graphi-cal Interface.

Licensing and Non-Graphical Interfaces

If you have not installed the Graphical User Interface (GUI) license for Maxwell 2D, youmay still generate solutions using the batch mode from the command line.

To generate a solution non-graphically, add the -ng flag just before the -batch flag in thecommand. This will allow you to generate a solution without the need for checking out aGUI license.




Batch ProcessingLicensing and Non-Graphical Interfaces

Batch Mode for Worksta-tions (UNIX)


Batch Mode for PersonalComputers (MicrosoftWindows)

Batch Log File



Go Back

Contents

Index

Batch Mode for Workstations (UNIX)

To run the software in batch mode on a workstation, enter the following at the UNIXprompt:

m2dfs -batch projectname

where projectname is the name and directory path of the Maxwell 2D project that youwish to solve. Note that adding the .pjt extension to the project name is optional — thesoftware automatically looks for the directory projectname.pjt when solving a project inbatch mode.

Batch Log File

When you first run a batch job, the system creates a file named batch.log. This file will becreated in your home directory. Log entries for subsequent batch jobs are appended tothe end of this file. The batch.log file lists information about each batch job, including:

• The time that the batch job starts.• The name and directory path of the project that's being solved.• Whether or not the solution is completed successfully.• Any error messages that are generated during the solution.

If your batch job does not successfully solve the requested problems, examine this file tosee what caused the job to fail.

Batch Script File

To run multiple batch jobs, it is recommended that you create a UNIX script file. Forinstance, to generate solutions in batch mode for the projects solen and connect (both inthe directory ~/2dpjt), create the following script file using any UNIX text editor:

m2dfs -batch ~/2dpjt/solen;

m2dfs -batch ~/2dpjt/connect;

When run, this script file generates solutions for each batch job sequentially, which usesCPU time and memory more efficiently than running them simultaneously.




Batch ProcessingLicensing and Non-Graphi-cal Interfaces




Batch Log File



Go Back

Contents

Index

Batch Mode for Personal Computers (Microsoft Windows)

To generate a solution using the Windows command shell, enter the following at the com-mand prompt:

path\m2dfs -batch option projectname

where:

• path is the drive and directory path where the Maxwell 2D executables are installed(for example, c:\win32app\maxwell).

• projectname is the drive, directory path and name of the Maxwell 2D project that youwish to solve.

To generate solutions for multiple projects, create a batch file that can be run in the Win-dows command shell.

Batch Log File

When you first run a project in batch mode, the system creates a file named batch.log. Ifyou have an account on your Windows machine, the variables HOMEDRIVE and HOME-PATH are set up, and the file will be stored in your home directory (you will need to set upthese variables by hand in Windows). If the variables are not set up, the file will be storedin the Windows directory. A separate batch.log file is created for each project that’ssolved as a batch job. If you solve the project in batch mode again, new log entries areappended onto the end of this file.

The batch.log file lists information about the batch job, including:

• The time that the batch job starts.• The name and directory path of the project that's being solved.• Whether or not the solution is completed successfully.• Any error messages that are generated during the solution.

If your batch job does not successfully solve the requested problems, examine this file tosee what caused it to fail.




Batch ProcessingLicensing and Non-Graphi-cal Interfaces




Batch Log File


Maxwell 2D — SolversTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

SolverUse the Solver command to select the field solver you want to use to simulate the electricor magnetic fields in the device being modeled.

> To select a solver:1. Choose Solver from the Executive Commands window. (The currently selected

field solver is listed there.) A menu with the following choices appears:• Electrostatic• Magnetostatic• Eddy Current• DC Conduction• Thermal• AC Conduction• Eddy Axial• Transient

2. Select the desired solver from the menu. The solver name appears next to Solver.

Note: The specific solvers that are available depend on which Maxwell 2D packageyou purchased. Solvers for packages that you have not purchased — orhave not yet entered an authorization codeword for — cannot be selectedand are “grayed out” on the menu. See the Maxwell Installation Guide forinstructions on entering codewords for the various solver packages.

SolverModifying the Solver TypeMaxwell 2D Software Pack-ages

Electric FieldsElectrostatic FieldSolver

DC Conduction FieldSolver

Thermal Field SolverAC Conduction FieldSolver

DC Magnetic FieldsMagnetostatic FieldSolver

AC Magnetic FieldsEddy Current FieldSolver

Eddy Axial Field SolverTransient SolverCompleteParametric Analysis



Go Back

Contents

Index

Modifying the Solver TypeOccasionally, you may want to change the electric or magnetic field solver used to com-pute fields in a model. If you change the solver after specifying materials, defining sourcesand boundaries, setting up executive parameters, or computing a solution, the followingmessage appears:

If you change the type of the solver, allproblem setups will become invalid and allsolutions will be deleted.

Do one of the following:

• Choose OK to change the solver type.• Choose Cancel to cancel the change.

Although the model retains material information and any boundary conditions or executiveparameters that apply to the new solver type, all solutions are deleted and its setupbecomes invalid. You must access Setup Materials, Setup Boundaries/Sources, andSetup Executive Parameters again to set up a valid problem with the new solver.










Go Back

Contents

Index

Maxwell 2D Software PackagesThe field solvers that are available to simulate the electric or magnetic fields in a structuredepend on which Maxwell 2D package you purchased. Currently available packages are:

• Electric Fields• DC Magnetics• AC Magnetics• EMpulse• Thermal• Complete (includes all solvers)• Parametric Analysis (can come with any of the solver packages listed above)

These packages are available for both the Windows and workstation versions of the soft-ware. The field solvers associated with each package are summarized below:

Package Solvers Field QuantityComputed

Derived FieldQuantities

Electric Fields Electrostatic φ (DC electric potential) E, D

AC Conduction φ(jωt) (AC electric potential) E(jωt), D(jωt), J(jωt)

DC Conduction φ (DC electric potential) E, J

DC Magnetics Magnetostatic AZ or Aφ (DC magneticpotential)

H, B

AC Magnetics Eddy Current AZ(jωt) or Aφ(jωt) (AC mag-netic potential), φ(jωt) (ACelectric potential)

H(jωt), B(jωt), J(jωt)

Eddy Axial HZ(jωt) (AC magnetic field) E(jωt), D(jωt), J(jωt)

EMpulse Transient AZ(t) H(t), B(t), J(t)

Thermal Solver Thermal T (temperature) none.

Complete All of the above All of the above All of the above

Parametric Analysis Any of the above Any of the above Any of the above










Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Electric Fields

The Electric Fields package allows you to simulate static electric fields, and steady-state(DC) and time-varying (AC) conduction currents. It includes the following field solvers:

• Electrostatic• DC Conduction• AC Conduction

Electrostatic Field Solver

The electrostatic field solver computes static electric fields arising from potential differ-ences and charge distributions. Use it to model potential distributions, electric fields,stored energy, capacitance, forces, torques, and electric flux linkage. (For instance, thepotential field around the capacitor shown below was computed using the electrostaticfield solver.) In addition, any quantity that can be derived from the basic electric fieldquantities can be analyzed.

The electrostatic field solver assumes that no current is flowing in any material (that is, allcharges are static). Depending on whether you are creating a cartesian (XY) or axisym-

File Global Window Show Post Calc

DoneConverting DataReading TrianglesReading Points

Maxwell2D PostProcessorVer. 6.2.09

Mouse ModeObject YesGrid YesKeyboard No

Maximumsxy

Minimumsxy

Mouse Positionu +0.000v +0.000

Mouse Left

Mouse Right

Unitsmm

-5.0000e+01

5.0000e+01

-3.5000e+01

3.5000e+01

MENU PICK

3x

y

Voltage

1.0000e+00 9.0000e-01 8.0000e-01 7.0000e-01 6.0000e-01 5.0000e-01 4.0000e-01 3.0000e-01 2.0000e-01 1.0000e-01 0.0000e+00










Go Back

Contents

Index

metric (RZ) model, it also assumes that:

• In cartesian problems — where the geometry represents an xy cross-section of adevice that’s “infinitely” long — the electric field lies entirely in the xy-plane beingmodeled. There is no component of the electric field in the z-direction.

• In axisymmetric problems — where the geometry represents a cross-section of adevice that’s swept around an axis of rotational symmetry — the electric field issymmetric about the axis. The electric field in the RZ cross-section being modeled isexactly the same as the field in any other cross-section. There is no component of E inthe φ-direction. This rotational symmetry reduces a three-dimensional problem to atwo-dimensional one without making any assumptions about end effects.

You are expected to specify material properties, and any charge densities, net charges,surface charges, or potentials on objects. The electrostatic field solver then computes theelectric potential, φ, for the model. From the electric potential, it derives the electric field,E, and the electric flux density, D.










Go Back

Contents

Index

DC Conduction Field Solver

The DC conduction field solver allows you to analyze conduction currents due to steady-state electric fields in conductors and lossy dielectrics. Use it to analyze current distribu-tions, electric field distributions and potential differences, conductances, and ohmiclosses in lossy materials. For instance, the current flow in the structure below was com-puted using the DC conduction field solver. In addition, any quantity that can be derivedfrom the basic electric field quantities can be analyzed.

The DC conduction field solver assumes that the current flow in a conducting material hasalready reached steady-state condition. Depending on whether you are creating a carte-sian (XY) or axisymmetric (RZ) model, it also assumes that:

• In cartesian problems, the current flows entirely within the xy-plane being modeled.There is no z-component of current.

• In axisymmetric problems, current flow is symmetric to the axis of rotational symmetry.Current flow in the rz cross-section being modeled is exactly the same as the currentflow in any other rz cross-section of the structure. There is no φ-component of current.

You are expected to specify material properties and the electric potential at one or moreobject interfaces or boundaries in the model. The DC conduction field solver then com-putes the electric potential, φ, for the model. From the electric potential, it derives the elec-tric field, E, and the current density, J.










Go Back

Contents

Index

Thermal Field Solver

The thermal field solver allows you to generate a temperature solution for the modelbased on the electromagnetic fields running through the system. Use it to analyze thetemperature distribution of a model. This is particularly useful in determining whichobjects in a model are more susceptible to thermal effects.










Go Back

Contents

More

Index

AC Conduction Field Solver

The AC conduction field solver allows you to analyze conduction currents due to time-varying electric fields in conductors and lossy dielectrics. Use it to analyze current distri-butions, electric field distributions and potential differences, admittances, lossy materials,and stored energy. For instance, the admittance matrix associated with the structureshown below can be computed using the AC conduction field solver. In addition, anyquantity that can be derived from the basic electromagnetic quantities can be analyzed.

The AC conduction field solver can only compute conduction currents for cartesian (XY)models. It assumes that all sources are sinusoids oscillating at the same frequency.Optionally, you may specify different phase angles for different sources.

You are expected to specify material properties and the electric potential at one or moreobject interfaces or boundaries in the model. The AC conduction field solver then com-putes the electric potential, φ(t), for the model. From the electric potential, it derives theelectric field, E(t), the electric flux density, D(t), and the current density, J(t).










Go Back

Contents

Index

DC Magnetic Fields

The DC Magnetic Fields package allows you to analyze static magnetic fields in struc-tures that contain both linear and nonlinear magnetic materials. It consists of the Magne-tostatic field solver, which is described below.

Magnetostatic Field Solver

The magnetostatic field solver lets you compute static magnetic fields arising from DCcurrents and other sources like permanent magnets and external magnetic fields. Mag-netic fields in both linear and nonlinear materials (that is, materials whose relative perme-ability is given by a B vs. H curve) can be simulated. Use it to view lines of magnetic fluxand compute quantities like inductance, stored energy, forces, and torques. For instance,the magnetostatic field solver was used to simulate the magnetic flux and compute torquefor the motor shown below. In addition, any quantity that can be derived from the basicmagnetic field quantities can be analyzed.

Depending on whether you are creating a cartesian (XY) or axisymmetric (RZ) model, themagnetostatic field solver assumes that:

• In cartesian problems, all current flows in the z-direction, perpendicular to the cross-section being modeled. The magnetic field lies entirely in the xy-plane, with no z-component.

2D PostProcessorVer. 6.2.09


Maximumsxy

Minimumsxy


Mouse Left

Mouse Right

Unitsinches

-1.0000e+00

1.0000e+00

-1.0000e+00

1.0000e+00

MENU PICK

3x

y

Flux Lines

1.8267e-03 1.4616e-03 1.0966e-03 7.3147e-04 3.6638e-04 1.2912e-06 -3.6380e-04 -7.2889e-04 -1.0940e-03 -1.4591e-03 -1.8242e-03










Go Back

Contents

More

Index

• In axisymmetric problems, all current flows in the φ-direction around the device’s axisof rotational symmetry, perpendicular to the cross-section being modeled. Themagnetic field is rotationally symmetric to this axis, reducing a three-dimensionalproblem to a two-dimensional one. There is no φ-component of the magnetic field.

You are expected to specify material properties (including BH-curves for non-linear mate-rials), current densities, total currents or surface currents, and other magnetic sourcessuch as permanent magnets and external fields. The magnetostatic field solver then com-putes the magnetic vector potential, AZ (cartesian models) or Aφ (axisymmetric models).The magnetic field, H, and the magnetic flux density, B, are derived from the magneticvector potential.










Go Back

Contents

Index

AC Magnetic Fields

The AC Magnetic Fields package allows you to simulate the effect of time-varying cur-rents and magnetic fields in structures. It includes the following field solvers:

• Eddy Current• Eddy Axial

Eddy Current Field Solver

The eddy current field solver allows you to simulate the effects of time-varying currents inparallel-conductor structures. Use it to model eddy currents, skin effects, impedances,ohmic losses, forces and torques, and magnetic flux. In the example illustrated below, forinstance, the eddy current solver was used to compute induced eddy currents in the cylin-der due to a time-varying magnetic field. In addition, any quantity that can be derived fromthe basic magnetic field quantities can be analyzed.

The eddy current field solver assumes that all currents are sinusoids oscillating at thesame frequency. These time-varying currents produce a time-varying magnetic field in theplane perpendicular to the conductors in which currents flow. In turn, this magnetic fieldinduces eddy currents in the source conductors and in any other conductors parallel tothem.



Maximumsxy

Minimumsxy


Mouse Left

Mouse Right

Unitsmm

0.0000e+00

1.0000e+02

-3.5000e+01

3.5000e+01

MENU PICK

Flux Lines

4.7647e-08 4.2883e-08 3.8118e-08 3.3353e-08 2.8588e-08 2.3824e-08 1.9059e-08 1.4294e-08 9.5294e-09 4.7647e-09 0.0000e+00










Go Back

Contents

More

Index

• In cartesian problems, all current flows in the z-direction, perpendicular to the cross-section being modeled. The magnetic field lies entirely in the xy-plane, with no z-component.

• In axisymmetric problems, all current flows in the φ-direction around the device’s axisof rotational symmetry, perpendicular to the cross-section being modeled. Themagnetic field is rotationally symmetric to this axis, reducing a three-dimensionalproblem to a two-dimensional one. There is no φ-component of the magnetic field.

You are expected to specify material properties, current densities, total currents or surfacecurrents, and other magnetic sources such as external fields. Optionally, you may specifydifferent phase angles for different sources. The eddy current field solver then computesthe magnetic vector potential, AZ (t) (cartesian models) or Aφ(t) (axisymmetric models).

The magnetic field, H(t), the magnetic flux density, B(t), and the current density, J(t), arederived from these basic field quantities. The current density can be further broken downinto three components:

• The source current density, Js(t), due to differences in electric potential.• The induced eddy current density, Je(t), due to time-varying magnetic fields.• The displacement current density, Jd(t), due to time-varying electric fields.










Go Back

Contents

Index

Eddy Axial Field Solver

The eddy axial field solver allows you to analyze eddy currents in devices subject to time-varying magnetic fields. Use it to analyze the effect of eddy currents on ohmic power loss,stored energy and flux distribution. For example, the power losses and eddy current distri-bution due to the crack in the solenoid shown below were computed using the eddy axialfield solver. In addition, any quantity that can be derived from the basic magnetic fieldquantities can be analyzed.

The eddy axial current solver only computes the effects of time-varying fields in cartesian(XY) models. It assumes that all field quantities are sinusoids oscillating at the same fre-quency. All current flows in the xy plane being modeled — there is no z-component of cur-rent. There are no source currents generated by an applied potential. The magnetic fieldhas a z-component only, and is normal to the cross-section being modeled.

You specify the material properties of all objects in the model; however, the only “sources”are established by specifying values of the magnetic field, HZ(t), at boundaries. The eddyaxial field solver then computes the magnetic field in the structure. From the magneticfield, it derives the electric field, E(t), the electric flux density, D(t), and the current density,J(t). The current density can be further broken down into two components:

DoneConverting DataReading TrianglesReading Points



Maximumsxy

Minimumsxy


Mouse Left

Mouse Right

Unitsmm

-5.0000e+01

5.0000e+01

-3.5000e+01

3.5000e+01

MENU PICK

H(z)

5.0000e+02 4.4371e+02 3.8742e+02 3.3113e+02 2.7484e+02 2.1855e+02 1.6227e+02 1.0598e+02 4.9687e+01 -6.6016e+00 -6.2891e+01







Eddy Axial FieldSolver




Go Back

Contents

Index







Eddy Axial FieldSolver


• The eddy current density, Je(t), due to time-varying magnetic fields.• The displacement current density, Jd(t), due to time-varying electric fields.

There are no source currents in the problem.

Transient Solver

The transient solver, EMpulse, allows you to analyze the solutions at each time step of atransient solution. Use this solver to determine the force and torque on the models thatmove with rotational or translational motion. Objects can only display one type of motion.

You can also use this solver to determine the fields which result from a non-sinusoidaltime-varying voltage or current excitation.

The transient solver generates solutions for the power loss, speed of the moving objects,forces on translational objects, torque on rotating objects, and the displacement angle asa function of time.

Additionally, if windings are involved in the model, the source values and flux linkage datafor each winding are computed as well.

For voltage sources, the back electromotive force (emf) and the resultant current are cal-culated.

All generated solutions can be analyzed and plotted in the Post Processor and in Plot-Data.

Complete

The complete Maxwell 2D package includes all solvers in the Electric Fields, DC Magnet-ics, AC Magnetics, and EMpulse packages.

Parametric Analysis

The Parametric Analysis package can be purchased with any of the field solver packageslisted in this chapter. It enables you to perform variational analysis on Maxwell 2D models.Using it, you can vary different design parameters — such as the dimensions of thegeometry, material properties, excitations or frequency — and solve for fields and quanti-ties such as force, torque, or capacitance for each variant on the original model. Aftergenerating a solution for a parametric model, you can then use the module’s post-pro-cessing functions to analyze the results.


Maxwell 2D — HotkeysTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

HotkeysList of Hotkeys

2D Modeler Hotkeys2D Boundary ManagerHotkeys

2D Meshmaker HotkeysParametric Table Hot-keys

Parametrics Post Pro-cessor Hotkeys

HotkeysSome commands in Maxwell 2D may be accessed through “hotkeys” — keystrokes thatallow you to bypass the menu system and directly execute commands. They are generallydesignated and chosen as follows:

Hotkeys are listed on menus after the commands which they execute. For example, theWindow menu in 2D Modeler displays the following hotkeys:

> To use the hotkey to shade the wireframe objects:1. Make sure all command menus are closed. If one of the command menus is open,

click the right mouse button outside of the menu to close it.2. Press the Control and F keys at the same time.

The wireframe object is now shaded.

You may view a list of all the hotkeys for Maxwell 2D.

Modifier + key Hold down the modifier(s) — such as Shift or Ctrl — and press thekey(s).

BS Press the Back Space key.Key Press the key. All hotkeys should be entered in lower case.

Note: Hotkeys are not accessible if any of the command menus are displayed.

Grid GFill Solids Ctrl+F



Go Back

Contents

More

Index





List of Hotkeys

The list of hotkeys, divided by module.

2D Modeler Hotkeys

The following is a list of hotkeys for the 2D Modeler:

Hotkey Function

Ctrl + N File/New. Opens a new window. New windows will close the win-dows of any previous models.

Ctrl + O File/Open. Reads in an existing geometric model or field solution.Opening a new window will close any currently open windows.

Ctrl + W File/Close. Closes the current model or solution, deleting the win-dow it is displayed in.

Ctrl + S File/Save. Writes out a model to a set of disk files.

Ctrl + Q File/Exit. Exits the current module and returns to the ExecutiveCommands window.

Ctrl + Z Edit/Undo. Reverses the effect of the last command.

Ctrl + X Edit/Cut. Deletes the selected items, placing them in the pastebuffer.

Ctrl + C Edit/Copy. Copies the selected items to the paste buffer.

Ctrl + V Edit/Paste. Copies the contents of the paste buffer to the activeproject.

Del Edit/Clear. Deletes the selected items but does not place them inthe paste buffer.

Back Space Edit/Deselect All. Deselects all currently selected objects.



Go Back

Contents

Index





F4 Window/Tile/All. Moves and resizes windows to display them all onthe screen at the same time.

F5 Window/Cascade/All. Stacks (“cascades”) windows, starting at theupper left corner of the project window.

F1 Help/On Context. Provides help on the items you click on.

Hotkey Function



Go Back

Contents

Index


2D Modeler Hotkeys2D Boundary Man-ager Hotkeys



2D Boundary Manager Hotkeys

The following is a list of hotkeys for the 2D Boundary Manager:

Hotkey Function



Ctrl + Z Edit/Undo. Reverses the effect of the last command.

Del Edit/Clear. Resets a surface to its default boundary conditions.

Back Space Edit/Deselect All. Deselects all currently selected objects.

S Model/SnapTo Mode. Defines the snap of the viewing window.

F4 Window/Tile. Moves and resizes windows to display them all on thescreen at the same time.

F5 Window/Cascade. Stacks (“cascades”) windows, starting at theupper left corner of the project window.

= Window/Change View/Zoom In. Zooms in on the model.

- Window/Change View/Zoom Out. Zooms away from the model.

F Window/Change View/Fit All. Fits the entire model in the viewingwindow, including the background.

Ctrl + D Window/Change View/Fit Drawing. FIts only the model in theviewing window.

G Window/Grid. Defines the grid settings in the viewing window.

Ctrl + F Window/Fill Solids and Window/Wire Frame. Toggles the displayof the objects with either a wireframe outline or solid color.




Go Back

Contents

Index



2D Meshmaker Hot-keys

Parametric Table Hot-keys


2D Meshmaker Hotkeys

The following is a list of hotkeys for the 2D Meshmaker:

Hotkey Function

Ctrl + O File/Open. Reads in an existing geometric model or field solution.Opening a new window will close any currently open windows.

Ctrl + W File/Close. Closes the current model or solution, deleting the win-dow it is displayed in.



S Model/SnapTo Mode. Defines the snap of the viewing window.



= Window/Change View/Zoom In. Zooms in on the model.

- Window/Change View/Zoom Out. Zooms away from the model.

F Window/Change View/Fit All. Fits the entire model in the viewingwindow, including the background.

Ctrl + D Window/Change View/Fit Drawing. FIts only the model in theviewing window.

G Window/Grid. Defines the grid settings in the viewing window.

Ctrl + F Window/Fill Solids and Window/Wire Frame. Toggles the displayof the objects with either a wireframe outline or solid color.




Go Back

Contents

More

Index





Parametric Table Hotkeys

The following is a list of hotkeys for the parametric table:

Hotkey Function

Ctrl + N File/New. Opens a new table. New tables will close the windows ofany previous ones.

Ctrl + O File/Open. Reads in an existing parametric table. Opening a newtable will close any currently open ones.

Ctrl + W File/Close. Closes the current parametric table, deleting the win-dow it is displayed in.

Ctrl + S File/Save. Writes out a parametric table to a set of disk files.

Ctrl + Q File/Exit. Exits the module and returns to the Executive Commandswindow.




Back Space Edit/Deselect All. Deselects all currently selected items.

Ctrl + I Edit/Insert Row. Inserts rows into the parametric table.

Ctrl +D Edit/Delete Row. Deletes rows from the parametric table.

Ctrl + V Variables/View. Lists the variables defined in the table.



Go Back

Contents

Index








Hotkey Function



Go Back

Contents

More

Index





Parametrics Post Processor Hotkeys

The following is a list of hotkeys for the Parametrics Post Processor:

Hotkey Function

Ctrl + N File/New. Opens a new table. New tables will close the windows ofany previous ones.

Ctrl + O File/Open. Reads in an existing parametric table. Opening a newtable will close any currently open ones.

Ctrl + W File/Close. Closes the current parametric table, deleting the win-dow it is displayed in.

Ctrl + S File/Save. Writes out a parametric table to a set of disk files.

Ctrl + Q File/Exit. Exits the module and returns to the Executive Commandswindow.




Del Edit/Clear. Deletes the selected items but does not place them inthe paste buffer.

Back Space Edit/Deselect All. Deselects all currently selected items.

Ctrl + I Edit/Insert Row. Inserts rows into the parametric table.

Ctrl +D Edit/Delete Row. Deletes rows from the parametric table.



Go Back

Contents

Index





Ctrl + V Variables/View. Lists the variables defined in the table.

Ctrl + P Plot/New. Draws a new plot from the data given in the data table.

= Plot/Zoom In. Zooms in on an area of the geometry, magnifying theview.

Ctrl + T Stops an animation while it is playing.

- Plot/Zoom Out. Zooms out of an area of the geometry, shrinkingthe view.

F Plot/Fit All. Changes the view to display all objects in the geometricmodel.

Ctrl+F Plot/Format/Graphs. Specifies the color, line thickness, and linestyle of a previously plotted line. Also determines the type of mark-ers displayed at solution data points, and whether the graph is visi-ble on the plot.



Hotkey Function


Maxwell 2D — Drawing CommandTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

DrawingChoose Drawing from the Executive Commands menu to select the type of geometryused for your problem. Depending on which field solver you chose for your problem, youcan select either a cartesian or axisymmetric model as shown below:

• A cartesian (XY) model represents a cross-section of a device that extends in the z-direction. Visualize the model as extending perpendicular to the plane being modeled.

• An axisymmetric (RZ) model represents a cross-section of a device that is revolved360° around an axis of symmetry (the z-axis). Visualize the geometric model as beingrevolved around the z-axis.

> To select the type of geometric model for your problem:1. Click the mouse on the button next to Drawing. A menu appears.2. Choose the desired model type:

Cartesian models can be converted to axisymmetric models (and vice versa); however, allsolutions, materials, boundaries, and parameter setups will be deleted.

XY Plane Creates a cartesian (XY) model.RZ Plane Creates an axisymmetric (RZ) model.

Note: Cartesian (XY) models are supported for all field solvers. However, you can-not create an axisymmetric (RZ) model if you select the AC Conduction orEddy Axial field solvers.

Z

R

Y

X

Zθ

Cartesian (XY Plane) Axisymmetric (RZ Plane)

Geometric Model

DrawingDifferences Between Carte-sian and AxisymmetricModels


Maxwell 2D — Drawing CommandTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Differences Between Cartesian and Axisymmetric ModelsIn general, cartesian and axisymmetric models are set up and solved in the same way.However, be aware of the following:

• Because the z-axis is used as the axis of symmetry, axisymmetric geometric modelscannot have r-coordinates lower than zero.

• Depending on which solver you selected, some material properties are not availablefor axisymmetric models.

• Some boundary conditions and sources operate in a slightly different manner forcartesian and axisymmetric models.

• Some executive parameters are not available for axisymmetric models.• Cartesian and axisymmetric models use different coordinate systems — cartesian

(x,y,z) and cylindrical (r,θ,z), respectively — which describe entirely different types ofgeometries. Because gradients, divergences and curls are calculated differently ineach coordinate system, different versions of each field solver must be used tocompute electric and magnetic fields for the two types of models. These calculationsare handled implicitly by the field solvers, and are transparent to you.

• Solution results are independent of the coordinate system used in the model. Forinstance, virtual force has the same physical meaning and is given in the same unitsfor cartesian and axisymmetric models. Similarly, field quantities such as A, B, D, andE represent the same electromagnetic phenomena whether they are computed for acartesian or axisymmetric model.

DrawingDifferences Between Car-tesian and AxisymmetricModels


Maxwell 2D — Define Model MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Define Model MenuAfter deciding whether to create a cartesian or axisymmetric model you are ready to cre-ate the model. Do so using the Define Model commands:

Draw ModelChoose Draw Model from the Define Model menu to access the 2D Modeler. The 2DModeler is used to create or modify the geometric model of a structure — a required stepin creating a model in Maxwell 2D.

Couple ModelIf you have generated an eddy current or thermal solution in another project, choose Cou-ple Model from the Define Model menu to perform a one-way coupling of the models bytaking the power output of the solved model and importing it into the current project.

Group ObjectsAfter you have drawn the geometric model, choose Group Objects from the DefineModel menu to group geometric objects that are actually one electrical object. Forinstance, two terminations of a conductor that are drawn as separate objects in the crosssection can be grouped to represent one physical conductor.

The Group Objects command is not a required command for setting up a model in Max-well 2D.

Draw Model Draw the geometric model.Couple Model Thermal only. Performs a one-way coupling with a solved eddy

current or thermal problem for the current thermal problem.Group Objects Identify objects in the model that are electrically identical.

Define Model MenuDraw ModelCouple ModelGroup Objects


Maxwell 2D — Maxwell 2D ModelerTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Draw ModelChoose Draw Model from the Define Model command of the Executive Commandsmenu to access the Maxwell 2D Modeler. Use this module to create or modify the geo-metric model of a structure.

2D ModelerWhen you choose Draw Model, the 2D Modeler window appears:

Draw Model2D ModelerModifying the Geometry2D Modeler CommandsTool BarScreen LayoutDrawing Plane for the ModelGeneral ProcedureThings to Consider



Go Back

Contents

Index

Modifying the GeometryIf you are modifying the geometry of a model for which a solution has been generated ormaterial properties and boundary conditions have been assigned, the system displays thefollowing message:

If you make changes to the geometry and save those changes,all mesh files and solution data will be deleted and will haveto be recomputed.

Pick “view only” if no changes are to be saved, “Modify” ifchanges are to be saved or “Cancel” to cancel this operation.

Your options are as follows:

• To change the geometry, choose Modify.• To display the geometry without modifying it, choose View Only. The 2D Modeler

screen then appears in a “view only” mode and allows the use of commands forviewing the geometry only.

• To return to the Executive Commands menu, choose Cancel.




Go Back

Contents

Index

2D Modeler CommandsThe commands in the 2D Modeler have the following functions:

File Reads other geometries into the 2D Modeler from disk files, saves thegeometry being created in a disk file, opens and closes project win-dows, exits the 2D Modeler.

Edit Cuts, pastes, selects, displays, and copies objects and text.Reshape Changes the shape of geometric objects.Boolean Unites overlapping objects, subtracts one object from another, inter-

sects overlapping objects.Arrange Moves, rotates, and mirrors objects and text.Object Sketches the objects that make up the geometric model and creates

text labels. Closed objects, such as circles and rectangles, can be cre-ated as well as open shapes, such as lines, arcs, and splines.

Constraint (Parametric Analysis module only.) Adds, modifies, and deletes vari-ables that allow you to resize objects in a model.

Model Selects the drawing units that are used in a model, measures distancesbetween points, specifies the mouse “snap-to” behavior, and sets thedefault attributes for subwindows.

Window Selects the active project window, creates new subwindows, manipu-lates project windows and subwindows, changes the grids and views ofstructures in subwindows, and displays objects as filled-in solids.

Help Provides help for the Maxwell 2D Modeler.




Go Back

Contents

Index

Tool BarThe tool bar is the row of icons that appears above the 2D Modeler window. Icons giveyou easy access to the most frequently used commands, as shown below:

Click on one of the previous icons to access the online documentation on the command itrepresents.

> To access or view information on the commands in the tool bar:• To execute a command, click on the appropriate button.• To display a brief description of the command in the message bar, move the cursor to

the desired icon and hold down the left mouse button. Move the cursor off the iconbefore releasing the mouse button to avoid executing the command.




Go Back

Contents

Index

Screen LayoutThe 2D Modeler is an application that supports multiple project windows and other win-dow features.

Menu Bar

The menu bar appears at the top of the 2D Modeler window. Each item in the menu barhas a menu of commands associated with it. To display a menu, simply place the cursoron the desired command and click the left mouse button. For example, to display the list ofEdit commands choose Edit.

Drawing Region

The drawing region is the grid-covered area in which you draw objects. This region initiallyrepresents a 100 millimeters by 70 millimeters drawing space.

• The Object commands allow you to create the objects that make up a geometricmodel.

• The Model commands allow you to manipulate the size of the drawing region, the unitof length used in specifying distances, the behavior of the mouse and cursor inselecting points from the grid, and other such parameters.

Project Windows

Project windows can display different geometric models. Each project window can bemoved and resized using its window frame. Project windows can contain multiple subwin-dows. Choose File/Open to open a new project window.

Draw Model2D ModelerModifying the Geometry2D Modeler CommandsTool BarScreen Layout


Subwindow CoordinateSystems

Subwindows VersusProject Windows


Drawing Plane for the ModelGeneral ProcedureThings to Consider



Go Back

Contents

Index

Subwindows

The 2D Modeler supports subwindows that can be used to display different views of thedrawing region. For example, you can zoom in on a detailed portion of a structure in onesubwindow and leave an unzoomed view of the full structure in a second subwindow.Also, you can use different grids (cartesian and polar) in different subwindows when cre-ating objects.

Use the Window commands to create and manipulate subwindows.

Subwindow Coordinate Systems

Each subwindow’s coordinate system can be independently set. By default, subwindowsuse a cartesian (rectangular) coordinate system in which u and v represent the local coor-dinates of a point. The local uv-key is displayed in the lower-left corner of each subwin-dow. Use the Window/Coordinate System commands to shift or rotate each localcoordinate system.

Subwindows Versus Project Windows

Subwindows are different from project windows. Project windows contain different geo-metric models. Each project window can contain multiple subwindows that allow differentviews of that project window’s geometric model.

Active Windows

Only one project window and one subwindow can be active at any one time. Click the leftmouse button on a project window or subwindow to make it the active one.



Subwindow Coordi-nate Systems






Go Back

Contents

Index

Status Bar

The status bar appears at the bottom of the 2D Modeler screen. It contains fields that dis-play the coordinates of the mouse and allow you to enter object coordinates:

The status bar displays information in the following fields:

• The fields representing the position of the cursor depend on the coordinate system ofthe subwindow that the cursor is in:• If a cartesian (rectangular) grid is displayed in the subwindow where the cursor is

located, the fields U and V appear in the status bar.• If a polar (radial) grid is displayed in the subwindow where the cursor is located,

the fields R and Theta appear in the status bar.Because different coordinate systems can be used locally in each subwindow,these fields specify the local coordinates of whatever subwindow the cursor is in.These fields can also be used to enter coordinates of points directly from thekeyboard.

• UNITS displays the current unit of length in which the geometry is being entered. Bydefault, it is millimeters (mm), and mm is displayed on the status bar.

• The SNAPTO mode settings indicate the “snap-to-point” behavior of the mouse aspoints are being picked on the screen. For example, when SNAPTO: grid vertex isset (the default), the 2D Modeler grabs the grid or object vertex point closest to themouse click.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Message Bar

The message bar appears at the bottom of the window frame. Text describing the mousebutton functions for the selected command appears here. For example, the following textis displayed in the message bar after Window/Change View/Zoom In is selected:

MOUSE LEFT: Enter zoom-in area

MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command

After selecting or deselecting objects and text, the message bar displays the number ofitems that are currently selected. After changing the view with the Window/Change Viewcommands, it also displays the current magnification level of the view in the active subwin-dow.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Draw Model2D ModelerModifying the Geometry2D Modeler CommandsTool BarScreen LayoutDrawing Plane for theModel

General ProcedureThings to Consider

Drawing Plane for the ModelAs explained in the section Drawing, there are two types of geometric models available:

• In a cartesian (XY) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of a devicethat extends perpendicular to the modeling plane. In this model, the z coordinate isconstant.

• In an axisymmetric (RZ) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of adevice that is rotated 360° about an axis of symmetry (the z-axis).



Go Back

Contents

Index

Draw Model2D ModelerModifying the Geometry2D Modeler CommandsTool BarScreen LayoutDrawing Plane for the ModelGeneral Procedure

Selecting Points With theKeyboard

UnitsObject Names and ColorsViewing a ModelReading, Importing, andSaving Models

Things to Consider

General ProcedureThere is no strict procedure to follow in creating a geometric model. The following steps,however, serve as general guidelines.

> From the 2D Modeler, create the model as follows:1. Choose Model/Drawing Size to specify the size of the drawing region. The

drawing size for every project window is modified. Therefore, this command needonly be performed once.

2. Use Model/Drawing Units to designate the units for the problem.3. Use the Window commands to adjust the view of the drawing region as follows:

• Choose Window/New to create additional subwindows in which to display differentviews or parts of the trace layer.

• Choose Window/Tile and Window/Cascade to layout the windows in aconvenient way. Also, use the resizable borders of subwindows to resize andreposition them.

• Use the Window/Coordinate System commands to shift or rotate the localcoordinate system used in the active window.

4. Use the Object commands to create objects. When drawing the structure, build itas a collection of 2D objects. Treat each conductor or material in the structure as aseparate object.

5. If necessary, use the Edit, Reshape, and Arrange commands to modify thegeometry that you have created.

6. Choose File/Save to periodically save the geometry to a disk file.7. Choose File/Exit to complete your drawing session.

Note: You can also use the Constraint commands if you have purchased the Para-metrics Analysis option with Maxwell 2D.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Selecting Points Withthe Keyboard


Things to Consider

Selecting Points With the Keyboard

When drawing objects, you are expected to select points from the screen using the mouseand cursor. As an alternative to selecting points with the mouse, you can use the key-board to enter points in the U and V fields located in the status bar at the bottom of thescreen. Use keyboard entry to:

• Enter coordinates and angles with greater precision than can be achieved using themouse.

• Select points that are between grid points or mouse “snaps” without having to changethe mouse behavior.

> To enter points using the keyboard:1. Move the mouse to the U field in the status bar and click the left mouse button.2. Enter the u-coordinate of the point.3. Move the mouse to the V field in the status bar and click the left mouse button.

(Alternatively, press the Tab key.)4. Enter the v-coordinate of the point.5. Click on the Enter button that appears in the status bar or press Return.

The desired point is then selected.

Additional entry fields appear in the status bar as necessary. For example, an Angle fieldappears when you choose Window/Coordinate System/Rotate. Occasionally, otherfields may appear in the status bar instead of U and V. For instance, if a polar grid is dis-played in the subwindow where the cursor is located, the fields R and Theta appear in thestatus bar instead of U and V. Use the same procedure to enter values in these fields.

Units

Choose the Model/Drawing Units command to define the modeling units. You may useeither of the following metric or english units as the type of modeling units:

Regardless of the selected modeling unit, all solutions are given in SI units.

Metric km, meters, cm, mm, microns, nmEnglish yards, feet, inches, mils



Go Back

Contents

Index



UnitsObject Names and Col-ors

Viewing a ModelReading, Importing, andSaving Models

Things to Consider

Object Names and Colors

After you have created a closed 2D object, the following window appears:

> To assign a new name and color to an object:1. Enter the new object name in the Name field. By default, new objects are assigned

the name objectn (where n is sequential).

2. Choose a new object color.a. Click the left mouse button on the color block next to the Color field. A palette

of colors appears.b. Click the left mouse button on the new color.

3. Choose OK to complete the command.

The new object is then assigned a name and a color. To change the name or color, usethe Edit/Attributes/Recolor and Edit/Attributes/Rename commands.

Note: Open objects are automatically assigned a name and color. To assign a spe-cific name or color to an open object, use the Edit/Attributes/Recolor andEdit/Attributes/Rename commands.

Note: The name background is reserved for use by the system and cannot beassigned to any object in the geometric model. The “background” object con-sists of the parts of the drawing region that aren’t occupied by closedobjects.



Go Back

Contents

Index




Things to Consider

Viewing a Model

You can change how objects are displayed by using Window/Change View, Window/FillSolids, and Window/Wire Frame.

Zooming and Panning in Subwindows

Although the same set of objects are displayed in all subwindows for a project, you candisplay only a part of the geometry in a subwindow. For example, one subwindow canshow a zoomed view of one portion of a structure while another subwindow shows theentire structure. Use Window/Change View/Zoom In and Window/Change View/ZoomOut to change the view in the active subwindow.

Once you zoom in on a portion of a subwindow, horizontal and vertical scroll bars appearalong the bottom and right side of the subwindow. They allow you to pan the magnifiedstructure left, right, up, and down. The horizontal scroll bar appears in a subwindow onlywhen the entire structure is not visible along the local U-axis, and the vertical scroll barappears in a subwindow only when the entire structure is not visible along the V-axis.

> To change your view using the scroll bars:• Select one of the arrow buttons that appear at the ends of the scroll bar.• Use the thumb scroll by:

1. Positioning the cursor over the off-colored bar, or “thumb scroll,” that appears inthe scroll bar.

2. Dragging the thumb scroll up, down, left, or right in the scroll bar to the portionof the data that you want to display.

For instance, to pan down a geometric model, drag the thumb scroll in the vertical scrollbar down, or click the mouse button on the down arrow button.



Go Back

Contents

Index




Things to Consider

Displaying Objects as Wire Frames or Shaded Solids

Closed objects are normally displayed as transparent, wire frame objects through whichyou can see the underlying grid. To display objects in the active window as opaque,shaded solids, choose Window/Fill Solids. Doing so causes the 2D Modeler to fill in theobjects with the colors of their borders.

Choose Window/Fill Solids and Window/Wire Frame to toggle between wire frame andopaque displays. The system displays only one of the two commands at a time. For exam-ple, if shaded models are being displayed, the system displays Window/Wire Frame sothat you can toggle back to a wire frame display.

Reading, Importing, and Saving Models

As you are creating a geometric model, you may want to copy objects from an existingstructure into the model that you are currently creating. Choose File/Open to open the filecontaining the existing geometric model in a new project window.

You may also want to import a model from another project and then edit the model to cre-ate a new 2D model. Choose File/Import to import the file containing the desired geomet-ric model into the current project window.

To save the objects you add as you work, and to save the final geometric model, chooseFile/Save.

Note: Save your model periodically. It is not saved automatically! Frequently savingyour geometric model can prevent you from losing part or all of your work if asystem crash occurs while you are editing a model.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Keep it SimpleLevel of DetailTreat the Backgroundas an Object

Sizing the Drawing RegionConsider BoundariesObjects within ObjectsPartial Overlapping NotAllowed

Things to ConsiderWhen creating the geometry representing the cross section of a structure, keep the fol-lowing guidelines in mind.

Keep it Simple

Keep the geometries as simple as possible. The more complex a geometric model is, themore complex the mesh (which is used in generating the solution) has to be — resulting ingreater requirements for memory and processing power. It is always possible to add detailto the model later. Therefore, always start with as simple a model as possible.

Level of Detail

Be careful not to create geometries in which large dimensions and small dimensions differby more than three orders of magnitude. For example, do not create an object with oneside larger than 2 inches and another side smaller than 0.002 inches. Likewise, do notplace two objects with sides that are approximately 5 millimeters in length any closer than0.005 millimeters to one another. Maxwell 2D may not be able to create a mesh — andtherefore cannot generate solutions for geometries in which dimensions vary by morethan three orders of magnitude.

Treat the Background as an Object

An object named background is automatically created by the system. This object occu-pies any portion of the drawing region that is not occupied by objects that you have cre-ated. Although it cannot be displayed while the geometric model is being created, materialcharacteristics and boundary conditions can be assigned to it just as they can for anyother object in the geometric model.once you import the model into the Maxwell 2D. Forexample, you can assign the material attributes of air to the background object.

Note: The name background is reserved for use by the system. It cannot beassigned to any other object in the geometric model other than the back-ground region.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Sizing the Drawing Region

The drawing region is the area in which you can create the 2D model. To specify the sizeof the drawing region, use the Model/Drawing Size command. By default, the drawingregion for all project regions is 100 units by 70 units high. To conserve computingresources, it is generally a good idea to explicitly define the size of the region in which youare interested. If you know that the solution is approximately contained within a regionother than the default, use this command to change the drawing region.

Consider Boundaries

Although you do not set boundary conditions while creating the geometric model, youmust plan for the boundaries when defining the size of the drawing region. For example, incases where you are modeling the device or structure as being far away from any outsideinfluence, be sure to size the drawing region so that its outer boundaries are far enoughaway from objects. Far enough, of course, is relative. In general, a boundary is far enoughaway if the energy density stored in the field near the boundary is negligible.

In all cases, consciously deciding on the size of the drawing region can conserve comput-ing resources.

Objects within Objects

In cases where one object is entirely contained inside another object, the materialassigned to the outer object stops at the boundary of the inner object. The inner objectrepresents a “void” or “hole” in an object that’s filled with another material.


Keep it SimpleLevel of DetailTreat the Background asan Object

Sizing the DrawingRegion

Consider BoundariesObjects within ObjectsPartial Overlapping NotAllowed



Go Back

Contents

Index

Partial Overlapping Not Allowed

Objects that partially overlap — that is, that occupy the same region of space without oneobject being contained entirely within the other — or self-intersect cannot be used in thefinal geometric model. The Maxwell 2D software packages cannot generate an accuratesolution for a geometric model that contains such objects — it has no way of knowingwhich material characteristics apply to the overlapping region. Examples of both areshown below.

The 2D Modeler displays a warning message if you create overlapping or self-intersectingobjects. If you read a file into the 2D Modeler the system checks for self-intersecting andoverlapping objects when you exit. For example, if you have overlapping objects in yourmodel when you leave the 2D Modeler, the following message appears:

Main project still has overlapping objects.

If the model contains overlapping objects when you leave the 2D Modeler, the remainingcommands on the Executive Commands menu are disabled, and you cannot continue toset up the model. At this point, you should return to the 2D Modeler and do one of the fol-lowing:

• Delete the overlapping objects.• Identify them as non-model objects using Edit/Attributes/By Clicking.• Use the Boolean commands to unite, intersect, or subtract the overlapping objects to

create a single object.


Keep it SimpleLevel of DetailTreat the Background asan Object

Sizing the Drawing RegionConsider BoundariesObjects within ObjectsPartial Overlapping NotAllowed


Maxwell 2D — File MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

File MenuUse the File commands to perform the following tasks:

• Create new geometric models.• Open existing model files or solutions.• Close models.• Save models in disk files.• Delete changes made since the last time a model was saved.• Exit from the current module.

When you choose File from the menu bar, a menu similar to the following one appears:

The menu commands will vary depending on the module you are operating in.

File MenuFile CommandsFile ExtensionsFile/NewFile/OpenFile/ImportFile/CloseFile/SaveFile/Save AsFile/RevertFile/Print SetupFile/PrintFile/Exit



Go Back

Contents

Index

File CommandsThe function of each File command is as follows:

The File/Open, File/Save, File/Save As, and File/Revert commands do not affect filescontaining solution data or other information related to a model (such as its material prop-erties, finite element mesh, and so forth).

Your model is not automatically saved. Therefore, be sure to frequently save your workwhile creating or editing a project. This can prevent you from losing all of your changes ifa problem occurs that causes your workstation or PC to crash. If you made changes sincethe last time the model was saved, you will be prompted to save when you close theproject or exit the 2D Modeler.

New Opens a project window in which a new model may be created.Open Reads in an existing geometric model or solution file. Opened models

appear in new project windows so that more than one model may beopened at a time.

Import Reads in geometric files. Also allows you to edit these files and savethe changes.

Close Closes the active window.Save Writes out a model, set of data, or solution to a set of disk files.Save As Writes out a model, set of data, or solution under a different name or

in a different file format.Revert Reverts to a previously saved version of a model, deleting all changes

made since the last time the model was saved.Print Setup Defines printer settings for hardcopy output.Print Prints a window, or portion of a window to a postscript file or hard-

copy.Exit Exits the current module and returns you to the Executive Commands

window.




Go Back

Contents

Index


File ExtensionsDifferent modules of Maxwell software save their files with different file extensions so thatyou and the software can tell which module created which file. For instance, gear.sm2 isa 2D Modeler file. Some commonly used file extensions and their associated softwaremodules are listed below.

.sm2 The 2D Modeler from the Utilities panelThe Maxwell 2D Parameter ExtractorThe Maxwell Planar Parameter ExtractorMaxwell 2D, version 6.1 or laterMaxwell StrataAnsoft EnsembleA 2D modeler file created in PlotData

.obs Maxwell 2D Field Simulator, version 4.33 or earlier

.att Maxwell 2D Field Simulator, version 4.33 or earlier

.sld The Solid Modeler

.sm3 Maxwell 3D Field Simulator, version 4.1 or laterMaxwell 3D version 6.0 or later.Ansoft HFSS, version 6.0 or laterThe Maxwell Q3D Extractor



Go Back

Contents

Index


File/NewChoose File/New to create a new, unnamed window in which to create a geometricmodel. The model that is drawn in this window can be saved as a new project and is inde-pendent of any other model that may be loaded in the software.

> To create a new project:• Choose File/New.

A new project window appears as shown below:

By default, the title of the new model, shown in the title bar appears as Unnamedn, wheren is the number of new models that have not yet been assigned a name. For example, thedefault name of the first new window opened would be Unnamed1.

Note: Specify a name for the new project using the File/Save or File/Save Ascommands.



Go Back

Contents

Index


File/OpenChoose File/Open to read in a geometric model or solution from a file.

Objects can be copied from other models, into the current project, but other models can-not be edited or saved as part of the current project.

Compressed files are automatically uncompressed when they are opened.

> To read in a previously created file:1. Choose File/Open. A file browser appears.2. Use the browser to find the file you wish to open. By default, files with the correct

file extensions for the software you are using appear in the window.3. Select on the desired file:

• On the workstation, these files appear in the Files list box.• On the PC, these files appear next to the Directories box.The selected file automatically appears in the Select model file field.

4. If you are using the 2D Modeler from the Utilities panel, do one of the following:• Leave read only deselected if you plan to edit the geometric model being read in.• Select read only if you only want to view the model being read in.


The opened file appears in the active window.



Go Back

Contents

Index

File MenuFile CommandsFile ExtensionsFile/NewFile/Open

Things to ConsiderRead Only ModeOpening Maxwell 2DField Simulator Filesversion 4.33 (or ear-lier)

File/ImportFile/CloseFile/SaveFile/Save AsFile/RevertFile/Print SetupFile/PrintFile/Exit

Things to Consider

The following factors should be kept in mind when opening files.

Read Only Mode

In the 2D Modeler from the Utilities panel, you can select read only to open a file in “read-only” mode. The words [read-only] appear next to the model file name in the title bar ofthe project window after the model is opened in this mode.

In read-only mode, the system prevents you from saving any changes to the original file.However, you can use the File/Save As command to save the changes to a new file. Any2D Modeler command except File/Save may be accessed.

Opening Maxwell 2D Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier)

In the 2D Modeler, the File/Open command is able to open geometry files created usingversion 4.33 (or earlier) of Maxwell 2D. This allows you to directly import these geometricmodels into the 2D Modeler, bypassing the Translators command on the Maxwell ControlPanel.

To open a file created with version 4.33 (or earlier) of Maxwell 2D, add an .obs or .attextension to the file name. The selected file will automatically be translated into the .sm2file format used by the 2D Modeler. The original file will not be modified unless youchoose to save the changes in .obs or .att format.

Only 2D geometric models may be read into the 2D Modeler (whether in the Utilities panelor another Maxwell software package). No mesh, material, boundary, or solution informa-tion can be translated or read from the 2D files.

More information is available on how translating a Maxwell 2D model (.obs extension) toa 2D model with extension (.sm2) affects its geometry.



Go Back

Contents

Index


File/ImportChoose File/Import to directly read a geometric model into the current project window.The imported model replaces the existing model in the project window, and can be editedand saved like any other geometric model.

Like File/Open, this command can sometimes be used to bypass the Translators com-mand in the Maxwell Control Panel.

Compressed files are automatically uncompressed when they are opened.

> To import a geometry file:1. Choose File/Import.2. Use the file browser that appears to find the file you wish to open.3. Click the left mouse button on the desired file:

• On the workstation, these files appear in the Files list box.• On the PC, these files appear next to the Directories box.The selected file automatically appears in the Select model file field.

4. Choose OK.

The window disappears and the file is imported.



Go Back

Contents

Index


File/CloseChoose File/Close to close an open geometric model and its associated project window.

> To close a model file:1. Select the desired project window as the active window.2. Choose File/Close.

If the project has changed since the last time it was saved, you will be prompted whetheror not to save it to a disk file. Afterwards, the project window in which the model is dis-played disappears.

File/SaveChoose File/Save to save a geometric model to a file.

> To save a model:1. Select the desired project window as the active window.2. Choose File/Save. One of the following things happens:

• If the file has been saved before or you have specified a name for the project, thesystem saves the model to a disk file.

• If this is the first time the project is being saved and you have not yet specified aname for it, the menu shown under the description of the File/Save As commandappears. Follow the directions for this command to save the unnamed model forthe first time.

Note: For Maxwell 2D software packages, this command only applies to projectwindows other than the main one. To close the main project, use the File/Exit command.



Go Back

Contents

Index


File/Save AsChoose File/Save As to do the following:

• Save a geometric model or solution under a different name.• Save a geometric model or solution in a file format different from the default. When

you save the files in different file formats, you can bypass the Translators commandon the Maxwell Control Panel.

> To save a geometry file using the File/Save As command:1. Select the desired project window as the active window.2. Choose File/Save As.3. Use the file browser that appears to find the directory where you wish to save the

file.4. Type the name of the file, using the correct file extension for the file type you wish

to save the model as.5. If the window has a Switch to saved field, do one of the following:

• Leave the field selected to display the new file name, and close the current file. Ineffect, this command copies and closes the project, then opens the copy of yourproject.

• Deselect Switch to saved to save the model under the new name withoutchanging which file is displayed. In effect, the model is copied under the newproject name, but the copied project is not opened.

6. Choose OK or press Return.

The software saves the model using the name and file format you selected.

Note: Be sure to save your models periodically; they are not saved automatically.Saving frequently can help to prevent you from losing your work if a problemoccurs that causes your workstation to crash.



Go Back

Contents

Index


File/RevertChoose File/Revert to delete all changes made to the geometric model since you lastused the File/Save or File/Save As commands. This has the same effect as closing themodel without saving the changes and then re-opening it. The project reverts back to theway it was when it was last saved to a disk file.

> To revert to a previously saved version of the model:1. Choose File/Revert. The following message appears:

Revert to last saved version of “projectname”?

where projectname represents the name of the selected project.2. To revert to the previous version of the model, select Yes.

All changes made to the model since the last time it was saved are deleted.

You cannot use the File/Revert command until you have saved the project at least onceand have made changes since the last time you saved it.



Go Back

Contents

Index


File/Print SetupChoose this command to define the printer settings, such as the printer you wish to sendthe output to and the form and orientation of the output. For workstations, this commandfunctions identically to the Print command in the Maxwell Control Panel.

> To define the printer settings on a Microsoft Windows system:1. Choose File/Print Setup. The Print Setup window appears:

2. Select the Printer that you will send the output to.3. Select the Form of the output document.4. Select the Orientation of the output document.5. Optionally, choose Network and select a new printer for the print jobs.6. If the output is two-sided, select the type of output form you prefer.7. Specify any Maxwell options.8. Choose OK to accept the settings or Cancel to ignore the new settings.



Go Back

Contents

Index

File MenuFile CommandsFile ExtensionsFile/NewFile/OpenFile/ImportFile/CloseFile/SaveFile/Save AsFile/RevertFile/Print SetupFile/Print

File/Print/RectangleFile/Print/Active ViewFile/Print/ProjectPrint Setup Within theWindows

File/Exit

File/PrintUse the File/Print commands to do the following:

File/Print/Rectangle> To print a rectangular area of a window:

1. Choose File/Print/Rectangle. The cursor symbol changes to “+”.2. Click on a corner of the region in the window to print.3. Use the mouse to select the region in which to print. As you move the mouse, a

box appears outlining the selected area.4. Click on a corner that is diagonally opposite the one you just selected. The Print win-

dow appears.5. Optionally, choose Setup to define printer settings.6. Choose OK to print the active view window or Cancel to exit the window without print-

ing.

All objects that lie completely inside the selected region are printed.

File/Print/Active View

Choose this command to print only the active view window.

> To print the model in the active view window:1. Choose File/Print/Active View. The cursor changes to crosshairs.2. Select the window you wish to print. The Print window appears.3. Optionally, choose Setup to define printer settings.4. Choose OK to print the active view window or Cancel to exit the window without print-

ing.

The specified subwindow is printed.

Rectangle Prints the selected area in a window.Active View Prints the selected subwindow.Project Prints all the subwindows in a project.



Go Back

Contents

Index



File/Exit

File/Print/Project

Choose this command to print all windows in the active project.

> To print the entire window:1. Choose File/Print/Project. A window similar to the following one appears:

2. Select the Print Quality of the job from the pull-down menu.3. Optionally, choose Setup to define printer settings.4. Optionally, select Print to File to send the job to a postscript file.5. Choose OK to print the project or Cancel to dismiss the window without printing.



Go Back

Contents

Index



File/Exit

Print Setup Within the Windows

On a PC, when you choose Setup from within one of the printing windows, the followingwindow appears, listing the current active printer, job status, type of image to print andany additional information pertinent to the print job:

> To define the print settings from within a printing window:1. Select the Name of the printer to send the output to.2. Optionally, choose Properties and do the following:

• From the Page Setup tab, select default settings for the Paper Size, PaperSource, Copy Count, Orientation, and Color Appearance of the print job.

• From the Advanced tab, select the type of field to alter from the list and select anew default setting.

Choose OK to accept the settings and return to the Print Setup window.3. Select the Paper Size from the pull-down menu.4. Select the Paper Source from the pull-down menu.5. Select the Orientation as with Portrait or Landscape.6. Optionally, choose Network and select the name of the printer to send to from the

list. Choose OK to accept the settings and return to the Print Setup window.7. Choose OK to accept the settings and begin printing, or Cancel to cancel the print

job.



Go Back

Contents

Index


File/ExitChoose File/Exit to exit a module.

> To exit a module:1. Choose File/Exit. The following message appears for each open project with

unsaved changes:

Save changes to “projectname” before closing?

where projectname represents the name of the selected project.2. Do one of the following:

• Choose Cancel to stay in the module and not save the changes.• Choose Yes to save the changes for the project before exiting.• Choose No to exit without saving the changes.

If several projects are open, you are cycled through all of them before you exit the module.


Maxwell 2D — Edit MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Edit MenuUse the Edit commands to:

• Cut, copy, and paste objects and text.• Select objects and text to be edited.• Undo the last command.• Deselect items.• Delete and undelete items.• Duplicate objects and text along a line or an arc, or mirror them about a line.• Change the attributes of objects and text.• Display or hide objects.

When you choose Edit from the menu bar, a menu similar to the following one appears:

Depending on the module you are in, not all of these commands will appear.

Edit MenuEdit CommandsEdit/Undo ClearEdit/UndoEdit/RedoEdit/CutEdit/CopyEdit/PasteEdit/ClearEdit/DuplicateEdit/SelectEdit/Deselect AllEdit/AttributesEdit/VisibilityEdit/Show AllEdit/Insert RowEdit/Delete RowEdit/Duplicate RowEdit/External Circuit



Go Back

Contents

Index

Edit CommandsThe following commands appear in the Edit menu:

Undo Clear Reverses the effect of the last Clear command.

Undo Reverses the effect of the last command

Redo Cancels the effect of the last Undo command.

Cut Deletes the selected items, placing them in the “paste buffer” — a partof the computer’s memory where they may be temporarily stored.

Copy Copies the selected items to the paste buffer.

Paste Copies the contents of the paste buffer to the active project.

Clear Deletes the selected items but does not place them in the paste buffer.

Duplicate Duplicates the selected items along a straight line or arc of a circle, orby mirroring them about a line.

Select Selects items to be edited.

Deselect All Deselects all selected objects in the current project or in all openprojects.

Attributes Changes the color, text, and naming attributes of an item.

Visibility Displays or hides 2D objects.

Show All Displays all hidden objects.

Insert Row Parametric table only. Inserts rows of data from the parametric table.

Delete Row Parametric table only. Deletes rows of data from the parametric table.

Duplicate Row Parametric table only. Duplicates the selected rows.

ExternalCircuit

Transient problems only. Edits the circuits for externally connectedwindings.




Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/Undo ClearChoose Edit/Undo Clear to reverse the effect of the Edit/Clear command. All items in theactive project window that were deleted using the most recent Edit/Clear command arerestored and displayed in their original locations. All restored items remain selected untilyou deselect them.

Edit/Undo Clear only restores items deleted by the latest Edit/Clear command; it cannotrestore items deleted in previous Edit/Clear commands. It also cannot restore items afterother items have been cut, copied, or pasted, or new objects have been drawn.

Edit/UndoChoose Edit/Undo to reverse the effect of the last command.

Edit/RedoChoose Edit/Redo to re-perform the last action cancelled with the Edit/Undo command.

Edit/CutChoose Edit/Cut to remove objects and text from the active project window and placethem in the paste buffer.

> To cut items from the active project window:1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select

commands.2. Choose Edit/Cut. The items are deleted from the screen and put into the paste

buffer.

Items that have been cut may be pasted back into the active window using Edit/Paste.The items currently stored in the paste buffer are replaced by the next items that are cutor copied into the buffer.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/CopyChoose Edit/Copy to copy the selected objects and text into the paste buffer. Theselected items are not deleted.

> To copy items into the paste buffer:1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select

commands.2. Choose Edit/Copy. The items are copied into the paste buffer.

Items that have been copied may be pasted into the active window using Edit/Paste. Theitems currently stored in the paste buffer are replaced by the next items that are cut orcopied.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/PasteChoose Edit/Paste to copy the contents of the paste buffer to the active window. Theobjects and text in the paste buffer may be pasted back into the same window, or into adifferent subwindow or project window. An item in the paste buffer can be pasted anynumber of times via the Edit/Paste command.

Edit/Paste only pastes items placed in the paste buffer by the latest Edit/Cut or Edit/Copy command. Each time the command Edit/Cut or Edit/Copy is chosen, the buffer isoverwritten with new items.

> To paste an item or group of items:1. Use one of the following commands to place the desired items in the paste buffer:

• Edit/Cut• Edit/Copy

2. Select the project window into which the items are to be pasted as the activewindow.

3. Choose Edit/Paste. A rectangle outlining the location of the items from the pastebuffer appears on the screen to show you their location.

4. Move the rectangle where you want the items to be located and click the leftmouse button. Alternatively, use the keyboard to enter the point where the pasteditems will be centered.

The pasted items are then displayed in the desired location. All pasted items remainselected so you can clear them if you want to undo the effect of the Edit/Paste command.

Edit/ClearChoose Edit/Clear to delete all selected items. The deleted items are not stored in thepaste buffer.

> To clear items:1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select

commands.2. Choose Edit/Clear. The selected items are deleted from the screen.

Edit/Undo Clear restores the latest set of items deleted with Edit/Clear. However, itemscleared previously are lost.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/DuplicateUse the Edit/Duplicate commands to make copies of objects in the active window. Thesecommands combine the functions of the Edit/Copy and Edit/Paste commands, copyingthe selected items and pasting them the number of times you specify. They are:

Before duplicating an item, you must first select it by clicking on it or by using one of thecommands on the Edit/Select menu.

The Edit/Duplicate commands can only be used to copy items within a project. To copyitems to another project, use Edit/Cut and Edit/Paste.

Edit/Duplicate/Along Line

Choose Edit/Duplicate/Along Line to copy the selected objects and text along a straightline. The line along which the items are duplicated can be vertical, horizontal, or lie at anangle.

> To duplicate items along a line:1. Select items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select commands.2. Choose Edit/Duplicate/Along Line.3. Click the left mouse button on an anchor point for the items to be duplicated. This

point is used to align the duplicated objects along the line. Any point in the drawingspace can be selected; however, selecting an anchor point on an item’s edge orwithin the item makes it easier to select the duplication line.

4. Move the mouse to move the anchor point to a new location. As you do, theobject’s outline moves with the mouse.

5. Click the left mouse button on the desired point. Alternatively, use the keyboard toenter the point’s coordinates.

6. Enter the number of copies to be made in the Total Number field. The number ofcopies that you specify includes the original copied object.

7. Choose OK or press Return. The system then copies the items, spacing themalong the line according to the point you selected.

Along Line Duplicates the selected item along a straight line.Along Arc Duplicates the selected item along an arc of a circle.Mirror Duplicate Duplicates the selected item and mirrors it about a line.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc

Choose Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc to copy the selected objects and text along a circulararc.

> To duplicate items along an arc:1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select

commands.2. Choose Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc.3. To select the center of the arc on which the duplicates are to be located, move the

cursor to the desired point and click the left mouse button. Alternatively, use thekeyboard to enter the point’s coordinates. A window appears with the followingfields:

AngleTotal Number

4. Enter the angle between each duplicate in the Angle field.• A positive angle causes the items to be copied in the counter-clockwise direction.• A negative angle causes the item to be copied in the clockwise direction.

5. Enter the number of copies to be made in the Total Number field. The number ofcopies that you specify includes the original copied object.


The system copies the selected items, spacing each duplicate along the arc at the angleyou specified. In the following figure, a rectangle was copied five times, each copy at anangle of 30 degrees. Note that the copies of the original object are selected.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate

Choose Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate to mirror and copy the selected objects and textabout a line. This command is similar to the Arrange/Mirror command, except that it cop-ies the selected items instead of moving them.

> To mirror and duplicate items about a line:1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select

commands.2. Choose Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate.3. Move the mouse to the first point in the line and click the left mouse button.

Alternatively, use the keyboard to enter the point’s coordinates.4. Move the mouse to the second point in the line and click the left mouse button.

(Again, as an alternative, enter the point from the keyboard.)

A mirror-image copy of the selected items then appears on the screen.

Characters in a duplicated line of text are not mirrored. Instead, the text is copied aboutthe line you entered.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/SelectUse the Edit/Select commands to select items to be edited. You can also select (anddeselect) items simply by clicking the left mouse button on them. The number of selecteditems is displayed in the message bar at the bottom of the 2D Modeler window. The com-mands on the Edit/Select menu are listed below.

You must select an item or group of items with one of the Edit/Select commands beforeentering the commands in the following table. Selecting identifies the objects and text onwhich those commands act. The following commands require a selection:

By Area Selects all items in a rectangular area.By Name Selects the geometric objects that you name.From List Selects items from a list.All Items Selects all items in the project window.Open Objects Selects all open objects.Closed Objects Selects all closed objects.Model Objects Selects all objects that are identified as “model objects”, objects

that are to be included in the final geometric model.NonModelObjects

Selects all objects that are not identified as “model objects”,objects that will not be included in the final geometric model.

Edit Menu Reshape Menu Arrange Menu

Cut Scale Selection Move

Copy Rotate

Clear Mirror

Deselect All

Duplicate

Attributes

Visibility/Hide Selection



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/Select/By Area

Choose Edit/Select/By Area to select all objects and text in a rectangular area. Theitems must lie entirely within the rectangle to be selected.

> To select all items in a rectangular area:1. Choose Edit/Select/By Area.2. Move the mouse to a corner of the desired rectangle and click the left mouse

button. Alternatively, use the keyboard to enter the point’s coordinates.3. Move the mouse to the corner that is diagonally opposite the one you just picked.

As you move the mouse, the system draws a box outlining the selected area.4. Click the left mouse button to select the other diagonal corner of the area. (Again,

as an alternative, enter the point from the keyboard.)

All items that lie completely inside the rectangle are highlighted, indicating that they havebeen selected.

Edit/Select/By Name

Choose Edit/Select/By Name to select a geometric object by name.

> To select objects by name:1. Choose Edit/Select/By Name. A pop-up window appears with the following field:

Enter item name/regular expression

2. Enter the name of the object to be selected in the field, using wildcards whenappropriate. For example, entering “line*” selects objects line_1, line_2, line_3,and so on.

3. Choose OK to confirm the selection or Cancel to abort this command.

The desired objects are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected.

Edit/Select/From List

Choose Edit/Select/From List to select the objects from a list of object.

> To select from a list:1. Choose Edit/Select/From List. The Select Object window appears.2. Select the names of the objects from the list.3. Choose OK. The objects are selected in the modeling window.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/Select/All Items

Choose Edit/Select/All Items to select all objects and text in the model.

> To select all items in the geometric model:• Choose Edit/Select/All Items.

All items in the active project window are highlighted, indicating that they have beenselected.

Edit/Select/Open Objects

Choose Edit/Select/Open Objects to select all open geometric objects to edit. Opengeometric objects, or line objects, are those whose edges do not meet to form a closedshape.

> To select all open objects:• Choose Edit/Select/Open Objects.

All open objects are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected.

Edit/Select/Closed Objects

Choose Edit/Select/Closed Objects to select all closed geometric objects to edit. Closedobjects are those whose edges meet to form closed shapes.

> To select all closed objects:• Choose Edit/Select/Closed Objects.

All closed objects are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected.

Edit/Select/Model Objects

Choose Edit/Select/Model Objects to select all model objects. Model objects are identi-fied using Edit/Attributes/By Clicking as part of the final geometric model that is used ingenerating a solution.

> To select all model objects:• Choose Edit/Select/Model Objects.

All model objects are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/Select/NonModel Objects

Choose Edit/Select/NonModel Objects to select all non-model objects. Non-modelobjects are those that are not identified as part of the final geometric model that is used ingenerating a solution.

> To select all non-model objects:• Choose Edit/Select/NonModel Objects. All non-model objects are highlighted,

indicating that they have been selected.

Edit/Deselect AllUse the Edit/Deselect All commands to deselect any items that are currently selected.The following commands are available:

Edit/Deselect All/Current Project> To deselect all selected items in the current project:

• Choose Edit/Deselect All/Current Project.

All items that were selected in the current project are now unselected, and are no longerhighlighted.

To deselect individual items, click the left mouse button on them.

Edit/Deselect All/All Projects> To deselect all selected items in all projects:

• Choose Edit/Deselect All/All Projects.

All items that were selected in any project are now unselected, and are no longer high-lighted.

Note: You can define an object as a non-model object using the Edit/Attributes/By Clicking command.

Current Project Deselects all selected objects in the current project.All Projects Deselects all selected objects in all projects.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/AttributesUse the Edit/Attributes commands to change the attributes of an item. The followingcommands are available:

These attributes are set on an item-by-item basis.

Edit/Attributes/By Clicking

Choose Edit/Attributes/By Clicking to modify object and text attributes one item at atime. The following attributes may be changed:

• The name of a geometric object.• Whether cross-hatches display on an object.• Whether an object is used in the model from which a solution is generated.• The color of a geometric object or text block.• The text that’s displayed in a text block.• Text alignment about the insertion point.• The angle at which text characters are slanted.

> To change the attributes of an object or block of text in the active window:1. Choose Edit/Attributes/By Clicking. The cursor changes to an upward-pointing

arrow.2. Click the left mouse button on the desired item.

• If you selected an object, the Object Attributes window appears.• If you selected text, the Text Attributes window appears.

3. Change the desired object or text attributes.4. Choose OK or press Return to change the item’s attributes or Cancel to leave an

item’s attributes unchanged.5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to change the attributes of other items.6. Click the right mouse button to exit the command.

By Clicking Change various object and text attributes, including names, cross-hatching, color, text alignment, and so forth.

Recolor Change the color of the selected items.Rename Change the names of selected geometric objects.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Object Attributes

When you select an object using Edit/Attributes/By Clicking, the following windowappears:

The following object attributes may be modified.

Color

This specifies the object’s color.

> To change the color:1. Click on the box next to the Color field. A palette of colors appears.2. Choose the desired color.

For more information on defining which colors can be used in objects and text, refer to thedocument describing the Color Manager.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Name

This specifies the name of the object.

> To change the name:1. Click the left mouse button on the Name field.2. Enter the new name for the object.

Object names can be up to 15 characters long. They may only include alphanumeric char-acters (a-z, A-Z, and 0-9) and underscores ( _ ). You cannot assign the same name tomore than one object.

Model Object

This determines whether the object is used in the final geometric model — that is,whether material properties and ports are defined and a mesh generated for the object.By default, all objects are model objects.

No materials or ports can be specified for “non-model” objects. These objects are savedwith the rest of the geometry and remain a part of the geometric model; however, they arenot used in generating a solution.

> To toggle between “model” and “non-model” status for an object:• Select Model Object. When this is selected the object is defined as a model object.

When it is deselected, the object is defined as a non-model object.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Show Hatches

This determines whether hatches display on the object, as shown in the geometric objectsillustrated below. Hatches mark the following points on an object:

• Vertex points. These points, which appear as square hatches, mark corner points onclosed line objects or end points on open objects.

• Spline control points. These points, which appear as circular hatches, act as “handles”that allow you to change the shape of the spline curve.

• Segments in curved shapes. These points appear as small, straight hatches.

By default, hatches are turned off.

Displaying hatches is useful when you move an object’s vertices or control points, insertvertices, delete edges, and so forth. It makes the vertex, control, and segment points onthe object visible, allowing you to easily manipulate the object’s geometry.

> To toggle hatching on and off:• Select Show Hatches.

Show Orientation

This determines whether the orientation of the object is displayed on the object. The initialorientation for every object is in the positive U direction. The orientation is indicated by anarrow pointing from the center of the object.

By default, the orientation is not displayed.

> To toggle the orientation on and off:• Select Show Orientation.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Text Attributes

When you select text using Edit/Attributes/By Clicking, the following window appears.

The following text attributes may be modified.

Text

This specifies the actual text that appears on the screen.

> To change the text:1. Click the left mouse button on the field Text.2. Enter the new text. A line of text can be up to 50 characters long.

Color

This specifies the color of the text.

> To change text color:1. Click on the square next to the field Color. A palette of colors appears.2. Choose the desired color.

For more information on defining which colors can be used in objects and text, refer thedocument describing the Color Manager.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Alignment

This allows you to change the way in which text is aligned about the insertion point.

> To change text alignment:1. Select Alignment. The following options appear:

2. Choose the desired alignment.

Slant

This specifies the angle at which the characters in a line of text are slanted. Slanting thetext produces the same effect as italics.

> To change text slant:1. Click the left mouse button in the Slant field.2. Enter the desired slant angle. The angle must be between 45° and -45°. The

default slant is zero.

left Text is lined up to the right of the insertion point.center Text is centered on the insertion point (the default).right Text is lined up to the left of the insertion point.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/Attributes/Recolor

Choose Edit/Attributes/Recolor to change the color of the selected objects and text. Youmay select any color that’s defined as part of the user color palette in the Color Manager.

> To change the color of the selected items:1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select

commands.2. Choose Edit/Attributes/Recolor. A pop-up window appears, displaying the

current default drawing color in a square next to the field Color.3. Click on the colored square. A palette of colors appears.4. Choose the desired color.5. Choose OK.

The object and text colors are changed to match the one you selected.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/Attributes/Rename

Choose Edit/Attributes/Rename to change the names of the selected geometric objects.

> To rename the selected objects:1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select

commands.2. Choose Edit/Attributes/Rename. The following window appears, listing the

names of all selected objects in alphabetic and numeric order:

3. Select the object name you want to change. It automatically appears in the fieldbelow object list.

4. Enter the new name for the object. Object names may be up to 15 characters long.

5. Choose Rename. The object is renamed and the new name appears in the list boxin the window.

6. To change the names of the other selected objects, repeat steps 3 through 5.7. Choose OK. The window closes.

Note: Object names may only include alphanumeric characters (a-z, A-Z, and 0-9)and underscores ( _ ). You cannot assign the same name to more than oneobject.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/VisibilityUse the Edit/Visibility commands to hide or display items:

Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection

Choose Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection to hide selected objects and text. Hidden objectsthat are defined as model objects are included in the final geometric model, but are notvisible.

> To hide a selected item:1. Select the objects and text to be hidden, either by clicking on them or by using one

of the Edit/Select commands.2. Choose Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection.

The selected objects and text are hidden. To redisplay them, use either the Edit/Visibil-ity/By Item or Edit/Show All command.

Hide Selection Hide selected objects and text.By Item Specify, object by object, whether to display objects.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/Visibility/By Item

Choose Edit/Visibility/By Item to either hide or display items.

> To hide or display items:1. Choose Edit/Visibility/By Item. The following window appears:

All object names and text appear in the box, and are set to either Yes or No.2. To change the visibility status of an object, click the left mouse button on it to

highlight it. Do one of the following:• To hide an object, set it to No.• To display an object, set it to Yes.

3. Choose OK when you are finished changing the settings.

The objects are then hidden or displayed accordingly. To redisplay all objects, chooseEdit/Show All.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/Show AllChoose Edit/Show All to display all objects and text that have been made invisible withone of the Edit/Visibility commands. All items created for the current project appear inthe window.

Edit/Insert RowParametric table only.

Choose Edit/Insert Row to add a row to the table.

• If you have no cells selected, this command adds a row to the bottom of the table.• If you have one or more cells selected, this command adds a table row above the

current selection.

The cells in the inserted rows take their values from the nominal problem.

Edit/Delete RowParametric table only.

Choose Edit/Delete Row to delete the selected rows from the table.

> To do this:1. Select the rows you wish to delete. To select an entire row at once, click on its

setup heading at the left edge of the table.2. Choose Edit/Delete Row.

The selected cells are completely removed from the table.

Edit/Duplicate RowParametric table only.

Choose Edit/Duplicate Row to duplicate rows in the parametric table.

> To duplicate table rows:1. Select the row to duplicate.2. Choose Edit/Duplicate Row. The row appears above the selected one.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Edit/External CircuitTransient solver only.

External Circuit Connection

Choose Edit/External Circuit to define an external circuit connection in the 2D model.

Edit External Connection> To edit an external circuit:

1. Choose Edit/External Circuit. The Edit External Circuit window appears:

2. Select the externally connected winding to edit from the Winding list. Eachwinding is listed with any associated inductors in the circuit. You must have adefined winding and an external connection boundary assigned to your model.

3. Select Create new circuit to create a new circuit from the selected winding, orEdit existing circuit to modify the selected winding.

4. Choose Launch Schematic Capture to edit the winding with Ansoft’s SchematicCapture utility. Once you have finished completing the circuit model, choose File/Exit from Schematic Capture to return to this window. Refer to SchematicCapture’s online documentation for more details on this utility.



Maxwell 2D — Reshape MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Reshape MenuUse the Reshape commands to change the shape of geometric objects by:

• Changing their scale.• Moving, aligning, or inserting vertex points.• Deleting an edge of an object.• Changing the number of arc segments in a curved edge.

When you choose Reshape from the menu bar, the following menu appears:

Reshape MenuReshape CommandsReshape/Scale SelectionReshape/Vertex

Reshape/Vertex/MoveReshape/Vertex/AlignReshape/Vertex/Insert

Reshape/EdgeReshape/Edge/Numberof Segments

Reshape/Edge/DeleteObject Stitching



Go Back

Contents

Index

Reshape CommandsThe function of each Reshape command is as follows:

Scale Selection Changes the scale of a geometric object or text.Vertex Moves, aligns, and inserts object vertices or the control points of

splines. Performs the following operations on object vertices or thecontrol points of splines:Move Moves a vertex point or spline control point.Align Aligns two vertices (or control points) according to

their local or global coordinates.Insert Inserts a vertex point on an edge of an object.

Edge Changes the number of segments or edges in a selected object.Performs the following functions on object edges:Number ofSegments

Changes the number of arc segments in a curvededge.

Delete Removes an edge of an object.

Note: Before using the Reshape commands to modify objects, display the verticesand control points of the desired objects using Edit/Attributes/By Clicking.You may also use this command to display hatches over vertices and controlpoints, which makes moving, adding, or deleting vertices and control pointseasier.







Go Back

Contents

Index





Reshape/Scale SelectionChoose Reshape/Scale Selection to change the scale of an object’s dimensions or thesize of the characters in a block of text. The following figure shows an object before andafter scaling. Notice that the object is positioned differently depending on which anchorpoint you selected when scaling it:

> To rescale the dimensions of an object or a line of text:1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select

commands.2. Choose Reshape/Scale Selection.3. Move the mouse to the desired point and click the left mouse button. (Alternatively,

select the points with the keyboard.) A pop-up window appears, showing the ScaleFactor field.

4. Enter the desired scale factor.5. Choose OK or press Return.

Selected items are then rescaled about the anchor point. For example, if you specify 2 asa scale factor for a geometric object, object vertices are moved so that the distancebetween them and the anchor point is doubled, making the object twice as large. On theother hand, if you specify 0.5 as the scale factor, object vertices are moved so that the dis-tance between them and the anchor point is halved, making the object half as large.

Original Scale x 2

Scale x 0.5Anchor Pt.

Anchor Pt.



Go Back

Contents

Index





Reshape/VertexThe Reshape/Vertex commands are:

Vertex points mark the corners or end points of objects. Spline control points, the pointsthat you entered when drawing the spline, act as “handles” for reshaping the spline.

To display hatches on object vertex or control points, choose Edit/Attributes/By Click-ing.

Reshape/Vertex/Move

Choose Reshape/Vertex/Move to move a vertex or control point, changing the shape ofan object.

> To move a vertex or control point:1. Choose Reshape/Vertex/Move.2. Click the left mouse button on the desired vertex or control point.3. Move the mouse to the new vertex point and click the left mouse button.

(Alternatively, select the points with the keyboard.) The object is redrawn with thevertex in the new location.

4. To move additional vertices, repeat steps 2 and 3.5. To exit the Reshape/Vertex/Move command, click the right mouse button.

Move Moves a vertex point or spline control point.Align Aligns two vertices or control points according to their coordinates.Insert Inserts a vertex point on the edge of an object.



Go Back

Contents

More

Index



Reshape/EdgeReshape/Edge/Number ofSegments


Reshape/Vertex/Align

Choose Reshape/Vertex/Align to align two vertices or control points so that one or bothcoordinates of the first point are changed to match those of the second point. A vertex orcontrol point may be aligned with another point in the same object, or with a point in a dif-ferent object.

For example, to make the object on the right look like the object on the left, align thev-coordinate of Point B with the v-coordinate of Point A.

You would not obtain the same results if you attempted to align the global y-coordinate ofPoint B with the global y-coordinate of Point A.

> To align two vertices or control points:1. Choose Reshape/Vertex/Align.2. Select the vertex to which the first point is to be aligned. This vertex can be on the

same object or on another object. The following window appears:

3. To select how the vertices are to be aligned:• Choose U to force the first vertex to have the same u-coordinate as the second.

Point A

Point B



Go Back

Contents

Index





• Choose V to force the first vertex to have the same v-coordinate as the second.• Choose both U and V to force the vertices to have the same u- and v-coordinates.• To align the vertex points according to their local R and θ coordinates substitute R

and Theta for U and V in the above instructions. If specifying R and Thetacoordinates, first use the command Window/Grid to display a polar grid.

• To align the vertex points according to their global abscissa and ordinate substituteAbscissa and Ordinate for U and V in the above instructions.

4. Choose OK or press Return. The object is redrawn with the vertex in the newlocation.

5. To align additional vertices on the same object or on other objects, repeat steps 2through 5.

6. Click the right mouse button to exit the command.

Note: If you align the vertices of open object so that it forms a closed object a newobject to be created. The names and colors of such objects are automati-cally assigned; pop-up windows for naming the new objects do not appear.To change the names and colors of these objects, use the Edit/Attributescommands.



Go Back

Contents

Index





Reshape/Vertex/Insert

Choose Reshape/Vertex/Insert to insert a vertex point on the edge of a geometricobject. Vertex points can be inserted on any type of object, whether curved or angular.

> To insert a vertex point on an edge of an object:1. Choose Edit/Attributes/By Clicking to display hatches on the vertices of the

desired object. If you do not display hatches, you may be inserting vertices withoutknowing it.

2. Choose Reshape/Vertex/Insert.3. Do one of the following to insert a vertex point:

• To insert a vertex point at the intersection of overlapping lines, click the left mousebutton on the intersection.

• To insert a vertex point on an edge of an object, click the left mouse button on theedge.

4. To insert another vertex, repeat step 3.5. Click the right mouse button to exit the command.

Note: You cannot insert a vertex point at the intersection of two lines if one or bothare splines.



Go Back

Contents

More

Index





Reshape/EdgeUse the Reshape/Edge commands to:

The following figure illustrates the effect of these commands on geometric objects:

Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments

Choose Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments to:

• Change the number of segments in a curved edge of an object.• Change the angle between segments in circles and arcs.

The 2D Modeler uses a series of line segments to represent curved shapes. When youcreate a curved object, it prompts you to enter the number of line segments used toapproximate the curve. For circles and arcs, it also prompts you to enter the angle (indegrees) between each segment of the curve.

Changing the number of segments or the angle between each segment allows you toadjust the appearance and shape of curved objects as follows:

• Increasing the number of segments or decreasing the angle between each segmentproduces smoother curves, but makes the model more complex.

• Decreasing the number of segments or increasing the angle between each segmentproduces angular shapes that do not look very much like curves, but can reduce thecomplexity of the geometric model.

Number of Segments Changes the number of arc segments in curved edges ofobjects such as circles, splines, and so forth.

Delete Removes an edge of an object.

Original Objects Modified Objects

36Segments

Deleted9

SegmentsEdge



Go Back

Contents

Index





> To change the number of arc segments in a curved object:1. Choose Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments.2. Click the left mouse button on the desired curved object or edge. Clicking on a

geometric object with straight edges has no effect. A window appears, displayingthe following fields:

3. Enter the new number of segments or the new angle between each segment. Ingeneral, you should specify a new value for only one of these fields. Changing theangle between each segment automatically changes the number of segments inthe curve (and vice versa).

4. Choose OK or press Return. The curve is redrawn.5. To change the number of segments in another curved edge, repeat steps 2

through 4.6. Click the right mouse button to exit the command.

Number of segments Shows the current number of arc segments.Angular Increment For circles and circular arcs, shows the angle (in

degrees) between each arc segment.



Go Back

Contents

Index





Reshape/Edge/Delete

Choose Reshape/Edge/Delete to delete an edge of a geometric object.

> To delete an edge:1. Choose Reshape/Edge/Delete.2. Click the left mouse button on the desired edge. The edge is deleted.3. To delete other edges on the same object or other objects, repeat step 2.4. Click the right mouse button to exit the command.

Object Stitching

Be careful when deleting the edges of adjacent objects. If deleting an edge results in thefree vertices of adjacent objects being joined, the two objects are stitched together asone.

Note: Circles, splines, and arcs are only considered to have one edge. If you deletewhat appears to be “one segment” of a curved edge, the entire curve, spline,or arc is deleted.


Maxwell 2D — Boolean MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Boolean MenuUse the Boolean commands to:

• Unite overlapping objects.• Subtract one object from another. Multiple objects may be subtracted.• Intersect overlapping objects. The area shared by the overlapping objects becomes

the new object.• Remove extra vertices on the objects created from a boolean operation.

When you choose Boolean from the menu bar, the following menu appears:

Boolean MenuBoolean CommandsBoolean/UnionBoolean/SubtractBoolean/IntersectBoolean/Simplify



Go Back

Contents

Index


Boolean CommandsThe function of each Boolean command is as follows:

All Boolean commands apply only to the active project window.

Union Unites two or more overlapping objects.Subtract Subtracts one or more objects from another object or objects.Intersect Creates a new object from the intersecting region of two or more over-

lapping objects.Simplify Removes any extra vertices on edges of objects created through a

boolean operation.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Boolean/UnionChoose Boolean/Union to unite two or more overlapping objects. The following graphicdemonstrates the simplest case of a union. Two overlapping objects are united to formone object.

> To unite overlapping objects:1. Select the overlapping objects that you wish to unite by clicking on them or using

the Edit/Select commands. When selecting objects, keep the following in mind:• The more objects you union, the longer the operation takes.• Open objects may not be united.

2. Choose Boolean/Union. The selected overlapping objects combine to form oneobject. The combined objects are not deleted; they are defined as non-modelobjects and hidden from view.

3. In the window that appears, select the color and enter the name of the object.

4. Choose OK.

Note: If you have multiple objects that were created from the boolean operation,toggle Select on or off to select or deselect the object. If you are enteringyour own names, this allows you to view the object you are naming. Objectsremain selected after you choose OK.



Go Back

Contents

More

Index


Boolean/SubtractChoose Boolean/Subtract to subtract an object (or objects) from another object (orobjects). The following graphic demonstrates the simplest case of a subtraction. An objectis subtracted from a base object to form a new object.

> To subtract overlapping objects:1. Choose Boolean/Subtract. The following window appears:

2. Select the one of the following selection modes:

By ItemBy AreaBy Name

Base

OverlappingRegion

Object

Object toSubtract



Go Back

Contents

Index


3. Choose Select Base Objects to select the base object or objects you wish tosubtract objects from. After you choose Select Base Objects, the SubtractObjects window disappears and you may select the objects using the selectionmode chosen in the previous step. When selecting objects, note the following:• The more objects you subtract, the longer the operation takes.• Open objects may not be subtracted.When you have finished selecting the base objects, click the right mouse buttonanywhere in the project window to return to the Subtract Objects window. A checkmark indicates that base objects have been selected.

4. Choose Select Objects to Subtract to select the objects you wish to subtract fromthe base objects. When you finish selecting the objects to subtract, click the rightmouse button anywhere in the project window to return to the Subtract Objectswindow. A check mark indicates that objects to subtract have been selected.

5. Choose Perform Subtraction to subtract the selected objects from the baseobjects. A new object is created which looks like the base object minus the sharedoverlap. The objects subtracted are not deleted, they are defined as non-modelobjects and hidden from view.

6. In the window that appears, select the color and enter the name of the object.

7. Choose OK.

Note: Use the Change View commands — Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Fit All — tomodify the view of the geometry and make selecting objects easier.

Note: If you wish to change the base objects or objects to subtract, use one of theClear buttons to deselect the objects. You may then reselect the baseobjects or objects to subtract.




Go Back

Contents

Index


Boolean/IntersectChoose Boolean/Intersect to create a new object from the intersecting region of two ormore overlapping objects. The following graphic demonstrates the simplest case of anintersect. Two overlapping objects are intersected to form one object.

> To intersect overlapping objects:1. Select the overlapping objects that you wish to intersect by clicking on them or

using the Edit/Select commands. When selecting objects, keep the following inmind:• The more objects you intersect, the longer the operation takes.• Open objects may not be intersected.

2. Choose Boolean/Intersect. The area shared by the overlapping objects becomesa new object. The overlapping objects are not deleted, they are defined as non-model objects and hidden from view. A window appears.

3. Choose the color and enter the name of the object.

4. Choose OK.


IntersectingRegion



Go Back

Contents

Index


Boolean/SimplifyChoose Boolean/Simplify to remove extraneous vertices that remain along an edge afteryou perform a boolean operation. When you perform a boolean operation, the object cre-ated may have a vertex on an edge, as the following graphic demonstrates.

A vertex on an edge divides the edge into multiple line segments.

Vertices onedges.


Maxwell 2D — Arrange MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Arrange MenuUse the Arrange commands to do the following:

• Move objects and text.• Rotate objects and text.• Mirror objects and text about a line.

When you choose Arrange from the menu bar, the following menu appears:

Arrange CommandsThe function of each Arrange command is as follows:

The Arrange commands only move, rotate, or mirror objects. They cannot be used tocopy objects. If you wish to move, rotate, or mirror a copy of an object, use the Edit/Dupli-cate commands.

Move Moves the selected items by the distance you specify.Rotate Rotates the selected items about a center point by the angle you specify.Mirror Mirrors the selected items about a line.

Note: The Arrange commands are accessible only if the objects on which they canoperate have been selected.

Arrange MenuArrange CommandsArrange/Move

Using the MouseUsing the KeyboardBy Entering Offsets

Arrange/RotateArrange/Mirror



Go Back

Contents

Index




Arrange/MoveChoose Arrange/Move to move the selected objects or text. The items can be moved inone of the following ways:

• By picking and moving the items with the mouse.• By entering the cartesian or polar coordinates where the items are to be moved.• By entering the new location of the items as offsets from their current location.

The exact method you use depends on the way your geometric model is set up and yourpersonal preference.

Using the Mouse> To move the selected items using the mouse:

1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by picking them with one of theEdit/Select commands.

2. Choose Arrange/Move.3. Select a point to serve as a base (anchor) point. Click the left mouse button on the

point you wish to be the anchor point.4. Click the left mouse button on the target point.

All selected items are moved the distance determined by the offset between the basepoint and target point. To move copies of the objects instead of the originals, choose Edit/Duplicate/Along Line.



Go Back

Contents

Index




Using the Keyboard> To move the selected items using the keyboard:

1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by picking them with one of theEdit/Select commands.

2. Choose Arrange/Move.3. Enter the coordinates of the base (anchor) point in the U and V or R and Theta

fields. By default, these fields show the coordinates of the center point of theselected items.

4. Select a target point by entering its coordinates with the keyboard.

All selected items are moved the distance determined by the offset between the basepoint and target point. To move copies of the objects instead of the originals, use the Edit/Duplicate/Along Line command.

By Entering Offsets

Fields for dU and dV also appear in the status bar. (Polar grids display dR and Anglefields.) These fields allow you to move the object using offsets from the current point.

> To move the selected items by entering offsets:1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or with one of the Edit/Select

commands.2. Choose Arrange/Move.3. In the dU field, enter the distance in the u direction that the items are to be moved.

If a polar grid is displayed, enter the R distance in the dR field.4. In the dV (or Angle) field, enter the distance in the v direction that the items are to

be moved.5. Choose Enter or press Return. The objects are moved the specified distance.



Go Back

Contents

Index




Arrange/RotateChoose Arrange/Rotate to rotate the selected objects or text in the counter-clockwisedirection about a center point.

> To rotate items about a center point:1. Select the desired items by either clicking on them or by picking them with one of

the Edit/Select commands.2. Choose Arrange/Rotate.3. Move the cursor to the point about which the item is to be rotated and click the left

mouse button. The Rotate Selection window appears, which allows you to enterthe angle of rotation for the selected objects.

4. Enter the angle of rotation in the Angle field.5. Choose OK or press Return.

The selected item (or group of items) is then rotated counter-clockwise about the pivotpoint by the specified angle. To rotate copies of objects, use the Edit/Duplicate/AlongArc command.

Arrange/MirrorChoose Arrange/Mirror command to mirror selected objects or text about a line.

> To mirror items about a line:1. Select the desired items by either clicking on them or by picking them with one of

the Edit/Select commands.2. Choose Arrange/Mirror.3. Click the left mouse button on the first point in the mirror line.4. Click the left mouse button on the second point in the mirror line.

The selected items are then mirrored about the line you entered.

To copy objects across a mirror line, use the Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate command.

Note: Mirrored text is not reversed; rather, it is moved to the other side of the mirrorline.


Maxwell 2D — Object MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Object MenuUse the Object commands to do the following:

• Draw open objects such as arcs and lines.• Draw closed objects such as circles, rectangles, and other polygons.• Add text to a model.

When you choose Object from the 2D Modeler menu bar, the following menu appears:

Object MenuObject CommandsObjectsObject/PolylineObject/ArcObject/SplineObject/TextObject/RectangleObject/CircleObject/Spiral



Go Back

Contents

Index


Object CommandsThe function of each Object command is as follows:

All Object commands apply only to the active project window. Objects can be drawn inany subwindow belonging to the active project, however.

Polyline Draws a multiple-segment line, the ends of which can be joined to forma closed object.

Arc Draws a clockwise or counter-clockwise arc.Clockwise Draws a clockwise arc.Counter-Clockwise Draws a counter-clockwise arc.

Spline Draws an open or closed spline curve.Text Adds text to a geometric model so that objects and regions in the

model are labeled.Rectangle Draws a rectangle.Circle Draws a circle by specifying the following:

2 Point The center and radius of the circle.3 Point Three points on the circumference of the circle.

Spiral Draws a spiral by specifying the following:Rectangular Draws a rectangular spiral.Circle Draws a circular spiral.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Open ObjectsClosed ObjectsEntering Points from theKeyboard

Picking Points in SeveralSubwindows

Overlapping ObjectsSelf-Intersecting ObjectsModeling Thin ObjectsImporting ComplexObjects

Object/PolylineObject/ArcObject/SplineObject/TextObject/RectangleObject/CircleObject/Spiral

ObjectsAll geometric models that you create are simply a collection of objects. The final geomet-ric model must have no overlapping objects (unless one object is entirely within another).

Open Objects

Open objects are polylines, arcs, and splines, or any combination thereof that have notyet been closed to form the boundary of an object. Create them using these commands:

• Object/Polyline• Object/Arc• Object/Spline

Generally, open objects are used as temporary objects from which to create complexclosed objects.

Open ClosedObjectsObjects



Go Back

Contents

Index


Open ObjectsClosed ObjectsEntering Points fromthe Keyboard




Closed Objects

Closed objects are objects with boundaries that enclose a region. All closed objects areautomatically saved as part of the geometric model after you choose File/Save.

Simple Closed Objects

Simple closed objects such as rectangles and circles are created with the following com-mands:

• Object/Rectangle• Object/Circle/2 Point• Object/Circle/3 Point

Each of the above commands results in a simple closed object. In addition, the Object/Polyline and Object/Spline commands can be used to create more complicated closedobjects.

Complex Closed Objects

A complex closed object is one created by joining open objects to enclose an area. Forexample, to turn an open object into a closed object, choose Object/Polyline and createa polyline that connects the end points of the open object.

Entering Points from the Keyboard

In the sections that describe the commands of the Object menu, it is assumed that youwill use the mouse to select points. However, if you need to enter coordinates with greaterprecision than the mouse provides, or to choose points between grid and mouse snaps,you can enter coordinates directly from the keyboard.



Go Back

Contents

Index






Picking Points in Several Subwindows

You can select points for objects from different subwindows. The software uses the localcoordinate system in each subwindow to place the points.

When using Object/Rectangle, keep in mind that as you move the mouse between sub-windows, the rectangle’s alignment changes to match that of the local coordinate system.

For example, objects “A” and “B” were both created using the Object/Rectangle com-mand. However, object “B” is rotated because its second point was picked from the sub-window with the rotated grid.



Go Back

Contents

Index






Overlapping Objects

Objects cannot partially overlap. The software checks for overlapping objects when eachobject is created. If overlapping objects are present, the following message appears:

Warning: Overlapping objects created.

The software checks for overlapping objects again when you exit. If your final model con-tains overlapping objects, you will be unable to use it in any Maxwell 2D software pack-age.

To reposition overlapping objects, use the Arrange and Edit commands. Alternatively,choose Edit/Attributes/By Clicking and declare the overlapping objects as “non-model”objects that will not be used in a solution.

To unite, subtract, or intersect the overlapping objects, use the Boolean commands.

In cases where one object is entirely contained inside another object, the materialassigned to the outer object stops at the boundary of the inner object. Assign materialcharacteristics to the two objects using the normal procedure.

Self-Intersecting Objects

If you cross over a line or arc segment while using the Object/Polyline, Object/Spline, orObject/Arc commands (or a combination thereof), the message appears, warning youthat you have created a self-intersecting object.

To the software, a self-intersecting object is an object that has been twisted or folded overonto itself — the system cannot determine what surface represents the inside surface ofthe object. If you attempt to solve using a geometric model that contains self-intersectingobjects in a Maxwell 2D software package, the system cannot converge on an accuratesolution.

To modify self-intersecting objects, use the Reshape commands. Alternatively, use theEdit/Attributes/By Clicking command to declare the self-intersecting objects as “non-model” objects that will not be used in a solution.



Go Back

Contents

Index






Modeling Thin Objects

If an object is extremely thin, such as a ground conductor, modeling it using its actualdimensions might not be appropriate. In a Maxwell 2D software package, the electromag-netic field solution for the model may not converge if objects with very tiny dimensions (ascompared to the other objects in the model) are included in the geometry. Therefore,model thin ground planes using a zero-area closed object. Such traces can be modeledby using the Object/Polyline command to create a line that folds back onto itself.

Importing Complex Objects

You can import complex objects, such as ellipses, that you cannot otherwise create in thesoftware from PlotData.

> To import or open a .sm2 file created in PlotData:1. Choose File/Import or File/Open to import or open the .sm2 file.2. If you are opening or importing an open object, use any of the Object commands

listed in the Open Objects section to create closed 2D objects.3. If you wish to modify the 2D objects, use the following commands to edit them:

• Use the Edit commands to cut, paste, select, display, and copy objects.

• Use the Reshape commands to scale and change the shape of geometric objects.

• Use the Arrange commands to move, rotate, and mirror objects.

• Use the Boolean commands to unite, intersect, or subtract objects.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Object/PolylineChoose Object/Polyline to draw an object with one or more straight segments. This com-mand can be used to draw closed or open objects. It can also be used to connect theends of an open object, turning it into a closed object.

> To draw a polyline:1. Choose Object/Polyline.2. Move the mouse to the first point in the line and click the left mouse button to enter

the point. The dU and dV fields appear below the status bar allowing you to enterthe U and V offset of the next point in the polyline using the keyboard, rather thanthe mouse.

3. Choose the next point in the line, using either the keyboard or mouse. Notice thatthe system draws a line that follows the cursor.

4. Repeat step 3 for each point to be entered.

5. To complete the line and exit the Object/Polyline command, double-click the leftmouse button on the final point in the line.

If the line segment forms a closed object, the software prompts you to specify a name anda color for the object. To turn an open object into a closed object, create a new polylinethat connects the end points of the open object.

Note: If you make a mistake while picking points for the polyline, click the rightmouse button to delete the last point that was entered.

Note: To specify a name and color for an open object, use the Edit/Attributescommands.



Go Back

Contents

More

Index


Object/ArcUse the Object/Arc commands to draw a circular arc:

The two types of arcs are shown below.

Notice the difference in the arcs, even though they have similar center points, start points,and end points.

> To create an arc:1. Choose one of the following commands:

• Object/Arc/Clockwise• Object/Arc/Counter-Clockwise

2. Choose the center of the arc using the keyboard or the mouse. The dU and dVfields appear, allowing you to use the keyboard to specify the arc’s starting point.

3. Choose the arc’s start point. The dU and dV fields are reset, allowing you to usethe keyboard to enter the arc’s endpoint.

4. Choose the arc’s end point. The following window appears:

5. Do one of the following:

Clockwise Draws an arc in the clockwise direction.Counter-Clockwise Draws an arc in the counter-clockwise direction.

Center

Start Point

End Point

Counter-Clockwise Arc

Center

Start Point

End Point

Clockwise Arc



Go Back

Contents

Index


• Enter a value for the number of segments. Because all curves are represented bya series of line segments, you need to specify the desired number of segments.For instance, specifying a value of 15 for a 90˚ arc creates an approximation to thearc consisting of 15 line segments with each line segment comprising 6˚ of the arc.The value of 6˚ automatically appears in the field Angular Increment.

• Alternatively, specify the angular increment. Doing so automatically adjusts theNumber of segments.

Generally, accept the default values for these fields. Using too few segments canresult in an arc that is not very smooth, and using too many segments canunnecessarily complicate a geometry.


The arc is then drawn in the clockwise or counter-clockwise direction.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Object/SplineChoose Object/Spline to draw a curved line. You can use this command to:

• Draw closed or open objects.• Connect the ends of an open object, turning it into a closed object.

> To draw a spline:1. Choose Object/Spline.2. Move the mouse to the first point in the spline and click the left mouse button to

enter the point. The dU and dV fields appear below the status bar allowing you toenter the U and V offset of the next point in the polyline using the keyboard, ratherthan the mouse.

3. Choose the next point in the line, using either the keyboard or mouse. Notice thatthe system draws a line that follows the cursor.

4. Repeat step 3 for each point to be entered.5. Double-click the left mouse button on the final point in the line. The following

window appears:

6. Enter a value for the number of segments. Because all curves are represented bya series of line segments, you need to specify the desired number of segments.For instance, specify a value of 20 to approximate the spline as a polyline with 20line segments.


If the curved line forms a closed object, the software prompts you to specify a name and acolor for the object. To turn an open object into a closed object with this command, createa spline that connects the end points of the open object.

Note: To specify a name and color for an open object, use the Edit/Attributescommands.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Object MenuObject CommandsObjectsObject/PolylineObject/ArcObject/SplineObject/Text

Scaling TextGenerating Screen Cap-tures

Object/RectangleObject/CircleObject/Spiral

Object/TextChoose Object/Text to add text to a geometric model. Such text, which is saved with thegeometric model, is generally used for labels that can be included in screen captures.

> To add text to the model:1. Choose Object/Text. The following window appears.

2. Enter the desired label or comment in the Text field. Text can be any length;however, be aware that a long line of text will not automatically wrap to a secondline if the text extends outside the drawing space.

3. Specify how to align the text about the insertion point. The current alignmentchoice appears next to the field Alignment. To change the text alignment:a. Click the left mouse button on the alignment. Doing so displays the following

options:

b. Choose the desired alignment from the menu.4. Choose OK or press Return.5. Click the left mouse button on the point where you want to place the text.

The text appears in the desired location using the alignment you specified.

left The first character of the string is flush left at the insertion point.center The string is centered on the insertion point. This is the default.right The last character of the string is flush right at the insertion point.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Object MenuObject CommandsObjectsObject/PolylineObject/ArcObject/SplineObject/Text

Scaling TextGenerating Screen Cap-tures

Object/RectangleObject/CircleObject/Spiral

Scaling Text

To change the default text size, use Model/Defaults/Text Size. All text that is subse-quently added to the model will use the size that you specify.

To change the size of text that is currently displayed in the model, use the Reshape/ScaleSelection command to change the scale of the text.

Generating Screen Captures

Text is generally used to label objects and annotate a geometric model for a screen cap-ture. Refer to the document describing the Print Manager for instructions on how to print ahardcopy of a screen brought up in the Maxwell software.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Object/RectangleChoose Object/Rectangle to draw a rectangle by selecting two diagonally opposite cor-ners.

> To create a rectangle:1. Choose Object/Rectangle. The cursor changes to crosshairs.2. Choose the first diagonal corner. Do one of the following:

• Click the left mouse button on the point.• Enter coordinates of the point using the keyboard.When you choose the first diagonal, the dU and dV fields appear below the statusbar, allowing you to enter the offset distance to the second diagonal of therectangle.

3. Choose the second diagonal corner using either the mouse or the keyboard. Awindow appears with fields for entering the name and color of the object.

4. Specify the name and color of the rectangle.5. Choose OK.

Note: If you are picking the rectangle’s corners from subwindows with different uv-axes orientations, the rectangle will be aligned with the uv-axes in the sub-window from which the second corner was picked.



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Object MenuObject CommandsObjectsObject/PolylineObject/ArcObject/SplineObject/TextObject/RectangleObject/Circle


Object/Spiral

Object/CircleUse the Object/Circle commands to draw a circle:

Object/Circle/2 Point

Choose Object/Circle/2 Point to draw a circle by specifying its center point and radius.

> To draw a two-point circle:1. Choose Object/Circle/2 Point. New fields appear below the status bar.2. Choose the center of the circle using either the mouse or keyboard.3. Choose a point on the circle’s circumference or enter the radius of the circle in the

Rad field. If you are using the mouse, when the mouse moves, the modelersketches a line from the center point to show the circle’s radius. Once the radiushas been defined, the following window appears:

4. Do one of the following:• Enter a value for the number of segments. Because all curves are represented by

a series of line segments, you need to specify the desired number of segments.For instance, specify a value of 20 to approximate the circle as a polygon with 20line segments, with each line segment comprising 18˚ of the circle. Changing theNumber of segments automatically adjusts the Angular increment. Theminimum number of segments that you can enter is eight.

• Specify the angular increment. Changing the Angular increment automaticallyadjusts the Number of segments. The maximum Angular increment that youcan enter is 45.

As shown in the following figure, there is a trade-off between circles approximatedwith too few and too many segments. If too few segments are specified, the resultis a shape that doesn’t look much like a circle. If too many segments are specified,

2 Point Draws a circle by specifying the center and radius.3 Point Draws a circle by specifying three points on the circumference.



Go Back

Contents

Index



Object/Spiral

the model becomes more complicated than necessary, resulting in increasedcomputing requirements. Therefore, in most cases accept the default.

5. Choose OK or press Return to complete the command. A window appears withfields for entering the name and color of the object.

6. Specify the name and color of the object.7. Choose OK.

8 12Segments Segments

24Segments



Go Back

Contents

Index



Object/Spiral

Object/Circle/3 Point

Choose Object/Circle/3 Point to draw a circle by selecting three points on its circumfer-ence.

> To draw a three-point circle:1. Choose Object/Circle/3 Point.2. Move the mouse to the first point on the circle’s circumference and click the left

mouse button. After you do, an “x” appears on the screen, marking the point’slocation. The dU and dV fields also appear, allowing you to use the keyboard todefine the second point on the circumference of the circle.

3. Choose the second point on the circle’s circumference. After you do, an “x”appears on the screen, marking the point’s location. The dU and dV fields arereset, allowing you to use the keyboard to enter the coordinates of the thirdcircumference point

4. Move the mouse to the third and final point on the circle’s circumference and clickthe left mouse button. After you do, a window with the following fields appears:

Number of segmentsAngular increment

5. Enter either the desired number of segments or the angular increment in the sameway as described for the Object/Circle/2 Point command. The minimum numberof segments that you can enter to approximate a circle is eight.

6. Choose OK or press the Return key to complete the command. The New Objectwindow appears with fields for entering the name and color of the object.

7. Enter the name of the new circle.8. Choose the color of the new circle.9. Choose OK. The window closes.



Go Back

Contents

More

Index


Object/Spiral/Rectangu-lar



Object/SpiralUse the Object/Spiral commands to draw two types of spirals:

Object/Spiral/Rectangular

Choose Object/Spiral/Rectangular to draw a rectangular spiral.

> To draw a rectangular spiral:1. Choose Object/Spiral/Rectangular. The following window appears:

2. Select the direction in which to generate the spiral — Clockwise or Counter-

Rectangular Draws a rectangular spiral.Circular Draws a circular spiral.



Go Back

Contents

Index





Clockwise.3. Enter the angle at which to begin drawing the spiral in the Start Angle field. The

angle the spiral begins at is relative to the v-axis originating from the center point(which you specify later). You may enter any number, including decimals.

4. Enter the number of turns for the spiral in the Number of Turns field. You mayenter any number, including decimals, greater than 0.25.

5. Enter the width of the trace in the Trace Width field.6. Enter the distance between each turn of the trace in the Trace Spacing field.7. Enter the length of the spiral in the Overall Length field. This does not refer to the

actual length of the spiral, but to the length of the rectangular area the spiraloccupies. This corresponds to the longest edge along the length of the spiral.

8. Enter the overall width of the spiral in the Overall Width field.9. Select the corner type from the following:

10.Choose OK. A window appears prompting you to select the center point for thespiral. The spiral follows the mouse. This is a guide to help you place the spiral.

11.Select the center point. The rectangular spiral is drawn.Square Corners

Select Square Corners to make the corners of the spiral 90 degrees.

Square Corners Makes the corners pointed.Rounded Corners Rounds the corners.Mitered Corners Miters the corners at a 45o angle from the edges.



Go Back

Contents

Index





Rounded Corners

Select Rounded Corners to round each corner of a rectangular spiral. The rounded cor-ner is always made with a 90 degree arc.

> To create a spiral with rounded corners:1. From the Rectangular Spiral window, select Rounded Corners. The Corner

Radius and Segments Per Arc fields become active.2. Enter the radius at which to draw the arc in the Corner Radius field. The corner

radius is measured from each edge of the spiral. The resulting arc is the quarter ofthe circle that joins the two perpendicular edges. To maintain a constant tracewidth, the corner radius must decrease as the trace spirals inward. The decreaseis calculated from the ratio of the corner radius you enter and the shortest lengthon the edges touching the outermost corner radius. This radius-to-length ratio isthen used to calculate the radius on each successive corner. This is shown below:

3. Enter the number of segments used to approximate the arc in the Segments PerArc field.

Note: If the radius ever decreases to the point where it becomes impossible tomaintain the trace width and have a rounded edge, the inner corner of thatturn will remain a square corner.

Spiral with rounded corners

rc

r1 = drl x l1

lc

l1

drl =rclc

Radius-to-length ratio:

Corner Radius ShortestEdge



Go Back

Contents

Index





Mitered Corners

Select Mitered Corners to miter each turn of a rectangular spiral. The miter is alwaysmade at a 45 degree angle from the edges of the spiral.

> To create a spiral with mitered corners:1. From the Rectangular Spiral window, select Mitered Corners. The Miter

Percentage field becomes active.2. In the Miter Percentage field, enter the percentage of the diagonal distance from

the outermost corner of a turn to create the mitered corner. For example, to createa corner with a miter cut three quarters of the distance from the outermost corner,enter 75 as the percentage.

This figure represents a spiral with two turns and mitered corners. The miterpercentage is set at 50.

Note: The Miter Percentage must be greater than 0 and less than 100.

Diagonal DistanceMitered Corner



Go Back

Contents

More

Index


Object/Spiral/RectangularSquare CornersRounded CornersMitered Corners



Choose Object/Spiral/Circular to draw a circular spiral.

> To draw a circular spiral:1. Choose Object/Spiral/Circular. The following window appears:

2. Select the direction in which to generate the spiral — Clockwise or Counter-Clockwise.

3. Enter the angle at which to begin drawing the spiral in the Start Angle field. Theangle the spiral begins at is relative to the u-axis originating from the starting point(the outer-end). You may enter any number between 0 and 360, includingdecimals.

4. Enter the number of turns for the spiral in the Number of Turns field. You mayenter any number, including decimals.

5. Enter the width of the trace in the Trace Width field.6. Enter the distance between each turn of the trace in the Trace Spacing field.7. Enter the overall radius of the spiral in the Outermost Radius field. This is similar

to the Overall Length and Overall Width used in the Object/Spiral/Rectangular



Go Back

Contents

Index


Object/Spiral/RectangularSquare CornersRounded CornersMitered Corners


command.8. Enter the number of degrees that each line segment represents in the Degrees

Per Segment field. In the 2D Modeler, arcs and circles are approximated by linesegments. Therefore, you must specify the number of degrees that each linesegment represents. For example, if you chose 90 as the Degrees Per Segment,it would generate a diamond-shaped spiral (only 4 line segments). You may entera value greater than 0 or less than or equal to 90.

9. Choose OK. A window appears prompting you to select the center point for thespiral. The spiral follows the mouse. This is merely a guide to help you place thespiral.

10.Select the center point. The circular spiral is drawn.


Maxwell 2D — Constraint MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Constraint MenuUse the Constraint commands (shown below) to do the following:

• Add constraints to a geometric model. Constraints can be varied during a parametricanalysis to determine the effect that dimensional changes have on a design. Theymay be defined as constants or mathematical expressions relating the constraint’svalue to that of another constraint or a predefined variable.

• Modify variable constraints to change a geometry’s dimensions. Different numericvalues, math functions, or proportional relationships can be assigned to constraints.

• Delete constraints from a model.• Activate (or “enforce”) new constraint settings.

When you choose Constraint from the 2D Modeler menu bar, the following menuappears:

The Constraint commands are available in the 2D modeler, which may be accessed viaMaxwell 2D and the Utilities panel.

Constraint MenuConstraint CommandsConstraintsConstraint/AddConstraint/ModifyConstraint/DeleteConstraint/Enforce



Go Back

Contents

Index

Constraint CommandsThe function of each Constraint command is as follows:

Add Allows you to add one or more constraints to your geometric model.Point-To-Point Dis-tance

Sets a constraint based on the distance between twopoints.

Line-To-LineAngle

Sets a constraint based on the angle between twostraight lines.

Arc Radius Sets a constraint based on the length of the radius ofan arc.

Rotation Sets a constraint based on the angle from a selectedanchor point on an object to the local u-axis.

Lock X Coordinate Adds an X-lock constraintLock Y Coordinate Adds a Y-lock constraint.

Modify Allows you to modify the values of constraints.By Clicking Lets you use the mouse to select constraints to be

modified, one at a time.Edit Variables Lets you modify multiple constraints at one time using

the Constraint Variables table. Also lets you definevariables for use in functional constraints.

Delete Deletes one or more constraints.By Clicking Deletes the constraints you select via the mouse.By Name Deletes a constraint by name.All Deletes all of the constraints.

Enforce Activates new constraint or variable settings.




Go Back

Contents

Index

ConstraintsConstraints allow you to easily and precisely vary the dimensions of your geometricdesign. By changing a dimension in a model — for example, the distance between twoobjects or the angle between two intersecting lines — you can test to see how thatchange will affect the results of the solution.

You can use constraints as follows:

• To set a dimension to a specific value.• To set a dimension to an expression relating it to a mathematical formula — such as

one relating it to the value of another constraint. For example, defining the constraintc2 as c2= 0.5*c1 sets c2 to always be one-half the value of the constraint c1.

Constraints are particularly helpful when you want to change two or more dimensions inrelation to each other, as shown here.

In this example, all the constraints are defined in relation to the constraint c1. Constraint 2(c2) is set to be equal to two-thirds of constraint c1 (or 0.667*c1); constraint 3(c3) is set tobe equal to the sum of c1 and c2. To increase the size of the object, for example, youneed only change c1. The other three constraints will change to maintain the establishedrelationships. As a result, the object becomes longer but generally retains its originalshape.

Constraint MenuConstraint CommandsConstraints

Constraints and Paramet-ric Sweeps

Direction of ConstraintsOver-Constraining aModel

Deleting Objects andEdges

Moving Objects andEdges

Naming Constraint Vari-ables

Constraint/AddConstraint/ModifyConstraint/DeleteConstraint/Enforce



Go Back

Contents

Index

Constraints and Parametric Sweeps

During a parametric sweep, you can vary the values of selected geometric constraintsand solve for fields, various executive parameters (force, torque, inductance, and soforth), and run post-processing macros at each value of the constraint. This type of analy-sis is primarily used in variational design, where the lengths of various dimensions arechanged while other parts of the geometry are kept the same or change proportionally. Itis also used in tolerance testing, where small variations in dimensions can have a largeimpact on the design.

To vary constraints during a parametric sweep, simply add the desired constraints assolution variables when setting up the sweep. You can then enter the values that the con-straints are to be set to during the solution.

Direction of Constraints

All constraints are marked with arrows labeled with the constraint’s name. Be sure thatyou define a constraint in the direction that you wish the object, point, or edge to bemoved. When in doubt, check the arrow marking the constraint’s location. It indicates thedirection in which the constraint operates.


Constraints and Para-metric Sweeps








Go Back

Contents

Index

Over-Constraining a Model

A geometric model becomes over-constrained when more than one constraint controlsthe location of a point, edge, or object. For example, the geometry on the left in the figurebelow is over-constrained. Two constraints, L1 and L2, control the location of object A.Neither of these constraints can be enforced, since changing the value of L1 changes thevalue of L2 (and vice-versa).

The software displays an error message if you over-constrain a model. The constraint youwere attempting to define is then deleted.

Note that the geometry on the right in the figure above is not over-constrained. The con-straint L2 defines the location of object C with respect to object A, as indicated by thedirection of the arrow. Changing the value of L1 does not change the value of L2 in thiscase. Object C is moved to preserve this relationship.

A A

B C B C

L1 L2 L1 L2

Over-constrainedgeometry










Go Back

Contents

Index

Deleting Objects and Edges

When you delete an object, all constraints that are defined for that object are also deleted— including those defined between it and other objects.

When you delete an edge of an object for which constraints are defined, one of the follow-ing occurs:

• Arc radius and line-to-line angle constraints are automatically deleted when the edgefor which they are defined is deleted. Note that the 2D Modeler considers circles andarcs to have a single edge, even though they may appear to have multiple edges ifthey are approximated with a low number of segments.

• Point-to-point constraints are deleted if deleting the edge removes the vertex or splinecontrol point where the constraint is defined.

• Rotational constraints are not deleted unless all edges of the object are deleted. Theconstraint simply uses the new geometric center of the object to define its rotation.

Moving Objects and Edges

When you move an object or an edge, the constraints that are defined for it retain theircurrent values even though the location of the point, edge, or object for which the con-straint was defined is now different. Enforcing constraints may undo the effects of themove, depending on how the constraints were defined.

Naming Constraint Variables

When you define a constraint variable, you are prompted for the variable name. The vari-able can be assigned any name. However, if two constraints are assigned the samename, they are treated as the same variable. For example, the square in the figure belowhas two edges with the same name, C1. As the variable C1 is increased during the para-metric sweep, both of the edges named C1 increase.

C1

C1

C1

C1

Original Object Object with Constraints Enforced










Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Constraint/AddUse the Constraint/Add commands to add variable constraints for the following:

Constraint/Add/Point-To-Point Distance

Choose Constraint/Add/Point-To-Point Distance to set a constraint along the distancebetween two points. The points can be within the same object or on separate objects. Youcan then alter the constraint to change the distance or relate it to another constraint.Point-to-point constraints can only be defined for object vertices and spline control points.

> Set a point-to-point distance constraint as follows:1. Choose Constraint/Add/Point-To-Point Distance. The following appears in the

message bar:

MOUSE LEFT: Click on anchor pointMOUSE RIGHT: Abort command

2. Click on the first point along the distance you wish to set up as a constraint. Themessage bar changes to read as follows:

MOUSE LEFT: Click on target pointMOUSE RIGHT: Abort command

3. Click on the target point. A pop-up window appears.4. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field.

Point-To-PointDistance

Sets a constraint based on the distance between two points.

Line-To-LineAngle

Sets a constraint based on the angle between two straight lines.

Arc Radius Sets a constraint based on the length of the radius of an arc.Rotation Sets a constraint based on the angle from a selected anchor

point on an object to the local u-axis.

Note: Before using the Constraint/Add commands to define constraints for a geo-metric model, be sure to display the vertices and control points of objects. Todo this, use the command Edit/Attributes/By Clicking to draw hatches overthem. This helps you to locate object vertices and spline control points eas-ily, simplifying the task of adding constraints.

Constraint MenuConstraint CommandsConstraintsConstraint/Add


Constraint/Add/Line-To-Line Angle

Constraint/Add/Arc RadiusConstraint/Add/RotationConstraint/Add/Lock XCoordinate

Constraint/Add/Lock YCoordinate

Constraint/ModifyConstraint/DeleteConstraint/Enforce



Go Back

Contents

Index

5. Enter the distance between the two points in the Expr field. Defaults to the currentdistance.

6. Select Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, theadded constraint won’t take effect until you activate it using the Constraint/Enforce command.

7. When you are finished, click the right mouse button to exit the command.

Effect of Point-to-Point Constraints on Object Dimensions

The effect of enforcing a point-to-point constraint depends on whether you defined theconstraint between points on two different objects or two points on the same object.

• If you defined the constraint between two points on different objects, the distancebetween them changes when you enforce the constraint — as shown on the left in thefigure below. However, the dimensions of the objects remain the same.

• If you defined the constraint between two points within the same object, the dimensionalong which the constraint is defined changes when you enforce the constraint. Thischanges the shape of the object, as shown on the right in the figure below.

Constraints Between Arbitrary Object Points

To define point-to-point constraints between arbitrary points on objects, insert new verti-ces at the desired points using the Reshape/Vertex/Insert command.

Note: Each constraint is represented by an arrow labeled with the contraint’sname. To avoid a cluttered screen, keep the constraint names as short aspossible.

Dimensions with Enforced

Original Object Locations

Location with EnforcedConstraint Constraint

Original Object Dimensions









Go Back

Contents

Index


Choose Constraint/Add/Line-To-Line Angle to create a constraint for an angle betweentwo straight lines. This constraint does not work with circles, arcs, or splines.

> To create a line-to-line angle constraint:1. Choose Constraint/Add/Line-To-Line Angle. The following appears in the

message bar:

MOUSE LEFT: Click on anchor lineMOUSE RIGHT: Abort command

2. Click on the first line you wish to set up as a constraint. The message bar changesto read as follows:

MOUSE LEFT: Click on target lineMOUSE RIGHT: Abort command

3. Move the mouse to the second line and click on it. A pop-up window appears.4. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field.5. Enter the angle between the two lines in the Expr field. Angles are given counter-

clockwise from the anchor line.6. Select Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, the

added constraint won’t take effect until you activate it using the Constraint/Enforce command.










Go Back

Contents

Index

Constraint/Add/Arc Radius

Choose Constraint/Add/Arc Radius to create a constraint equal to the radius of the cho-sen arc. This constraint only works on circles and arcs (both open arcs and arcs that arepart of closed objects.)

> To create an arc radius constraint:1. Choose Constraint/Add/Arc Radius. The following appears in the message bar:

MOUSE LEFT: Click on arc whose radius is to be constrainedMOUSE RIGHT: Abort command

2. Click the mouse on the arc whose radius you wish to constrain. A window appears.3. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field.4. Enter the radius of the circle or arc in the Expr field. Defaults to the current radius.5. Select Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, the






Constraint/Add/ArcRadius

Constraint/Add/RotationConstraint/Add/Lock XCoordinate





Go Back

Contents

Index

Constraint/Add/Rotation

Choose Constraint/Add/Rotation to create a constraint on the angle between theanchor point and the center of the object you wish to rotate. Angles are given counter-clockwise from the local u-axis.

> To create a constraint on an angle of rotation:1. Choose Constraint/Add/Rotation. The following appears in the message bar:

MOUSE LEFT: Click on anchor pointMOUSE RIGHT: Abort command

2. Click the left mouse button on the point around which you wish to rotate the object.You can select either a point that is outside of the object or on the object for theanchor point. Another message appears in the message bar:

MOUSE LEFT: Click on target objectMOUSE RIGHT: Abort command

3. Select the object you wish to rotate. A pop-up window appears.4. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field.5. Enter the angle (in degrees) between the object’s center point and the u-axis in the

Expr field.6. Select Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, the











Go Back

Contents

Index

Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate

Choose Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate to create a constraint on the x-coordinate ofa vertex with respect to the drawing plane.

> To create an x-lock constraint:1. Choose Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate. The cursor changes to crosshairs.2. Click on the point on which to lock the x-coordinate and define the constraint. The

New Constraint window appears.3. Enter the Name of the new constraint or accept the default.4. Enter the expression for the constraint in the Expr field. Expressions can be

functional, and can depend on other constraints.5. Optionally, select Enforce to enforce the constraint on the coordinate.6. Choose OK.

The constraint on the x-coordinate is now defined.

Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate

Choose Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate to create a constraint on the y coordinate ofa vertex with respect to the drawing plane.

> To create an y-lock constraint:1. Choose Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate. The cursor changes to crosshairs.2. Click on the point on which to lock the y-coordinate and define the constraint. The

New Constraint window appears.3. Enter the Name of the new constraint or accept the default.4. Enter the expression for the constraint in the Expr field. Expressions can be

functional, and can depend on other constraints.5. Optionally, select Enforce to enforce the constraint on the coordinate.6. Choose OK.

The constraint on the y-coordinate is now defined.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Constraint/ModifyUse the Constraint/Modify commands to change existing constraints as follows:

Constraint/Modify/By Clicking

Choose Constraint/Modify/By Clicking to modify the constraints using the mouse.

> To modify the constraints:1. Choose Constraint/Modify/By Clicking. The following appears in the message

bar:

MOUSE LEFT: Pick constraint to be modifiedMOUSE RIGHT: Abort command

2. Select the constraint to modify. A window appears.3. To change the name of the constraint, enter a new name in the Name field.4. To change the value of the constraint, enter a new numeric value or math

expression in the Expr field.5. To immediately enact the constraint change, choose Enforce. Otherwise, the

change does not take effect until you choose Constraint/Enforce.6. Select OK. You can then select another constraint to modify, or click the right

mouse to abort the command.

By Clicking Select constraints to be modified with the mouse.Edit Variables Lets you modify multiple constraints at one time using the Con-

straint Variables table. Also lets you define variables to be usedin mathematical expressions.

Constraint MenuConstraint CommandsConstraintsConstraint/AddConstraint/Modify

Constraint/Modify/ByClicking

Constraint/Modify/EditVariables

Defining FunctionalConstraints

Constraint/DeleteConstraint/Enforce



Go Back

Contents

Index

Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables

Choose Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables to:

• Modify multiple constraints at one time using the Constraint Variables table.• Define variables to be used in mathematical relationships.

> To modify a constraint or define variables:1. Choose Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables. The following window appears. The

table lists the name of each constraint, its current value, and the expression thatdefines the constraint. Below the table are two fields, one for the constraint name,and the other for the constraint expression.

2. Select the desired constraint from the table.3. Enter the new name in the Name field.4. Enter the new constraint value in the Expression field. For more information on

the different expressions you can use to define constraints, choose Help. You canalso define a constraint as a math expression.

5. Choose Update to enact the change.6. Optionally, choose Delete to delete a constraint.7. Choose Done when you are finished making changes.








Go Back

Contents

Index

Defining Functional Constraints

To define a constraint as a mathematical expression (such as the tangent of an angle),you must first define the variables to be used in the math expression. Existing constraintsmay be used as variables, and additional variables may be defined using the ConstraintVariables window.

> To define functional constraints:1. Define the variables to be used in the function, if they are not already defined as

constraints. (Constraints and variables are treated identically when setting upfunctions.)a. Enter the new variable’s name in the Name field.b. Enter its value in the Expression field.

2. Select the desired constraint.3. Enter the math function as the constraint’s value.

For example, in the figure on the previous page, the constraint R1 is set to sin(t), where tis a variable set to 45 degrees. The constraint R2 is set to 5*R1. The variable t had to becreated before defining the expression for the value of R1.

The Constraint Variables window is similar to the Expression Evaluator in the UtilitiesPanel.

Note: Variables that you define via the Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables com-mand can be used to define the values of new constraints and constraintsmodified using Constraint/Modify/By Clicking.








Go Back

Contents

Index

Constraint/DeleteUse the Constraint/Delete commands to delete constraints in the following ways:

Constraint/Delete/By Clicking

Choose Constraint/Delete/By Clicking to delete constraints you select with the mouse.

> To delete constraints by clicking:1. Choose Constraint/Delete/By Clicking.2. Select the constraint you wish to delete. It is immediately deleted.3. When you are done, click the right mouse button to abort the command.

Constraint/Delete/By Name

Choose Constraint/Delete/By Name to delete constraints by name.

> To delete constraints by name:1. Choose Constraint/Delete/By Name. A window appears, asking you to enter the

name of the constraint or expression to delete.2. Enter the name of the constraint you wish to delete. To delete more than one

constraint at a time, use wild cards to specify the part of the constraint name to bematched.

3. Choose OK.

Constraint/Delete/All

Choose Constraint/Delete/All to delete all the constraints you’ve set for a model.

> To delete all constraints on the model:1. Choose Constraint/Delete/All. A window appears, asking you to confirm the

deletion of the constraints.2. Choose Yes to delete the constraints or No to cancel the deletion.

By Clicking Deletes the constraints you select via the mouse.By Name Deletes a constraint by name.All Deletes all of the constraints.

Constraint MenuConstraint CommandsConstraintsConstraint/AddConstraint/ModifyConstraint/Delete

Constraint/Delete/ByClicking

Constraint/Delete/ByName

Constraint/Delete/AllConstraint/Enforce



Go Back

Contents

Index


Errors in Enforcing Con-straints

Exiting With UnenforcedConstraints

Constraint/EnforceChoose Constraint/Enforce to activate new constraints or changes in the constraints youhave just set. You need to use this command if you did not choose the Enforce optionwhen using the Constraint/Add and Constraint/Modify/By Clicking commands. The2D Modeler does not automatically enforce constraints.

Errors in Enforcing Constraints

Occasionally, enforcing a constraint results in one of the following conditions:

• Objects that lie outside the problem space.• Self-intersecting objects.• Overlapping objects.

The 2D modeler displays an error message if any of these problems occur. The constraintis not enforced, and the dimension being changed reverts back to its previous value. How-ever, the constraint is still set to the value you specified. You must modify the constraint toprevent the error from happening the next time you enforce constraints.

Exiting With Unenforced Constraints

If you exit the 2D modeler without enforcing constraints, the Maxwell 2D uses the currentdimensions of the geometric model when generating a finite element mesh. The con-straint values are not lost, however, and can later be enforced when you return to the 2DModeler.


Maxwell 2D — Model MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Model MenuUse the Model commands to:

• Determine the distance and the angle between two points.• Set the default units of measurement for the project.• Specify the drawing size.• Specify the “snap-to” behavior of the mouse.• Specify the default object color, text size, and window settings for a project.

When you choose Model from the menu bar, the following menu appears:






Model/Defaults/ColorModel/Defaults/Text SizeModel/Defaults/WindowSettings

Model/Default Color



Go Back

Contents

Index







Model/Default Color

Model CommandsThe Model commands affect all subwindows within the active project window. The func-tion of each Model command is as follows:

Measure Displays the coordinates of any two points you select, and measuresthe distance, offsets, and angle between the two points.

ObjectAttributes

(Boundary Manager only.) Displays the name, color, and group nameof the selected object. Also tells if the object is excluded from themodel.

Drawing Units Selects the unit of measurement to use in creating the geometricmodel.

Drawing Size Defines the drawing size — the size of the region in which the geo-metric model is drawn and in which a solution is displayed.

Drawing Plane Allows you to choose either the XY or RZ drawing plane for creatinga cartesian or axisymmetric model.

SnapTo Mode Specifies the “snap-to” behavior for the mouse.Defaults Allows you to view and change default settings for the following

options:Color Sets the default object and text color.Text Size Sets the default text size.Window Settings Displays the default subwindow settings such as

grid type, the origin and orientation of the localcoordinate system, and the distance betweenadjacent grid points.

Default Color (Boundary Manager only.) Sets the default object color.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Model/Default Color

Model/MeasureChoose Model/Measure to display the coordinates associated with any two points. Thefollowing figure shows the information that is displayed after two points are selected:

> To display coordinate information:1. Make the desired project window the active one.2. Choose Model/Measure. The cursor changes to crosshairs.3. Move the mouse to the first point and click the left mouse button.4. Move the mouse to the second point and click the left mouse button. The

Measurement window appears, displaying the desired information.5. When you are finished viewing the measurements, choose OK or press the Return

key.6. Do one of the following:

• To continue selecting point pairs, repeat steps 3 through 5.• Click the right mouse button to exit the command.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Model/Default Color

Measurements

The following values appear in the window after you choose the second point. All valuesare given in the unit of length specified by the Model/Drawing Units command. Thesemeasurements are taken from the global xy-coordinate system, not the local coordinatesystem for the subwindow. The local coordinate system values appear in the status barfields.

Model/Object AttributesBoundary Manager only.

Choose this command to display the name, color, and group name of the selected object.

> To display an object’s attributes:1. Choose Model/Object Attributes. The cursor changes to an up-arrow.2. Select the object whose attributes you wish to display. The Object Attributes

window appears, listing the name, color, and group name (if any) of the 2D object,as well as whether or not the object is excluded from the model. Only objects thatare excluded are denoted as such. Included objects show no denotation.

3. Choose Done to close the window.4. Click the right mouse button to end the command.

1st point The x- and y-coordinates of the first point.2nd point The x- and y-coordinates of the second point.Offsets The difference between the x- and y-coordinates of the two points.Distance The linear distance between the points (that is, the length of a line con-

necting the two points).Angle The angle, in degrees, between a line connecting the two points and

the global x-axis.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Model/Default Color

Model/Drawing UnitsChoose Model/Drawing Units to select the unit of length for the model displayed in theactive project window.

> To set the unit of length for the model:1. Make the desired project window the active one.2. Choose Model/Drawing Units. A window appears, listing the available units of

measurement.3. Select the units for the model.4. Specify how the change in units is to affect the geometric model.

• Choose Display in New Units (the default) to display the model’s dimensions inthe new units without changing their scale. For instance, choosing centimeters asthe new unit causes a dimension of ten millimeters to be displayed as onecentimeter.

• Choose Rescale to New Units to change the scale of the model so that alldimensions are converted to the new units. For instance, choosing centimeters asthe new unit causes a dimension of ten millimeters to become ten centimeters.

5. Choose OK or press Return to complete the command.

The dimensions of objects in the geometric model are now given in the units you selected.Enter all dimensions in the same units.

Note: In Maxwell 2D, the unit of length has no effect on the units of electromag-netic quantities. They are always expressed in SI (MKS) units. For instance,even though a geometric model is entered in inches, its computed electricfield is still expressed in volts/meter.



Go Back

Contents

More

Index







Model/Default Color

Model/Drawing SizeChoose Model/Drawing Size to define the drawing region for all subwindows of theactive project. The drawing region is the rectangular area, displayed as a grid, in whichthe geometric model is drawn. The Maxwell 2D does not attempt to compute a solutionoutside the drawing region.

It is important to explicitly define a drawing region because the software computes elec-tromagnetic field quantities throughout the entire drawing region. Defining a region that isthe appropriate size conserves computing resources.

The following figure shows the drawing region for a sample geometry. It has been sized tobe about twenty-five percent larger than the entire geometric model:

> To define the drawing size for a project window:1. Make the desired project window the active one.



Go Back

Contents

More

Index







Model/Default Color

2. Choose Model/Drawing Size. The following window appears:

3. Specify the desired size of the drawing region in one of the following ways:• Enter the coordinates marking the lower-left and upper-right corners of the drawing

region as follows:

All x and y values are given in the units specified with the Model/Drawing Unitscommand.

• Alternatively, enter a Padding Percent and choose Fit All. The drawing region isresized such that all objects fit inside the region with a given percent of padding.(Padding is simply blank space around the edge of the objects.) The x and yvalues are displayed in the Minima and Maxima fields.For example, specifying a padding of zero results in a rectangular drawing region

Minima Specify coordinates of the lower-left corner of the drawing region:X Enter the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the drawing

region.Y Enter the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the drawing

region.Maxima Specify the coordinates of the upper right corner of the drawing region:

X Enter the x-coordinate of the upper-right corner of the drawingregion.

Y Enter the y-coordinate of the upper-right corner of the drawingregion.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Model/Default Color

that is just large enough to hold all objects that are already drawn. A padding of tenpercent results in a drawing region with sides that are ten percent larger than this.

4. Leave Fit Drawing set by default so the entire drawing space is displayed in thewindow.

5. Leave Set grid spacing set by default so the suggested grid spacing isautomatically set.


The drawing region in all subwindows is then resized.

Things to ConsiderScroll Bars

If the drawing region is too large to fit in the viewing area of a particular subwindow, scrollbars automatically appear on the bottom and left side of the subwindow. Use them toscroll across the drawing region. Alternatively, use Window/Change View/Fit Drawing torescale the viewing area of the subwindow to display the entire drawing region.

Adjusting the View

When you change the drawing size, the software automatically adjusts the view so thatthe entire drawing region can be viewed in the window.

Note: > To round off x and y values after resizing the drawing area:• Choose Round Off.This rounds off the x and y fields to produce reasonable dimensions for thedrawing region. Since the drawing region size is also used to set default gridspacing, text size, and so forth, rounding off the dimensions also gives youappropriate defaults for these 2D Modeler parameters.



Go Back

Contents

More

Index







Model/Default Color

Model/Drawing PlaneChoose Model/Drawing Plane to view and change the drawing plane in which you createthe model. Two types of geometric models are available:

• In a cartesian (XY) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of a devicethat extends perpendicular to the modeling plane.

• In an axisymmetric (RZ) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of adevice that is rotated 360° about an axis of symmetry.

The figure below shows the difference between each type of drawing.

This command is available in the 2D Modeler in the Utilities panel and in the Maxwell 2DField Simulator version 6.1 (or later). In the Utilities panel 2D Modeler, you can changethe drawing plane; in the Maxwell 2D Field Simulator 2D Modeler, you can view the draw-ing plane you specified in the Solver command.

> To view or change the drawing plane:1. Choose Model/Drawing Plane. A window appears, displaying the drawing plane

options.

Choose RZ Plane tocreate an axisymmetricgeometry. Visualize therectangle as beingrevolved around an axisof symmetry, z.

Choose XY Plane tocreate a cartesiangeometry.Visualize the rectangleas extending perpen-dicular to the plane.

φ

XY

Z

Z

R



Go Back

Contents

Index







Model/Default Color

2. Choose one of the following:

3. Choose OK.

The drawing region is then redisplayed and the axes in the lower left corner of the 2DModeler appear to indicate which drawing plane you have selected.

If the entire drawing region is not displayed when you select the RZ drawing plane,choose Window/Change View/Fit Drawing to fit the drawing region in the active window.

Because an axisymmetric model represents a device that’s revolved around the z-axis,you cannot specify a value for r that is less than zero when creating objects or setting thedrawing size. For example, if you create objects in the XY drawing plane and then changethe drawing plane to RZ, the following occurs:

• The xy coordinates assigned to the objects in the XY drawing plane are changed to rzcoordinates for the RZ drawing plane.

• If there are any objects that overlap into the negative RZ space (or were assignednegative x- or y-coordinates when created in the XY drawing plane), the followingmessage appears:

Warning! Drawing size and/or items have been shifted intopositive R space.

> To correct the position of the objects:1. Choose OK to close the window.2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit Drawing to display the entire drawing region.

Remember to move the objects so that they are positioned correctly in relationshipto the axis of symmetry.

XY Plane Creates a cartesian model.RZ Plane Creates an axisymmetric model.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Model/Default Color

Model/SnapTo ModeChoose Model/SnapTo Mode to specify the “snap-to” behavior of the mouse — that is,the way in which the mouse selects points on the grid.

> To reset the mouse “snap-to” behavior:1. Choose Model/SnapTo Mode. The following window appears:

2. Select one or both of the following options:

By default, both options are selected.3. Choose OK or press Return.

If Snap to Grid is in effect, the system snaps to the closest grid point and uses the coor-dinates of that point rather than the exact location of the mouse. If Snap to Vertex is ineffect, the system snaps to the closest object vertex point and uses the coordinates ofthat point rather than the exact location of the mouse. The mouse must be within threepixels of the vertex. This option allows you to easily create closed objects, since themouse automatically snaps to the vertex point you are trying to connect. If both Snap toGrid and Snap to Vertex are in effect, the mouse snaps to either an object point or a gridpoint, depending on which is closer.

In general, select at least one of the snap-to options. If neither of these options areselected, the software is in “free mode” and selects whatever point you click on, regard-less of its coordinates. This can cause problems when you are trying to create closedobjects. Although the point you select may appear to be the vertex point of an openobject, you may not have actually selected the exact coordinates of the point (and thus didnot create the closed object).

Snap to Grid Forces the mouse to grab the nearest point on the grid.Snap to Vertex Forces the mouse to grab the nearest vertex point on an object.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Model/Default Color

Keyboard Entry

Occasionally, you may need to enter a point that is between grid spacings or object verti-ces. Instead of changing the mouse behavior, it may be easier to enter the point from thekeyboard.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Model/Default Color

Model/DefaultsChoose the Model/Defaults commands to specify the following default settings:

Model/Defaults/Color

Choose Model/Defaults/Color to specify the default color of objects and text. All newobjects and text will be displayed in the default color you specify.

> To set the default object and text color:1. Choose Model/Defaults/Color. The following window appears:

2. Click on the color square next to the Default Color field. A palette of colorsappears.

3. Choose the desired color. It appears in the color square.4. Choose OK or press Return.

All new objects and text will use the selected color as the default color.

Color Default object and text color.Text Size Default size for text.Window Settings Default subwindow settings, such as grid type, the origin of the

local coordinate system, and the distance between adjacentgrid points.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Model/Default Color

Model/Defaults/Text Size

Choose Model/Defaults/Text Size to specify the default size of text. All new text will usethe new size as the default text size.

> To set the default text size:1. Choose Model/Defaults/Text Size. The following window appears:

2. Enter the desired text size in the Size field. The size is entered in the current units.3. To set the text size to its suggested value, choose the Suggested Size button.

The suggested size value is based on the size of your model’s drawing space.4. Choose OK or press Return.

All new text created with Object/Text appears in the specified size.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Model/Default Color

Model/Defaults/Window Settings

Choose Model/Defaults/Window Settings to specify which subwindow settings shouldbe used as the default. The settings include:

• Grid type (cartesian or polar).• Grid spacing.• Origin of the local coordinate system.• Angle at which the local coordinate system is rotated from the global x-axis.

All new subwindows that you create will use the default values. In addition, if you exit thesoftware, the defaults are saved for the next time you use the software.

> To specify the default subwindow settings:1. Set up a subwindow with the desired grid spacing, grid type, coordinate system

origin, and angle of rotation, using the commands on the Window menu.2. Choose Model/Defaults/Window Settings.3. Select the desired subwindow. A window appears showing the window’s grid type,

grid spacing, the origin of its coordinate system, the angle at which the coordinatesystem is rotated from the x-axis, and whether the uv key and the grid are visible.


All new subwindows will use these window settings.

Model/Default Color(Boundary Manager only.)

Choose Model/Defaults/Color to specify the default color of objects and text. All newobjects and text will be displayed in the default color you specify.

> To set the default object and text color:1. Choose Model/Defaults/Color. A window appears, displaying a color block.2. Click on the Color square. A palette of colors appears.3. Choose the desired color. It appears in the Color square.4. Choose OK or press Return.

All new objects will use the selected color as the default color.


Maxwell 2D — Window MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Window MenuUse the Window commands to:

• Open and close subwindows under the active project window.• Change the view in the active subwindow.• Tile and cascade project windows and subwindows.• Rotate or shift the origin of the local coordinate system in a subwindow, or realign the

local coordinate system with the global xy-axes.• Specify grid spacing and grid visibility.• Choose whether a rectangular or radial grid is used.• Display geometric objects as solids or wire frame outlines.• Select the active project window.• View a list of all open projects.

When you choose Window from the menu bar, the following menu appears:

Window MenuWindow CommandsWindowsWindow/NewWindow/CloseWindow/TileWindow/CascadeWindow/Change ViewWindow/Coordinate SystemWindow/GridWindow/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame



Go Back

Contents

Index


Window CommandsThe function of each Window command is as follows:

In addition to the commands available on the Window menu, there is a list of all currentlyopen project windows. To switch to a project window, choose its title from the menu.

New Creates a new subwindow in the active project window.Close Closes the active subwindow in the active project window.Tile Moves and resizes (“tiles”) windows to display them all on the

screen at the same time.Cascade Stacks (“cascades”) windows, starting at the upper left corner

of the screen or active project window.Change View Expands or shrinks the part of the problem region that is dis-

played in the active subwindow.Coordinate System Shifts or rotates the local coordinate system in the active sub-

window.Grid Specifies 2D grid parameters, such as grid visibility, grid spac-

ing, the type of grid (rectangular or radial), and whether a key(a set of axes showing the u and v directions in the local coor-dinate system) is displayed.

Fill Solids Displays the closed objects in the active subwindow as filled-insolids. (Toggles with Wire Frame.)

Wire Frame Displays filled-in objects in the active subwindow as wire frameoutlines. (Toggles with Fill Solids.)

Toolbar Defines the location of the toolbar for the active window.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Window MenuWindow CommandsWindows

Selecting the ActiveProject Window

Moving and ResizingWindows Using theMouse

Entering Points With theKeyboard

Window/NewWindow/CloseWindow/TileWindow/CascadeWindow/Change ViewWindow/Coordinate SystemWindow/GridWindow/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame

WindowsAll open project windows are listed at the bottom of the Window menu. However, you canonly work in one project window at a time. The project window in which you can drawobjects and text is the active window. All other project windows are inactive.

Selecting the Active Project Window

The name of the active project window is marked by a check box on the Window menu.To select the active project window, do one of the following:

• Select that project name from the Window menu.• Click a mouse button anywhere on that window.

The window you selected appears on top of all the other project windows on the screen.Depending on how you’ve set up your color preferences, the window may also changecolor when it is selected. Most of the window commands operate on the active windowwithout affecting the other windows. The selected window remains the active window untila new one is chosen.

Moving and Resizing Windows Using the Mouse

Project windows and subwindows can be moved and resized using the mouse. Thesecommands are the same as those used in the Motif and the Microsoft Windows environ-ments. Instructions for moving and resizing windows using their window frames areincluded in the document describing the user interface.

Entering Points With the Keyboard

With some Window commands in the software, you are expected to select points fromthe screen using the mouse and cursor. As an alternative to selecting points with themouse, you can enter points with the keyboard in the fields located in the status bar at thebottom of the screen. Use keyboard entry to:

• Enter coordinates and angles with greater precision than can be achieved using themouse.

• Select points that are between grid or mouse “snaps” without having to change themouse behavior.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Window/NewChoose Window/New to create a new subwindow in the active project window.

> To create a new subwindow:• Choose Window/New.

A new subwindow appears on the screen, as shown below. It automatically becomes theactive subwindow:

You can create as many subwindows as you like in a project window. Each subwindow’scoordinate system, grid, and viewing area are set independently.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Window/CloseChoose Window/Close to close the active subwindow under the active project window.

> To close a subwindow:1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.2. Choose Window/Close. The subwindow disappears.

Note that the geometric model is not deleted if you close all subwindows under a projectwindow. To display the model again, open a new subwindow.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Window MenuWindow CommandsWindowsWindow/NewWindow/CloseWindow/Tile

Window/Tile/Subwin-dows

Window/Tile/ProjectsWindow/Tile/All

Window/CascadeWindow/Change ViewWindow/Coordinate SystemWindow/GridWindow/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame

Window/TileUse the Window/Tile commands to move and resize subwindows, project windows, orboth so that the windows are visible on the screen at the same time. The following optionsare available:

The Window/Tile commands are used to organize your subwindows and/or project win-dows so that you can see exactly what each window is displaying at any given time.

Window/Tile/Subwindows

Choose Window/Tile/Subwindows to tile the subwindows in the active project window.

> To tile subwindows in the active project window:• Choose Window/Tile/Subwindows.

The subwindows are moved and resized to display on the screen at the same time, similarto the subwindows shown below. The active subwindow is located in the upper-left cornerof the active project window:

Subwindows Tiles the subwindows in the active project window.Projects Tiles all project windows.All Tiles all windows.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Window MenuWindow CommandsWindowsWindow/NewWindow/CloseWindow/Tile

Window/Tile/SubwindowsWindow/Tile/ProjectsWindow/Tile/All

Window/CascadeWindow/Change ViewWindow/Coordinate SystemWindow/GridWindow/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame

Window/Tile/Projects

Choose Window/Tile/Projects to tile all open project windows.

> To tile project windows:• Choose Window/Tile/Projects.

All open project windows are moved and resized to display on the screen at the sametime, similar to the project windows shown below. The active project window is located inthe upper left corner of the screen:

Window/Tile/All

Choose Window/Tile/All to tile all open subwindows and project windows simulta-neously.

> To tile all open windows:• Choose Window/Tile/All.

All open windows are moved and resized to display on the screen at the same time.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Window MenuWindow CommandsWindowsWindow/NewWindow/CloseWindow/TileWindow/Cascade

Window/Cascade/Sub-windows

Window/Cascade/ProjectsWindow/Cascade/All

Window/Change ViewWindow/Coordinate SystemWindow/GridWindow/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame

Window/CascadeUse the Window/Cascade commands to move and resize subwindows, project windows,or both so that the windows are stacked on top of each other. The following options areavailable:

The Window/Cascade commands are used to organize your subwindows and/or projectwindows so you can access any window by clicking a mouse button on it.

Window/Cascade/Subwindows

Choose Window/Cascade/Subwindows to cascade the subwindows in the activeproject window.

> To cascade subwindows:• Choose Window/Cascade/Subwindows.

All subwindows in the active project window are moved and resized to appear in a stack,similar to the subwindows shown below. The active subwindow is located on top of theother subwindows.

Subwindows Cascades the subwindows in the active project window.Projects Cascades all project windows.All Cascades all windows.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Window MenuWindow CommandsWindowsWindow/NewWindow/CloseWindow/TileWindow/Cascade

Window/Cascade/Subwin-dows

Window/Cascade/Projects

Window/Cascade/AllWindow/Change ViewWindow/Coordinate SystemWindow/GridWindow/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame

Window/Cascade/Projects

Choose Window/Cascade/Projects to cascade all open project windows.

> To cascade project windows:• Choose Window/Cascade/Projects.

All open project windows are moved and resized to appear in a stack on the screen, simi-lar to the project windows shown below. The active project window will be located on topof the other project windows.

Window/Cascade/All

Choose Window/Cascade/All to cascade all open subwindows and project windowssimultaneously.

> To cascade all windows:• Choose Window/Cascade/All.

All open windows appears in a stack on the screen, with the active project window on topof all other project windows.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Window MenuWindow CommandsWindowsWindow/NewWindow/CloseWindow/TileWindow/CascadeWindow/Change View

Window/Change View/Zoom In

Window/Change View/Zoom Out

Window/Change View/FitAll

Window/Change View/FitSelection

Window/Change View/FitDrawing

Window/Coordinate SystemWindow/GridWindow/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame

Window/Change ViewUse the Window/Change View commands to change the field of view in the active sub-window — that is, the part of the modeling region which appears in that window. The viewfor each subwindow can be set independently.

The Window/Change View commands are:


Choose Window/Change View/Zoom In to zoom in on a region of the active subwindow,magnifying the view.

> To magnify the view:1. Choose Window/Change View/Zoom In.2. Select a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed. Do one of the

following:• Click the left mouse button on the point.• Enter coordinates of the point using the keyboard.

3. Select the point in the diagonal corner, using either the mouse or the keyboard.

The system then expands the selected region to fill the subwindow.

Zoom In Zooms in on an area of the subwindow, magnifying the view.Zoom Out Zooms out on an area of the subwindow, shrinking the view.Fit All Changes the view to display all items in the active subwindow.

Items appear as large as possible without extending beyond thewindow.

Fit Selection Changes the view to display all items that are selected. Dependingon where they are located, unselected items may or may notappear in the window.

Fit Drawing Displays the entire drawing space.



Go Back

Contents

Index




Window/Change View/Fit All

Window/Change View/FitSelection

Window/Change View/FitDrawing



Choose Window/Change View/Zoom Out to zoom out of the field of view in the activesubwindow, shrinking the view.

> To shrink the view:1. Choose Window/Change View/Zoom Out.2. Select a point at one corner of region that is to be zoomed out. Do one of the

following:• Click the left mouse button on the point.• Enter coordinates of the point in using the keyboard.

3. Select the point in the diagonal corner, using either the mouse or the keyboard.

The system then redraws the screen, shrinking the current view to fit in the selected area.

Window/Change View/Fit All

Choose Window/Change View/Fit All to display the entire model in the active subwin-dow.

> To display the entire model:1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit All.

The view in the active subwindow expands to include all items in the model. The size ofthe window does not change.



Go Back

Contents

Index




Window/Change View/FitAll

Window/Change View/Fit Selection

Window/Change View/Fit Drawing


Window/Change View/Fit Selection

Choose Window/Change View/Fit Selection to display all selected items in the activesubwindow. This command allows you to see all selected items at the same time.

> To display the selected items:1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit Selection.

The view in the active subwindow expands to include all items in the model that havebeen selected by clicking or by one of the commands on the Edit/Select menu. Depend-ing on their location, unselected items may also display in the window.

Window/Change View/Fit Drawing

Choose Window/Change View/Fit Drawing to display the entire drawing space in theactive subwindow. The drawing space is the area in which objects may be drawn and afield solution computed for a model.

> To display the drawing in a subwindow:1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit Drawing.

The field of view in the active subwindow changes to display the entire drawing space.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Window MenuWindow CommandsWindowsWindow/NewWindow/CloseWindow/TileWindow/CascadeWindow/Change ViewWindow/Coordinate Sys-tem

Window/Coordinate Sys-tem/Shift

Window/Coordinate Sys-tem/Rotate

Window/Coordinate Sys-tem/Align to Edge

Window/Coordinate Sys-tem/Reset

Things to ConsiderWindow/GridWindow/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame

Window/Coordinate SystemUse the Window/Coordinate System commands to shift, rotate, or reset the coordinatesystem in the active subwindow (the local coordinate system). The local coordinate sys-tem can be rotated, shifted, and reset independently in each subwindow.

The Window/Coordinate System commands are:

Window/Coordinate System/Shift

Choose Window/Coordinate System/Shift to change the location of the origin of thelocal coordinate system in the active subwindow.

> To shift the origin of the coordinate system in a subwindow:1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.2. Choose Window/Coordinate System/Shift.3. Move the mouse to the new origin of the local coordinate system and click the left

mouse button. (Alternatively, enter the point from the keyboard.) The defaultcoordinates of this point are the coordinates of the point at the center of theselected items.

The origin of the local coordinate system moves to the new location.

Shift Shifts the origin of the local coordinate system.Rotate Rotates the local coordinate system.Align to Edge Aligns the local coordinate system to the edge of an object.Reset Resets the local coordinate system, realigning it with the global axes,

and moving the origin to its default location.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Window/Coordinate System/Rotate

Choose Window/Coordinate System/Rotate to rotate the coordinate system in theactive subwindow. This command is useful when drawing parts of a structure’s geometrythat lie at an angle from the rest of the geometry.

> To rotate the local coordinate system:1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.2. Choose Window/Coordinate System/Rotate.3. Specify the angle of rotation. Do one of the following:

• To rotate the local coordinate system to a specific angle, enter the angle (indegrees) in the Angle field on the status bar.

• To enter the rotation angle using an anchor point for the local coordinate system:a. Choose the point about which the coordinate system is to be rotated.b. Choose the point marking the angle at which the coordinate system is to be

rotated.

The coordinate system rotates by the desired angle.

For example, if you picked points that produced a rotation angle of 45°, the coordinatesystem in the active subwindow would look like the one shown below:

The rotation angle is always taken from the global x-axis — successive rotations are notcumulative. To return the coordinate system to its default orientation (aligned with the glo-bal x- and y-axes), choose Window/Coordinate System/Reset.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge

Choose Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge to base the local coordinate systemon the specified edge of an object.

> To align the local coordinate system with the edge of an object:1. Choose Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge. New fields appear below

the status bar.2. Select the edge on which to base the new local coordinate system. The point at

which you select the edge is defined as the new origin.

The new local coordinate system is aligned to the selected edge.

Choose Windows/Coordinate System/Reset to revert to the default alignment and ori-gin.

Window/Coordinate System/Reset

Choose Window/Coordinate System/Reset to reset the local coordinate system in theactive subwindow to its default alignment and origin. The default local coordinate systemis aligned with the global x- and y-axes and is centered at the origin (x=0, y=0).

In effect, this command returns the local uv-coordinate system to its original alignmentwith the global coordinate system, canceling the effects of the Window/Coordinate Sys-tem/Rotate and Window/Coordinate System/Shift commands.

> To reset the local coordinate system:• Choose Window/Coordinate System/Reset.

The coordinate system is then realigned with the global x- and y-axes and centered at theorigin.



Go Back

Contents

Index







Things to Consider

To modify the default orientation and origin of the coordinate system in new subwindows,use Model/Defaults/Window Settings in conjunction with the Window/Coordinate Sys-tem commands.

> To change the orientation and origin of the coordinate system in a new subwindow:1. Set up the desired local coordinate system in a subwindow.

• Use the Window/Coordinate System/Shift command to move the origin of thelocal coordinate system.

• Use the Window/Coordinate System/Rotate command to rotate the localcoordinate system.

• Use the Window/Coordinate System/Reset command to reset the localcoordinate system with the default global coordinate system.

2. Choose Model/Defaults/Window Settings to make the local coordinate system inthe subwindow the default.

The local coordinate system in all new subwindows uses the origin and orientation of theone in this subwindow.



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Window MenuWindow CommandsWindowsWindow/NewWindow/CloseWindow/TileWindow/CascadeWindow/Change ViewWindow/Coordinate SystemWindow/Grid

Default Grid SettingsInappropriate Grid SpacingInvisible Grid Points

Window/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame

Window/GridUse Window/Grid to:

• Specify whether a polar (radial) grid or a cartesian (rectangular) grid is displayed in theactive subwindow.

• Specify the number of polar or cartesian grid divisions.• Toggle between a visible and invisible grid.• Display a grid key — a set of axes identifying the direction of the local coordinate

system.

These parameters apply to the grid that is associated with the local coordinate system inthe active subwindow.

> To change the grid settings:1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.2. Choose Window/Grid. The following window appears:



Go Back

Contents

More

Index


Default Grid SettingsInappropriate Grid SpacingInvisible Grid Points

Window/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame

3. Select the type of grid:

The grids are shown below:

4. Enter the desired spacing beneath the grid you selected. Grid spacing is entered inthe model’s drawing units.• If you selected Cartesian, enter the horizontal spacing under dU and the vertical

spacing under dV.• If you selected Polar, enter the radial spacing under dR, and the angular spacing

(in degrees) under dTheta.5. To reset the cartesian and radial grid spacings to their default values, choose

Suggested Spacing. When you select this command, the software calculates the

Cartesian Displays a cartesian grid in the active subwindow, similar to the one shownon the left, below. The cartesian grid is centered at the origin of the localcoordinate system (u=0, v=0). Points on the grid are divided by their localu- and v-coordinates (not their global x- and y-coordinates).

Polar Displays a polar grid in the active subwindow, similar to the one shown inon the right, below. Like the cartesian grid, the polar grid is centered at theorigin of the local coordinate system (r=0, θ=0). Points on the grid aredefined by their r (radius from the local origin) and €€θ (angle from the local r-axis) coordinates.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Default Grid SettingsInappropriate Grid Spac-ing

Invisible Grid PointsWindow/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame

dU and dV (for cartesian grids) or dR and DTheta (for polar grids) that areappropriate for the current view.

6. To toggle between a visible and invisible grid, choose Grid Visible. The default isa visible grid.

7. To toggle between a visible and invisible grid key, choose display key. The key isa set of axes showing the orientation of the local coordinate system’s u- and v-axes. The default is a visible grid key. Note that the key can be displayed for bothcartesian and polar grids.


The grid in the active subwindow appears with the new grid settings.

Note: > To save the grid settings:1. Choose Model/Defaults/Window Settings. A window appears

displaying the current window settings.2. Choose OK. The grid settings are now saved and will be available

the next time you access the 2D Modeler.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Default Grid SettingsInappropriate Grid Spac-ing

Invisible Grid PointsWindow/Fill SolidsWindow/ToolbarWindow/Wire Frame

Default Grid Settings

To change the default grid settings for new subwindows, use Model/Defaults/WindowSettings in conjunction with the Window/Grid commands.

> To change the default grid settings:1. Use Window/Grid to set up the desired grid settings in a subwindow.2. Use the Model/Default/Window Settings command to make the grid in the

subwindow the default.

All new subwindows will use the grid settings from this subwindow.

Inappropriate Grid Spacing

If you select a grid spacing that is too small for individual grid points to be displayed, awarning message appears.

> For this case, do the following:1. Choose OK to close the warning message window. Before you can continue, you

must reset the grid spacing.2. Do one of the following:

• Choose Suggested Spacing so that the software can calculate the values ofvalues of dU and dV or dR and dTheta that are appropriate for the current view.

• Enter larger values for dU and dV or dR and dTheta so that you can continue.

Invisible Grid Points

Occasionally, when you zoom out of the drawing, the software is unable to display gridpoints using the current grid spacing. Choose Suggested spacing to change the gridspacing so that the grid can be viewed again.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Window/Fill SolidsChoose Window/Fill Solids to display all closed objects in the active subwindow asshaded solids instead of wire frame outlines. This is usually done to make the visual rela-tionships between objects easier to see, especially for complicated models.

This command can only be accessed if the objects are currently displayed as the wireframe outlines.

> To display closed objects as shaded solids:1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.2. Choose Window/Fill Solids.

All closed objects in the active subwindow appear as solids, similar to the objects shownbelow:

Note: While the objects are displayed as shaded solids, the Window/Fill Solidscommand toggles to the Window/Wire Frame command. To display shadedobjects as wire frame outlines, choose Window/Wire Frame.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Window/ToolbarUse the Window/Toolbar commands to adjust the position of the toolbar based on thefollowing locations:

Window/Wire FrameChoose Window/Wire Frame to display all closed objects in the active subwindow aswire frame outlines instead of shaded solids.

This command can only be accessed if the objects are currently displayed as shaded sol-ids.

> To display objects as wire frame outlines:1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow.2. Choose Window/Wire Frame.

All closed objects in the active subwindow display as wire frame outlines.

Left Moves the toolbar to a vertical column to the left of the window.Right Moves the toolbar to a vertical column to the right of the window.Top Moves the toolbar to the top of the window. This is the default setting.Bottom Moves the toolbar to the bottom of the window.Hide Removes the toolbar from the active window.Show Displays any hidden toolbar.

Note: While the objects are displayed as wire frame outlines, the Window/WireFrame command toggles to the Window/Fill Solids command. To displayobjects as shaded solids, choose Window/Fill Solids.


Maxwell 2D — Help MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index



Help MenuUse the commands on the Help menu to:

• Access information about the commands available in the current module.• Access information about the current module.• Access information about the online help system and documentation.• Access the table of contents and index of the online documentation.• Learn about the hotkeys.

When you choose Help, a menu similar to the following one appears. Each menu isdependent upon its module and varies accordingly. For example, this menu is particular tothe Maxwell 2D Modeler:



Go Back

Contents

Index

Help Menu CommandsThe commands in the Help menu are:

Not all of these commands are present in all modules.

Help/About HelpUse this command to learn about how to use the features of the online documentation,such as the scroll buttons, the menu commands, and the hyperlinked commands.

> To find out information on how to use the online documentation:• Choose Help/About Help.

The information on how to use the online documentation appears.

Help/On ContextUse this command to access help on the command you have chosen.

> To access help on a particular command:1. Choose Help/On Context.2. Click on the command, icon, or portion of the screen on which you wish to access

the online documentation.

A help screen appears, displaying pertinent information on the item you have chosen.

About Help Provides help on the online help system.On Context Provides help on the commands of Maxwell 2D.On Module Provides an overview of the current module.On Maxwell 2D Accesses the first page of the online documentation.Contents Lists the table of contents for the online documentation.Index Lists the index for the online help system.Shortcuts Provides a list of hotkeys and the uses of tool bars.





Go Back

Contents

Index

Help/On ModuleUse this command to learn about the current module you are in. For example, if you are inthe modeler, this command will read Help/On 2D Modeler. Choosing this will take you tothe online documentation on the modeler. Similarly, if you are in the Material Manager, thecommand will read Help/On Material Manager. Accessing it will take you to the first pageof the documentation on the Material Manager.

> To access the documentation for the current module:• Choose Help/On Module.

Help/On Maxwell 2DUse this command to get a description of Maxwell 2D, its features, functions, and uses.This command takes you to the first page of the online documentation.

> To access the online documentation:• Choose Help/On Maxwell 2D.

The first page of the online documentation appears.

Help/ContentsUse this command to read the table of contents. The table of contents is organized bymodule in the sequence in which you are expected to use the modules.

> To access the table of contents:• Choose Help/Contents.

Help/IndexUse this command to access the index. The index lists all headings, commands, and top-ics covered in the online documentation.

> To access the index:• Choose Help/Index.

The index appears.





Go Back

Contents

Index

Help/ShortcutsUse this command to get a description of how to use hotkeys and toolbars. Hotkeys andtoolbars allow you to execute commands much faster than using the mouse to choose thecommands from the menu bar.

Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys

Hotkeys are keystrokes designed to execute commonly used viewing and exiting com-mands.

Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar

Tool bars are a list of icons that allow you to execute commonly used commands withoutthe need to pull down the menus. Each module has a different toolbar.

To execute a toolbar command, click on the icon of that command. To see an explanationof the icon command, click on the icon and hold down the left mouse button.

Hotkeys Lists and explains the hotkeys.Tool Bar Explains the uses of tool bars.




Maxwell 2D — Couple ModelTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Couple ModelIf you have generated an eddy current or thermal solution in another project, choose Cou-ple Model from the Define Model menu to perform a one-way coupling of the models bytaking the output of the solved model and importing it into the current project.

By coupling the projects, you can take the power output of a solved eddy current or ther-mal solution and use that data to further analyze the model.

> To couple a model:1. Make certain that you have a previously solved thermal or eddy current project in

an available directory.2. Choose Define Model/Couple Model. A file browser appears.3. Use the file browser to locate and select the name of the solved eddy current or

thermal project from which to perform the coupling.4. Choose OK.

The current project is now coupled with the solved one.

Couple Model


Maxwell 2D — Group ObjectsTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Group ObjectsChoose Group Objects from the Define Model menu to group together objects that havethe same or similar electrical properties. When you choose Group Objects, the followingwindow appears:

All of the objects defined as model objects in the 2D Modeler are listed in the Object listbox. When you first enter the Group Objects window, all of the buttons are disabledexcept for the Single Select and Multiple Select buttons, and the buttons under the dis-play window that allow you to change the view of the model. Once you have selected twoor more objects the other buttons become enabled.

Group ObjectsGrouping ObjectsEffects of GroupingThings to Consider



Go Back

Contents

Index

Grouping ObjectsThe Group Objects command lets you assign the same electrical properties to a group ofobjects. Once they are grouped, they are treated as a single object when assigning mate-rials and boundaries, and when computing such quantities as force, torque, inductance,capacitance, and so forth. Grouping is not strictly required and a valid model could bebuilt without using this command. Things to Consider has examples of situations wheregrouping objects is useful.

> To assign several objects to the same group:1. Select the objects that

make up the group.2. Choose Group at the

bottom of the GroupObjects menu.

3. Enter a name in the GroupName field.

4. Choose OK when you arefinished.

The name of this groupappears in the Object listing and replaces the names of the objects grouped together.

Ungrouping Objects> To ungroup objects that are currently grouped together:

1. Choose the name of the group in the Object listing.2. Choose Ungroup. The names of the objects you grouped together now appear

separately in the Object listing.



Effects of GroupingThings to Consider



Go Back

Contents

Index

Selecting Objects

To select objects to be grouped, click on either the object name in the object list or thegeometric representation of it in the drawing.

• To select a single object at a time, choose Single Select.• To select multiple objects, choose Multiple Select.

As an alternative, select the desired objects using the commands on the Select menu:

> To select a group of objects:• Choose By Area to select the desired objects by drawing a box around them. Select

the diagonal corners of the box with the left mouse button.• Choose By Name to select objects that have the same first letter or some other

characteristic of their names in common and when a field appears, asking you to enterthe item name or regular expression, enter an expression that identifies the desiredobjects (use an asterisk as a wildcard character). For example, to select all objectsthat begin with the letter c, enter c*.

• Choose All Objects to select all objects.

After you use any of these commands, the names of all of the selected objects are high-lighted, and the objects in the model also appear highlighted.

Deselecting Objects

Choose Deselect to deselect all selected objects or groups of objects.

You can also deselect an object by clicking the left mouse button on either the highlightedobject in the model or the object name in the Object listing.

Exiting Group Objects> To exit the Group Objects command:

1. Choose Exit. A window appears, asking you to save the changes before closing.2. Do one of the following:

• Choose Yes to save the changes and quit Group Objects.• Choose No to exit without saving your changes.• Choose Cancel to stay in the Group Objects window.



Effects of GroupingThings to Consider



Go Back

Contents

Index

Effects of GroupingAfter you group objects together, you can no longer individually access the objects thatmake up the group. This affects the following:

• Assigning materials.• Assigning boundaries and sources.• Setting up executive parameters, such as force, torque, capacitance, impedance, and

so forth.• Computing current distribution in magnetostatic and eddy current simulations.

Assigning Materials

When you assign materials to the objects in your model in the Material Manager, thegroup is treated as a single object. The group name replaces the names of individualobjects in the group.

Assigning Boundaries or Sources

When you assign boundaries and sources in the Boundary Manager, the group istreated as a single object. The group name replaces the names of the individual objects inthe group. Boundary conditions and sources are assigned to the entire group, not to theindividual objects that comprise it.

Setting up Executive Parameters

When you group a set of objects together this affects the computation of the followingexecutive parameters:

• Matrices• Forces• Torques

Group ObjectsGrouping ObjectsEffects of Grouping

Assigning MaterialsAssigning Boundariesor Sources

Setting up ExecutiveParameters

Computing MatricesComputing Forces andTorques

Current Distribution inGrouped Objects

Current Distribution inMagnetostatic Simula-tions

Current Distribution inEddy Current Simula-tions

Things to Consider



Go Back

Contents

Index

Computing Matrices

Conductors can be grouped together and treated as a single conductor in the computedmatrices. This is usually done if you are only interested in the electromagnetic effectsbetween groups of conductors and wish to neglect the effects between individual conduc-tors. The individual conductors in a group are not represented separately in computedmatrices. For example, suppose you create an electrostatic model of a transmission linewith six signal lines. If you do not group the lines, the system computes a 6x6 capacitancematrix during the solution. However, if you identify three groups of two signal line conduc-tors, the system computes a 3x3 matrix. The 6x6 matrix includes terms for all signal con-ductors in the line; the 3x3 matrix only includes terms for the groups of conductors.Grouping conductors also reduces the size of the matrices for complicated geometries,helping to conserve computing resources and produce simpler models. The exact groupsyou set up depend on the geometry being modeled and the level of accuracy you wish toachieve in the matrix solution.

Computing Forces and Torques

When computing forces and torques, the Maxwell 2D treats a group of objects as a single,rigidly connected object. The net force or torque on the object group is computed, not theforce or torque on the individual objects.

Current Distribution in Grouped Objects

When you group conductors, you affect current distribution in magnetostatic and eddycurrent models.

Current Distribution in Magnetostatic Simulations

The following occur in magnetostatic problems for grouped conductors:

• For a group of regular conductors, the Maxwell 2D distributes total current based onthe area of the entire group of objects.

• For a group of perfect conductors, the current is distributed on the surface of thegrouped conductors so that no field can penetrate the conductors.


Assigning MaterialsAssigning Boundaries orSources


Computing MatricesComputing Forcesand Torques


Current Distributionin Magnetostatic Sim-ulations

Current Distribution inEddy Current Simula-tions

Things to Consider



Go Back

Contents

Index

Current Distribution in Eddy Current Simulations

The AC current distribution in a group of conductors depends on which type of currentsource you assigned to the group using the Assign/Source/Solid command in theBoundary Manager.

• To specify the total current — including eddy and displacement currents — select theTotal option. The current distribution is computed during the field solutions and takesall eddy current effects into account. Assigning a total current to a group of conductorshas the same effect as assigning a parallel current source to individual conductors.

• To specify a uniform distribution of current or to define the current distribution as afunction of position, select the stranded option.

• For perfect conductors, the current is distributed on the surface of the groupedconductors so that no fields can penetrate them.

When you group objects together, the following effects result on the current flow for thesesimulations:

• Current in a DC magnetics (magnetostatic) field simulation is assumed to flow inparallel through all the objects in the group and is distributed uniformly in regularconductors. But in perfect conductors it is redistributed on the surface and takes intoaccount the effects of the magnetic fields.

• Current in an AC magnetics field solution is assumed to flow in parallel but is subjectto redistribution due to eddy current forces. This is true unless the group is declaredas stranded (stranded turns off eddy current effects) in the Boundary Manager.


Assigning MaterialsAssigning Boundaries orSources


Computing MatricesComputing Forces andTorques


Current Distribution inMagnetostatic Simula-tions

Current Distributionin Eddy Current Sim-ulations

Things to Consider



Go Back

Contents

Index

Things to ConsiderThis section includes different examples of when to use grouping.

Adjacent Conductors

Conductors that are assigned the same materialand have electrical contact with one another can begrouped together as shown to the right.

In this example, the wire strands in the conductorare not insulated and are touching each other. Elec-trically they are really one conductor and should betreated as such.

If all these objects have identical electrical proper-ties, grouping them simplifies assigning materials,boundary conditions, and sources.

Parallel Sources and Grouped Objects

Be aware that when assigning current sources in eddy current simulations, assigning aparallel AC current source to two or more individual conductors has the same effect asgrouping them.

• If all of the conductors have the same material properties, group them or assign aparallel current source to the conductors.

• If the conductors do not have the same material properties, you cannot group themand should assign a parallel current source.

Note: Even though it may be more convenient to do so, once you group a set ofconductors together, you lose the capability of analyzing the interactionbetween the conductors.

wire strands


Adjacent ConductorsParallel Sources andGrouped Objects

Objects that Appear Differ-ently in Different CrossSections

Grouping Ground Conduc-tors



Go Back

Contents

Index

Objects that Appear Differently in Different Cross Sections

Another case in which you couldgroup objects together is if oneobject separates into severalobjects at one point, as shown tothe right.

In this example, a 3D represen-tation of a conductive trace ispictured at the top. The cross-sections that lie in plane A andplane B are shown at the belowthe 3D representation.

The two objects making up thisconductor can be groupedtogether because they are actu-ally one object in the 3D struc-ture.

Plane A

Plane B

Plane A Plane B



Objects that Appear Dif-ferently in DifferentCross Sections

Grouping Ground Conduc-tors



Go Back

Contents

Index

Grouping Ground Conductors

Depending on the type of simulation being performed, you may or may not need to groupmultiple ground conductors in a model.

• In eddy current problems, multiplegrounds should be grouped together.For example, in the model shown tothe right, the two ground conductors,g1 and g2, must be grouped together.The grouped grounds are treated asone ground, for which the currentdistribution is automaticallydetermined.

• In magnetostatic problems, it is not necessary to group all grounds together becausethe current density is assumed to be uniform.

c1 c2

g1

g2



Objects that Appear Differ-ently in Different CrossSections

Grouping Ground Con-ductors


Maxwell 2D — Setup MaterialsTopics:

Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Material ManagerSelect Setup Materials to do the following:

• Specify the material attributes for objects by assigning materials from the globaldatabase to them.

• Create new materials and add them to the local database. You can define newmaterials, or derive them from existing materials.

When you choose Setup Materials, the following window appears:

The names of all objects and groups of objects appear in the list box on the left side of theMaterial Manager window. The materials in the material database are listed in the lowerleft corner of the window. The model’s geometry is displayed on the right side of the win-dow. Functions for changing the view into the problem region — Zoom In, Zoom Out, FitAll, Fit Drawing, Fill Solids, and Window — appear below it.

Fields showing the attributes of the currently selected (highlighted) material appear in the

Material ManagerModifying the Material SetupAccessing the Material Man-ager from the Control Panel

Assigning MaterialsMaterial DatabaseView WindowAdding Materials to theDatabase

Assigning Materials toObjects

Selecting Several Objects atOnce

Deselecting ObjectsMaterials with Vector, Aniso-tropic, or Functional Proper-ties

Excluded ObjectsChanging Material AttributesDeleting Materials



Go Back

Contents

Index

Material Attributes box beneath the geometric model display. These fields changedepending on which field solver you’ve selected for the problem. (For instance, the fieldsConductivity and Imag. Permeability appear if Eddy Current is being used as thesolver type.) These fields also change when you select or define a non-linear or an aniso-tropic material.

Note: If you are assigning materials to an electrostatic or AC conduction model, thefollowing message appears:

All materials with a conductivity greater than 1000 siemens/meterwill be treated as perfect conductors.

These field simulators assume that the potential is constant inside theseobjects — essentially treating them as perfect conductors. No fields will becomputed inside these objects.

If you are assigning materials to a DC conduction model, the following mes-sage appears:

Note: Perfect insulators are automatically EXCLUDED since there isno current flow in them.

Because the conductivity of these materials is zero, no conduction currentcan flow in them. Therefore, the simulator does not compute fields insidethese objects.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Modifying the Material SetupIf you choose Setup Materials after generating a solution, the following messageappears:

If you make changes to the material assignments and save thosechanges, all solution data will be deleted and will have to berecomputed. Pick “View Only” if no changes are to be saved,“Modify” if changes are to be saved or “Cancel” to cancel thisoperation.

> If you get this message, do one of the following:• Choose View Only to access the Material Manager in view-only mode. You can view

(but not change) all material assignments.• Choose Modify to change the existing material assignments. If you modify and save

any material assignments, you must re-solve the problem. All solution data aredeleted.

• Choose Cancel to abort the command and return to the Executive Commands menu.

Material ManagerModifying the MaterialSetup

Accessing the Material Man-ager from the Control Panel








Go Back

Contents

Index

Accessing the Material Manager from the Control PanelThe Material Manager can also be accessed from the Maxwell Control Panel. Doing soenables you to:

• Add new materials to a central, "global" database of materials. These materials arethen available for all Maxwell 2D problems.

• Delete materials from the global database.• Change the properties of existing materials in the global database — including the

predefined materials in the database that’s shipped with the Maxwell 2D software. Theproperties of any material can be modified if the material is not currently being used ina model.

> To access the Material Manager from the Maxwell Control Panel:1. Choose Utilities. A second control panel button bar appears.2. Choose Materials.

The Material Manager appears.

Note: Although you can define and modify the materials available to all models,you cannot assign materials to objects in an individual model if you’veaccessed the Material Manager from the Control Panel.

Material ManagerModifying the Material SetupAccessing the MaterialManager from the ControlPanel








Go Back

Contents

Index

Assigning MaterialsAll objects in the model must be assigned a material. When you assign a material to anobject, the properties associated with the material — such as relative permeability, rela-tive permittivity, conductivity, and so forth — are automatically assigned to the object.

Only one object, background, is assigned a default material (vacuum). The backgroundrepresents the space surrounding the model — that is, the area in your model that is notcontained within any closed geometric objects.

To set up a valid model in Maxwell 2D, you must assign a material to all other “unas-signed” objects in the model.

Assigning materials is a two-step process.

1. If they are not already included in the material database, define materials for allobjects in the model.

2. Assign a database material to each object in the model.

For example, to assign polyamide as the material for the object substrate, add polyamideto the material database, then assign the material polyamide to the object substrate.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Material DatabaseThe material database consists of a group of predefined materials that may be assignedto individual objects in a model.

Global Material Database

The global material database is the primary material database used throughout all Max-well software. Materials from the global database can only be deleted or modified fromthe Maxwell Control Panel, not from Materials Manager. These are listed as Externalmaterials in the materials list displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.

Local Material Database

The local material database is a copy of the global material database supplied with Max-well 2D. You can add new materials to a project’s local database. Materials added to alocal database can be deleted or modified. However, they cannot be accessed by otherprojects and are flagged as Local materials in the display list. Any Local or Externalmaterial in a project’s material database may be assigned to objects in its model.

Inheritance

New materials can be “derived” from any existing material in the database, allowing you tocreate a family of materials that share, or inherit, several characteristics of the base mate-rial. You can then modify the characteristics of the derived materials as necessary.

One advantage to deriving materials is that you can change the common characteristicsof all materials in the family simply by changing the characteristics of the base material. Inaddition, it makes accessing material data faster and helps to eliminate redundancies inrelated materials.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Functional and Vector Material Properties

The properties of some materials vary in magnitude according to the position inside anobject. For instance, conductivity and relative permeability could vary if there is a densitygradient across the object. Other material properties vary in direction according to theposition inside an object. For instance, the magnetization vector of some permanent mag-nets varies in direction at different points inside the magnet. Such material propertiesmust be defined as functions.

In addition, functional material properties can be used to define a material propertyaccording to a math function. If you have purchased parametric analysis capability, mate-rial properties that are to be varied during a parametric sweep must be identified as func-tions.









Go Back

Contents

Index

View WindowThe view window allows you to see the various objects in the model as you assign materi-als to them.

Changing the View of the Geometric Model

Once the model appears on the screen, use the commands that appear beneath the win-dow to change your view of it.

Zoom In> To zoom in on a section of the geometric model:

1. Choose Zoom In.2. Click the left mouse button on a point at one corner of the region to be zoomed

in on.3. Click the left mouse button on the point in the diagonal corner of the desired

region.The system then expands the portion of the structure in the selected region to fillthe view window. This command works in the same way as the 2D ModelerWindow/Change View/Zoom In command.

Zoom Out> To zoom out of a section of the geometric model:

1. Choose Zoom Out.2. Click the left mouse button on a point at one corner of the region that is to be

zoomed out.3. Click the left mouse button on a point in the diagonal corner of the desired

region.The system then redraws the screen and shrinks the model to fit in the selectedregion. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler’s Window/Change View/Zoom Out command.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Fit All

Choose Fit All to view the entire geometric model in the display area. The Maxwell 2Dautomatically adjusts the field of view, making all objects as large as possible while keep-ing the entire structure visible. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler’sWindow/Change View/Fit All command.

Fit Drawing

Choose Fit Drawing to display the entire drawing region. The drawing region is definedusing the command Model/Drawing Size. This command works in the same way as the2D Modeler’s Window/Change View/Fit Drawing command.

Fill Solids

Choose Fill Solids to display closed geometric objects as filled-in solids. By default, onlythe outlines of object borders are displayed. Choosing Fill Solids for complex geometriesallows you to better visualize the relationships between each object in the model.

Wire Frame

After you choose Fill Solids, its button toggles to Wire Frame. Choose Wire Frame toswitch back to a wire frame view of the geometric model.

The Fill Solids and Wire Frame commands work in the same way as the 2D Modeler’sWindow/Change View/Fill Solids and Window/Change View/Wire Frame commands.

Window Commands

The Material Manager’s Window commands do the following:

Measure Displays the distance between two selected points.Grid Defines the grid settings in the viewing window.SnapTo Mode Toggles the snap mode on and off for grids and vertices.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Window/Measure

Choose this command to measure the distances between two points.

> To measure the distances:1. Choose Window/Measure. The cursor changes to crosshairs.2. Select the first point from which to measure.3. Select the second point. The Measurement window appears, listing the selected

points, offset, distance, and relative angle.4. Choose OK to close the window.5. Click the right mouse button to exit the command.

Window/Grid

Choose this command to define the grid settings for the viewing window.

> To define the grid settings:1. Choose Window/Grid. The Grid Settings window appears.2. Select Cartesian or Polar and enter the spacing values for dU and dV or dR and

dTheta.3. Optionally, choose Suggested Spacing to use the default grid values if they have

been modified.4. Toggle Grid Visible to select whether the grid is visible in the viewing window. The

grid is visible by default.5. Toggle Draw Key to select whether the coordinate arrows (or “draw key”) are

visible. The draw key is visible by default.6. Choose OK to accept the grid settings or Cancel to cancel the grid changes.

Window/SnapTo Mode

Choose this command to define the snap settings.

> To define the snap settings:1. Choose Window/SnapTo Mode. The SnapTo Mode window appears.2. Toggle Snap to grid on or off to set the snaps on or off the grid lines.3. Toggle Snap to vertex on or off to set the snaps on or off the vertices.4. Choose OK to accept the snap settings or Cancel to cancel the changes.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Adding Materials to the DatabaseSome materials you will wish to use in the model may not exist in the material database.You can add any material by it them and assigning it the necessary properties.

Deriving New Materials> If a material you want to use is not in the project’s material database, add it as follows:

1. Do one of the following:• To create a new material, choose Material/Add.• To create a material whose characteristics are derived from an existing material:

a. Select a material in the Materials list box.b. Choose Material/Derive.

2. Enter a new name for the material.

3. If appropriate, select one of the following material types:

4. Enter the material’s properties in the Material Attributes fields.• For perfect conductors, the material’s conductivity is automatically set to infinity.

This material properties can be changed in perfect conductors.• For anisotropic materials, specify the major diagonals of the material’s anisotropy

tensors as described under Anisotropic Materials.• For nonlinear materials, a button labeled BH Curve replaces the Rel.

Permeability field. You must define a BH-curve to specify the relativepermeability.

• For permanent magnets, you must specify a non-zero value for the coercivity orthe retentivity.

5. After all material characteristics have been set, choose Enter. The new materialnow appears in the Materials list box and can be assigned to objects.

Note: The stem word Material is reserved for use as the default name of new mate-rials. It cannot be assigned as a material name.

Perfect Conductor A perfectly conducting material.Anisotropic Material A material whose properties vary with direction.Nonlinear Material (Magnetostatic.) A material with a nonlinear relative perme-

ability, which must be specified using a BH curve.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Assigning Materials to ObjectsOnce any new materials have been added to the project’s material database, they can beassigned to the objects in the model.

> To assign materials to objects:1. Select the objects to be assigned a material. Do one of the following:

• Select the name of an object from the Objects list box displayed on the left side ofthe screen.

• Click the left mouse button on an object in the display window. Both the object andits name are highlighted.

• Select multiple objects.

2. Highlight the name of the material to assign to the object. Its characteristics aredisplayed in the Material Attributes box at the bottom of the Material Managerwindow.

3. With both the desired object name(s) and material name highlighted, chooseAssign.

4. If a material with vector, anisotropic or functional properties is assigned to anobject, a window appears. Specify the tensor or function orientation or vectordirection. The default orientation for the material aligns it with the x-axis of theglobal coordinate system.

Repeat this procedure to assign a material to every object in the model. The Maxwell 2Dwill not allow you to continue setting up your model until all objects have been assignedmaterials.

Note: When assigning materials, you cannot individually select an object from agroup.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Selecting Several Objects at OnceIf more than one object is made of a particular material, select several objects at onceusing one of the following methods:

> Use the mouse to select several objects as follows:1. Choose Multiple Select.2. Click the left mouse button on each object or object name.

Each selected item is highlighted.

> Use the Select commands as follows:1. Choose Select. A menu of selection commands appear.2. Do one of the following:

• Choose By Area to select objects in a rectangular region. Select the diagonalcorners of the region with the left mouse button.

• Choose By Name to select objects that have the same first letter or some othercharacteristic of their names in common. The following field appears:

Enter name/regular expression

Using asterisks as a wildcard characters, enter an expression that identifies thedesired objects. For example, to select all objects that begin with the letter c, enterc*.

• Choose All Objects to select all objects.

The names of all selected objects are highlighted.

Deselecting ObjectsAny selected object can be deselected.

> To deselect selected objects, do one of the following:• To deselect a selected object or group of objects, click on the object or group’s name

in the list.• To deselect all selected objects and groups, choose Deselect.

The objects are deselected and their names are no longer highlighted.




Selecting Several Objectsat Once





Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional PropertiesThe properties of some materials vary in magnitude according to the position inside anobject. For instance, conductivity and relative permeability could vary if there is a densitygradient across the object. Other material properties vary in direction according to theposition inside an object. For instance, the magnetization vector of some permanent mag-nets varies in direction at different points inside the magnet. Such material propertiesmust be defined as functions.

In addition, functional material properties can be used to define a material propertyaccording to a mathematical expression. If you have purchased parametric analysis capa-bility, material properties that are to be varied during a parametric sweep must be identi-fied as functions.

When you assign a material with vector, anisotropic, or functional properties to an object,the Assignment Coord. Sys. window appears:

• For functional properties, specify the material’s orientation relative to the object’s localcoordinate system or the object’s orientation.

• For vector properties such as magnetization and polarization, define the vector’sdirection. (The fields for specifying an origin do not appear if the vector property has aconstant magnitude and direction.)





Deselecting ObjectsMaterials with Vector, Ani-sotropic, or FunctionalProperties




Go Back

Contents

More

Index

A local coordinate system, which is associated with each object, is used to evaluate mate-rial properties that vary in magnitude or direction according to their position. By default,the local coordinate system is aligned with the global xy-coordinate system and has itsorigin at the center of the object.

> To specify the direction of a material with vector or functional properties:1. Assign the material to the object.2. Select one of the following options:

3. Do one of the following:• For Align with a given direction, enter the Angle of the vector or function.• For Align relative to object’s orientation, define the offset angle with respect to

the object orientation in one of the following ways:a. For a fixed offset angle, enter it in the Angle field.b. For an offset angle defined by a function, select Function and then type the

Align with object’sorientation

Aligns the function or vector with the x-axis of the object’slocal coordinate system. The need for an orientation spe-cific direction arises when one desires to assign objectswith anisotropic material properties. This means that amaterial behaves differently in one direction (orthogonal)than in another.

Align with a givendirection

Aligns the function or vector at an angle to the object’slocal coordinate system. This lets you specify the directionin which an anisotropic or vector material property points,or define a functional material property that acts at anangle to the global coordinate system.

Align relative to object’sorientation

Aligns the function or vector at an angle to the object’sorientation.









Go Back

Contents

Index

name of the function that defines the angle in the Angle field.

4. If a material with functional properties is being assigned, enter the coordinates ofthe new origin for the function in the X and Y fields under Enter Function origin.By default, the origin is the center of the object.

5. Optionally, choose Functions and define any functional values to use in thecoordinate system assignment. Choose OK to accept any entered functions andclose the functions window.

6. Choose OK to assign the material or Cancel to abort the material assignment.

Note: If you name a function that has not been defined, the following error mes-sage appears when you try to exit the Assignment Coord. Sys. menu:

The function that you entered for the angle does not exist.

Use the Functions... button to enter its definition first.

> If you get this error:1. Choose Cancel to exit the menu.2. Define the function.3. Repeat the Assign command.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Object Orientation Display

When you are assigning an anisotropic or a permanently magnetized material to anobject, the Material Manager now displays the object’s primary axis with a directionalarrow as shown below. The angular value (in this case, zero degrees) appears next to thearrow’s origin:

Object orientation angular value

Object orientation arrow









Go Back

Contents

Index

Excluded ObjectsIn some cases, you must exclude objects from the model to prevent them from beinginvolved in the solution. The Maxwell 2D does not solve for the electric and magneticfields in an excluded object, making it theoretically non-existent.

For example, exclude the background when you plan to use the outside edges of objectsas the outside boundaries of the model. This would be done in cases where you want totake advantage of symmetry and model only one-half of a symmetrical structure. Onerequirement for this is that the object edges that will be matching boundaries must lie atthe outside edges of the model. However, for matching boundaries to work properly, theboundaries cannot lie on the outside edges of the problem space (the bounding box).Excluding the background makes object edges outside boundaries, allowing you todefine them as matching boundaries.

Excluding Objects

Above the Object list box is a set of buttons that toggles between Include and Exclude.Choose these buttons to include or exclude the selected objects from the model.

> To exclude an object:1. Select the desired object.2. Choose Exclude.

The selected objects are excluded from the model.

Including Objects> To include a previously excluded object:

1. Select the desired object.2. Choose Include.

The selected objects are included in the model and will be involved in the solution.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Automatically Excluded Objects (DC Conduction)

Objects that are assigned perfectly insulating materials — those whose conductivities arevery tiny or are equal to zero — are automatically excluded from DC conduction solutions.Because no conduction currents can flow in these materials, no solution is computed forobjects that are assigned a perfectly insulating material. Such objects cannot be includedin the solution unless you assign a material with a non-zero conductivity to them.

To obtain a field solution inside a perfect insulator, use the electrostatic field solver.

Note: Because the background object is initially assigned the material propertiesof vacuum, it is automatically excluded from the model unless you assign amaterial with a non-zero conductivity to it.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Changing Material AttributesOften, you will need to modify the attributes of a material to make it appropriate for themodel.

> To change the attributes associated with a material in the project’s local materialdatabase:1. Select the appropriate Local material in the Material list box. The attributes of the

selected material appear in the Material Attributes box.

2. Optionally, change the type of material as described in the Adding Materials to theDatabase section.

3. Modify the appropriate material characteristics. Refer to Material Attributes for adescription of material attributes.• If the material is anisotropic, see Anisotropic Materials for instructions on changing

the material’s attributes.

• If the material is nonlinear, see Nonlinear Materials for instructions on how tomodify its BH-curve.

• If the material has functional properties, see Functional Material Properties forinstructions on how to modify functions and change whether the materialproperties are functional or not.

4. To delete the changes and revert back to the material’s original properties, chooseRevert.

5. Choose Enter to save the new characteristics for the selected material.

Note: You cannot modify the properties of materials in the global database. Thesematerials are labeled as External (lock) in the Material list box.






Excluded ObjectsChanging MaterialAttributes

Deleting Materials



Go Back

Contents

Index

Deleting MaterialsYou can delete any derived material from the local material database.

> To delete a material from the local material database:1. Select the Local material you wish to delete.2. Choose Materials. A menu appears.3. Choose Clear.

The material is deleted.

Deleting Derived Materials

If you delete a material, any materials that have been derived from it will be listed asUnderived in the Material Attributes box. They will, however, retain the common charac-teristics of the deleted material.

Underiving and Rederiving Materials

Any derived materials can be underived and modified.

> To underive a material:1. Select the derived material from the materials list.2. Choose Material/Underive. The material characteristics fields below the view

window become active.3. Enter any new values in the material characteristics fields.4. Do one of the following:

• Choose Enter to accept the new derived material characteristics.

• Choose Revert to ignore any changes to the derived material.

Warning: You cannot delete materials from the external material database if you areaccessing the Material Manager from Maxwell 2D. However, you can deletematerials in the external database if you access the Material Manager fromthe Maxwell Control Panel.









Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Material AttributesUse the following fields to describe the electromagnetic properties of a linear, isotropicmaterial. Although all of the properties listed below apply to a material, the specific prop-erties that appear in the Material Manager window depend on which field solver anddrawing type were selected for a model. The solvers and model types that require a par-ticular material property to be specified are listed under that material property.

Relative PermittivityElectrostatic, Eddy Current, AC Conduction, Eddy Axial

Enter the relative permittivity (the dielectric constant) of a material, εr, in the Rel. Permit-tivity(Eps) field.

The relative permittivity is a dimensionless number.

Relative PermeabilityMagnetostatic, Eddy Current, Eddy Axial

Enter the relative permeability of a material, µr, in the field Rel. Permeability (Mu).

The relative permeability is a dimensionless number.

ConductivityElectrostatic, Eddy Current, DC Conduction, AC Conduction, Eddy Axial

Enter the conductivity of a material, σ, in the Conductivity field. Conductivity is entered insiemens/meter.

Depending on which field solver you selected for the model, objects are treated differentlybased on their conductivity.

• Perfectly insulating materials (materials whose conductivity is zero) will automaticallybe excluded from DC conduction field solutions. No conduction currents can flow in

Note: Only two material properties at a time may be specified for electrostatic andmagnetostatic models. The other properties are computed from these cus-tomizable properties. Use the Options command to identify which two prop-erties may be entered.

Material AttributesRelative PermittivityRelative PermeabilityConductivityImaginary PermeabilityThermal ConductivityMagnetic CoercivityMagnetic RetentivityMagnetizationElectric CoercivityElectric RetentivityPolarization


Entering Anisotropic Mate-rial Property Values

Electrostatic, AC Conduc-tion, and Eddy Axial Solv-ers

Magnetostatic and EddyCurrent Solvers



Go Back

Contents

Index

these materials.• All materials whose conductivity is above 10,000 siemens/meter will be treated as

perfect conductors in electrostatic and AC conduction solutions.

No field solution will be computed inside objects that are assigned these materials.

Imaginary Permeability

Eddy Current, Eddy Axial

Some materials exhibit a permeability that includes both a real and imaginary component.The imaginary component is used to model magnetic losses in a time-varying field, usingthe relationship:

where:

• is the real component of the relative permeability.• is the imaginary component of the relative permeability.

Enter the imaginary relative permeability of a material, , in the field Imag. Permeabil-ity. The default imaginary permeability of zero is that of a material that exhibits no mag-netic loss in a time-varying field.

Thermal Conductivity

Thermal

All materials have an inherent thermal conductivity which determines how much heat canpass through the material in watts per meters-Kelvin. Thermal conductivity is given by:

Where K is the thermal conductivity, T is the temperature, and q is the heat source.

In derived materials, the thermal conductivity can be made into a functional value.

Warning: Electrostatic or AC conduction field solutions may fail to converge if materialswith relatively low conductivities are used as charge or voltage sources in amodel.

B µ′( j µ″r( )– )µoH=

µ′ rµ″ r

µ″ r

K T∇∇ q=








Go Back

Contents

Index

Magnetic CoercivityMagnetostatic

Enter the value of a material’s magnetic coercivity, Hc, in the Magnetic Coercivity field. Ina linear, permanently magnetized material, the magnetic coercivity is equal to the value ofH needed to reduce B to zero:

This relationship is shown graphically in the figure below.

Magnetic coercivity is entered in amperes per meter. The default coercivity, zero, is that ofa material that is not permanently magnetized. To define a linear permanent magnet,enter a non-zero value for Hc.

B µoµr H Hc+( )=

MagnetostaticB

HHc

MagneticCoercivity

BrMagnetic

Remanence Permeability µBr

Hc------=








Go Back

Contents

Index

Magnetic RetentivityMagnetostatic

Enter the value of a material’s magnetic retentivity (or remanence), Br, in the MagneticRetentivity field. The magnetic retentivity gives the level of permanent magnetization in amaterial. In physical terms, it is equal to the magnetic flux density, B, that remains in amaterial when the magnetic field, H, drops to zero — as shown below.

Magnetic retentivity is entered in teslas. The default retentivity, zero, is that of a materialthat is not permanently magnetized. To define a linear permanent magnet, enter a non-zero value for Br.

MagnetostaticB

HHc

MagneticCoercivity

BrMagnetic

Remanence Permeability µBr

Hc------=








Go Back

Contents

Index

MagnetizationMagnetostatic

Enter the value of a material’s magnetization, Mp, in the Magnetization field. The magne-tization is a vector representing the magnetic moment per unit volume of the material. It isrelated to the magnetic field and magnetic flux density by:

Magnetization is entered in amperes/meter.

To define a permanently magnetized material, enter a non-zero value for Mp. The direc-tion of the magnetization vector is specified when you assign the material to the object.Enter the angle of the magnetization vector from the global x-axis in the Angle field.

To define a material whose magnetization varies in direction, use the Options commandto identify magnetization as a Vector Function. Then, use the Vector Fn button (whichappears next to Magnetization) to select which type of magnetization vector is defined.

B µo µrH M p+( )=








Go Back

Contents

Index

Electric CoercivityElectrostatic (XY only)

Enter the value of a material’s electric coercivity, Ec, in the Elec. Coercivity field. In mate-rials that are permanently polarized, the electric coercivity gives the value of E needed toreduce D to zero — as shown on below. (This is analogous to the magnetic coercivity, Hc,in a permanently magnetized material.) The default of zero is that of a material that is notpermanently polarized.

Electric coercivity is entered in volts per meter.

D

EEc

ElectricCoercivity

DrElectric

Retentivity

Electrostatic

Permittivity εDr

Ec------=








Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Electric Retentivity

Electrostatic (XY only)

Enter the value of a material’s electric retentivity, Dr, in the Elec. Retentivity field. Inmaterials that are permanently polarized, the electric retentivity is equal to the electric fluxdensity, D, that remains in a material when the electric field, E, drops to zero — as shownbelow. (This is analogous to the magnetic retentivity, Br, in a permanently magnetizedmaterial.) The default zero is that of a material that is not permanently polarized.

Electric retentivity is entered in coulombs per square meter.

PolarizationElectrostatic (XY only)

Enter the value of a material’s polarization, Pp, in the Polarization field. Polarization is avector quantity specifying the permanent dipole moment per unit volume of a dielectricmaterial. A permanently polarized material maintains electric flux due to the orientation ofthe microscopic dipoles in the material. The relationship between D and E in these mate-rials is given by:

Polarization is entered in coulombs per square meter.

To define a permanently polarized material, enter a non-zero value for Pp. The direction ofthe polarization vector is specified when you assign the material to the object. Enter the

D

EEc

ElectricCoercivity

DrElectric

Retentivity

Electrostatic

Permittivity εDr

Ec------=

D εrεoE Pp+=








Go Back

Contents

Index

angle of the vector from the global x-axis in the Angle field.

To define a material whose polarization varies in direction, use the Options command toidentify polarization as a Vector Function. Then, use the Vector Fn button (whichappears next to Polarization) to select which type of polarization vector is defined.

Radial Vector Functions

A radial vector is defined to always point radially outward from a center point. Use it todefine material properties like radial magnetization in a motor’s permanent magnets.Radial vectors are defined in the general form:

where:

You specify the magnitude and center point. Maxwell 2D then uses these quantities todefine the radial vector. Its orientation with the model’s coordinate system is defined whenyou assign the material to an object.

M Mxi My j+=

My My

x2

y2

+---------------------=

Mx Mx

x2

y2

+---------------------=








Go Back

Contents

Index

Tangential Vector Functions

A tangential vector is defined to point tangentially from a center point. In effect, it’s the tan-gent of a radial vector. Use it to define material properties that are always tangential to anobject’s surface. Tangential vectors are defined in the general form:

where:

You specify the magnitude and center point. Maxwell 2D then uses these quantities todefine the tangential vector. Its orientation with the model’s coordinate system is definedwhen you assign the material to an object.

M Mxi My j+=

My Mx

x2

y2

+---------------------=

Mx My–

x2

y2

+---------------------=








Go Back

Contents

Index

Perfect ConductorsAll solvers

Choose Perfect Conductor to define a perfectly conducting material — that is, a materialwith infinite conductivity. No field solution is performed inside a perfect conductor. Instead,the Maxwell 2D treats the conductor as follows:

• In magnetostatic, eddy current, and eddy axial, all currents in perfect conductors aresurface currents — modeling the behavior of current at very high frequencies wherethe skin depth approaches zero. The magnetic field cannot penetrate the conductor,and no eddy currents are induced inside it.

• In electrostatic and AC conduction, all materials with a conductivity above 10,000siemens/meter are treated as being perfect conductors. (For all practical purposes,these the solvers treat these materials as having an “infinite” conductivity.) All chargeis distributed on the surface of an object in such as way as to cancel out the electricfield inside the object.

• In DC conduction and AC conduction, voltage is assumed to be constant across thesurface of a perfect conductor. Perfect conductors are excluded from the problemregion, so no voltages or fields will be shown when post processing the solutions.

Note: If Perfect Conductor is selected, no functional material properties may bedefined. The Options button is grayed out to indicate this.

Conductivity is always presented in siemens/meter.








Go Back

Contents

Index

Anisotropic MaterialsAll solvers

Some materials exhibit characteristics that vary with direction and need to be defined bydefining their anisotropy tensors. Choose Anisotropic Material to define a material withanisotropic properties. As illustrated below, the values of two tensor diagonals and anangle need to be defined in order to define the tensor:

• diag1, the value of the material property tensor along one axis.• diag2, the value of the material property tensor along an axis orthogonal to the first.• θ, the angle separating the diag1 and x axes.

In some cases, another diagonal, diag3, must be defined.

Anisotropic materials may be defined for all cartesian (XY) models and axisymmetric (RZ)eddy current models.

diag1 = material property in the first directiondiag2 = material property in the second directionθ = angle between x-axis and first direction

θ

diag1

diag2

y

x








Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values

The software selects the properties that need to be defined for your problem, based uponthe types of solutions that you have requested. Those properties that require definitionare displayed to the right of Material Attributes, below the model display. The labels ofthose properties that do not apply to your problem are grayed out, indicating that their def-inition input is disabled.

Since you will be building the anisotropic properties tensor definition for your material,entry fields for the values of the tensor diagonals appear below the list of applicable prop-erties. There is also an entry field for a property called Yaw, which is the angle (θ)between the x-axis and the first diagonal.

> The general procedure for defining the diagonal values is the following:1. Select the property (Permittivity, Conductivity, Permeability, or Imag.

Permeability) that you will be defining. The units for conductivity are shown as[Siemens/Meter] to the right of the property name; the units of the other three areshown as [dimensionless].

2. If a diagonal is to be defined as a constant, enter the constant value for it in thediagonal entry field. Defaults are displayed in the entry fields and may be acceptedif appropriate.

3. If you wish to use a function instead of a constant to define a diagonal, select theOptions command at the bottom of the screen. The Tensor Options menuappears, displaying the list of tensor diagonals that apply to your problem. Bydefault, they are all set to use the entered constant for the diagonal value. Select



Entering AnisotropicMaterial Property Val-ues





Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Function under any that you to want to be defined by a math function.

4. After you select Function for a diagonal, its data entry field on the main screen willshow UNDEFINED instead of the constant value that was previously displayedthere. After you exit the Tensor Options menu, you will need to type the name ofthe function that defines it into the diagonal entry field on the Material Managermenu. If you have not yet defined the function, do so.

5. If you assign a function to a diagonal definition and later want to return to using theconstant value for it, choose Options/Constant for that diagonal and the entry








Go Back

Contents

Index

field will revert to displaying the previously entered constant.

Note: The property that a diagonal defines is determined by the kind of tensor thatis being defined. The four kinds of tensors, their diagonals, and what you willbe entering in their specific entry fields are explained in the tensor descrip-tions that follow.








Go Back

Contents

Index

Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers

The following equations describe the tensors of material properties used in the electro-static, AC conductions, and eddy axial solvers.

Anisotropic Permittivity Tensor

The permittivity tensor for an anisotropic material is described by the following:

where:

• ε1 is the relative permittivity of the material along one axis of its tensor.• ε2 is the relative permittivity along the other axis of the tensor.• θ is the angle between the ε1 and x-axes.

The relationship between E and D is then:

> To specify the relative permittivity for an anisotropic material:1. Choose Permittivity in the Material Attribute box.2. Enter the value of ε1 in the diag[1] field.3. Enter the value of ε2 in the diag[2] field.4. Enter the value of θ in the Yaw(Z) field.

If the relative permittivity is the same in all directions, use the same value for ε1, ε2, and εz.

ε[ ] θcos θsin

θsin– θcos

ε1ε0 0

0 ε2ε0

θcos θsin–

θsin θcos=

Dx

Dyε

Ex

Ey

=




Electrostatic, AC Con-duction, and EddyAxial Solvers




Go Back

Contents

Index

Anisotropic Conductivity Tensor (AC Conduction and Eddy Axial)

The conductivity tensor for an anisotropic material is described by the following:

where:

• σ1 is the relative conductivity along one axis of the material’s conductivity tensor.• σ2 is the relative conductivity along the material’s other conductivity tensor axis.• θ is the angle between the σ1 and x-axes.

The relationship between J and E will then be:

> To specify the conductivity for an anisotropic material:1. Choose Conductivity under Material Attributes.2. Enter the value of σ1 in the diag[1] field.3. Enter the value of σ2 in the diag[2] field.4. Enter the value of θ in the Yaw(Z) field.

If the conductivity is the same in all directions, use the same value for σ1 and σ2.

σ[ ] θcos θsin

θsin– θcos

σ1 0

0 σ2

θcos θsin–

θsin θcos=

Jx

Jyσ

Ex

Ey

=








Go Back

Contents

Index

Anisotropic Permeability Tensor (Eddy Axial Only)

The relationship between B and H is:

where µ3 is the relative permeability perpendicular to the plane of the material’s perme-ability tensor.

> To specify the relative permeability for an anisotropic material:1. Choose Permeability in the Material Attribute box.2. Enter the value of µ3 in the diag[3] field.

Anisotropic Imaginary Relative Permeability Tensor


where µ3 is the "imaginary relative permeability" perpendicular to the plane of the mate-rial’s permeability tensor.

> To specify the imaginary relative permeability for an anisotropic material:1. Choose Imag. Permeability.2. Enter the value of in the diag[3] field.

Bz µ3µ0Hz=

Bz µ( '3 jµ''3 )µo– Hz=

µ''3








Go Back

Contents

Index

Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers

The following equations describe the tensors of material properties used in the magneto-static and eddy current solvers.

Anisotropic Permeability Tensor

The permeability tensor for an anisotropic material is described by:

where:

• µ1 is the relative permeability along one axis of the material’s permeability tensor.• µ2 is the relative permeability along the material’s other permeability tensor axis.• θ is the angle between the µ1 and x-axes.


> To specify the relative permeability for an anisotropic material:1. Choose Permeability in the Material Attribute box.2. Enter the value of µ1 in the diag[1] field.3. Enter the value of µ2 in the diag[2] field.4. Enter the value of θ in the Yaw(Z) field.

If the relative permeability is the same in all directions, use that value for both µ1 and µ2.

µ[ ] θcos θsin

θsin– θcos

µ1µ0 0

0 µ2µ0

θcos θsin–

θsin θcos=

Bx

Byµ

Hx

Hy

=








Go Back

Contents

Index

Anisotropic Imaginary Relative Permeability Tensor (Eddy Current Only)

The "imaginary permeability" tensor for an anisotropic material is described by:

where:

• is the "imaginary relative permeability" in one direction.• is the "imaginary relative permeability" in the orthogonal direction.• θ is the angle between the and x-axis.• and are the relative real permeabilites specified earlier.

The relationship between B and H will then be:

> To specify the imaginary relative permeability for an anisotropic material:1. Choose Imag. Permeability.2. Enter the value of in the diag[1] field.3. Enter the value of in the diag[2] field.4. Enter the value of θ in the Yaw(Z) field.

If the imaginary relative permeability is the same in all directions, use the same value forboth and .

µ''[ ] θcos θsin

θsin– θcos

µ( '1 jµ''1 )µo– 0

0 µ( '2 jµ''2 )µo–

θcos θsin–

θsin θcos=

µ''1µ''2

µ''1µ'1 µ'2

Bx

Byµ

Hx

Hy

=

µ''1µ''2

µ''1 µ''2








Go Back

Contents

Index

Anisotropic Permittivity Tensor (Eddy Current Only)

The relationship between E and D is then:

where ε1 is the relative permittivity of the material perpendicular to the plane of its tensor.

> To specify the relative permittivity for an anisotropic material:1. Choose Permittivity in the Material Attribute box.2. Enter the value of ε3 in the diag[3] field.

Anisotropic Conductivity Tensor (Eddy Current Only)

The relationship between J and E will then be:

where σ3 is the relative conductivity perpendicular to the plane of the material’s conductiv-ity tensor.

> To specify the conductivity for an anisotropic material:1. Choose Conductivity under Material Attributes.2. Enter the value of σ3 in the diag[3] field.

Dz ε3ε0Ez=

Jz σ3Ez=








Go Back

Contents

Index

Nonlinear MaterialsMagnetostatic and XY Eddy Current

If a material has a permeability that varies with the flux density, a B vs. H curve (BH-curve) such as the following one is needed to describe the material’s nonlinear behavior:

In nonlinear materials, the B-field (magnetic flux density) is a function of itself:

where , the relative permeability, depends on the magnitude of the B-field at eachpoint in the material. Therefore, to model the magnetic behavior of the material, a curverelating the B-field directly to the H-field is used to describe the nonlinear relationship.

imum Maximum Intercep

Add Point

Move Point

Clear All

AXES

H

B

-1e+04

-0.5

Minimum

1e+04

2.5

Accept Cancel Round Off

Maximum

0

0

Intercep

ampere/meter

tesla

B µr B( )µoH=

µr B( )

Nonlinear MaterialsNonlinear, Functional,and Anisotropic Materials

Nonlinear and Linear Per-manent Magnets

Adding Nonlinear MatsEntering a BH-CurveDeleting a BH-CurveModifying B and H valuesfor a BH-Curve

Adding Pts to a BH-CurveImporting a BH-CurveSaving a BH-CurveAxesView Graph

Nonlinear Perm MagnetsFunctional Mat Properties

Functional Properties inRZ Solvers

OptionsDependent and Indepen-dent Mat Properties

FunctionsVector Functions



Go Back

Contents

Index

Nonlinear, Functionally Defined, and Anisotropic Materials

The software prohibits the assignment of nonlinear materials (those with BH-curves) andeither of the following in the same model:

• Materials with functionally defined permeabilities.• Anisotropic materials.

This restriction is needed because the nonlinear solver (which is executed if you assign anonlinear material) will not produce any results if the model also contains either of theother two types.

If you violate the restriction, you get an error message when you attempt to exit the Mate-rial Manager. The error message tells you that you should change the material assign-ments, asks if you wish to continue, and presents a Yes/No option that you must exercisein order to proceed.

> In this instance, do one of the following:• Choose No to remain in the Material Manager and reassign the materials.• Choose Yes to exit the Material Manager. If you exit with an uncorrected error, the

Setup Materials command box in the Executive Commands menu will not have thecheckmark that indicates a successful setup and you will not be able to execute anysolutions until you change your model’s material assignments.

Nonlinear MaterialsNonlinear, Functional,and Anisotropic Materi-als










Go Back

Contents

Index

Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets

In general, permanent magnets are nonlinear and should be modeled via a BH-curve asshown below. The magnetic coercivity, Hc, is defined as the BH-curve’s H-axis intercept,and the magnetic remanence, Br, as its B-axis intercept.

In many applications, however, the permanent magnet’s behavior can be approximatedusing a linear relationship between B and H. In these cases, there is no need to create anonlinear material. Simply enter the appropriate values of Br or Hc for the material whendefining its properties.

Linear Permanent Magnet

B

H

Br

Hc

Nonlinear Permanent Magnet

Nonlinear MaterialsNonlinear, Function, andAnisotropic Materials

Nonlinear and LinearPermanent Magnets









Go Back

Contents

Index

Adding Nonlinear Materials

You can add nonlinear materials to the local material database.

> To add a nonlinear material:1. Choose Nonlinear Material as the material type.2. Choose BH Curve, which appears next to Relative Permittivity. The following

window appears:

3. Enter a new BH-curve for the material or import an existing BH-curve.4. Choose Exit. A message appears prompting you to save changes.

• Choose Yes to save the BH-curve and return to the Material Manager.• Choose No to exit without saving the BH-curve.• Choose Cancel to remain in the BH-curve entry window.

Enter the other material properties as you would normally.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Entering a BH-Curve

Enter the points of the BH-curve to define the nonlinear material.

> To enter a BH-curve:1. Choose Add Point.2. Enter the points on the curve. Do one (or both) of the following:

• To enter points with the mouse, click the left mouse button on the desired points inthe display area. Start at B=0, which is the value of Hc, the magnetic coercivity.

• To enter points with the keyboard, enter the H and B values of each point in the Hand B fields at the bottom of the window:a. Double-click the mouse in the H field.b. Enter the H value of the point.c. Press the TAB key to move to the B field.d. Enter the B value of the point.e. Choose Enter or press Return to accept the point.

If you enter a curve whose slope is less than that of the permeability of free space,an error message appears.

3. When you finish entering the curve, double-click the mouse on the last point in thecurve. If you are using keyboard entry, choose Enter or press Return twice.

The system then draws the BH-curve according to the points you specified.

Deleting a BH-Curve

You can delete the current BH-curve for the material.

> To delete a BH-curve:• Choose Clear All.

Warning: Nonlinear materials that will be used in structures that are analyzed with theeddy current solver must have a BH-curve that passes through the origin.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve

Any value on an existing BH-curve can be modified to make it more appropriate or accu-rate for the nonlinear material.

> To modify the B and H values of the points on a BH-curve:1. Choose Move Point.2. Click the left mouse button on the desired control point on the BH-curve (the

squares marking the input points).3. Move the point to the new coordinates using the mouse, and click the left mouse

button again.4. Alternatively, enter the new H and B values of the point in the H and B fields, then

choose Enter.5. When you are finished moving points, click the right mouse button.

Adding Points to a BH-Curve

Add points to an existing curve to refine or smooth its nonlinearity.

> To add points to a BH-curve:1. Choose Add Point. The last point in the BH-curve is automatically selected.2. Specify the B and H values of additional points on the curve using the mouse or

the keyboard.3. When you finish entering the curve, double-click the mouse on the last point in the

curve. If you are using keyboard entry, choose Enter or press Return twice.

The system redraws the BH-curve, adding the new points.



Adding Nonlinear MatsEntering a BH-CurveDeleting a BH-CurveModifying B and H val-ues for a BH-Curve

Adding Pts to a BH-Curve

Importing a BH-CurveSaving a BH-CurveAxesView Graph







Go Back

Contents

Index

Importing a BH-Curve

Import existing BH-curves into a new nonlinear material to define similar nonlinear materi-als with varying attributes. This is an effective way to create a family of materials with thesame BH-curve.

> To read a BH-curve from a file:1. Choose Import. The following window appears:

2. Enter the directory path name of the BH-curve, and select the BH-curve file type(.bh format or .dat format).

3. Choose OK.

Note: BH-curves created in Maxwell 3D and earlier versions of Maxwell 2D can beimported for use in the current version of the software.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Saving a BH-Curve

Save the BH-curve to reuse it in a different material.

> To save a BH-curve to a file:1. Choose Export. The Export Data window appears:

2. Enter the directory path name of the BH-curve in the File Name field. Alternatively,use the file folder icon to locate the directory where the file is to be stored.

3. Specify the BH-curve file type (.bh format or .dat format).4. Choose OK.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Axes

Use these fields to modify how the axes for entering and displaying BH-curves are dis-played, and to select the units in which the BH-curve is entered:

Minimum Enter the minimum values to be displayed on the B- and H-axes.Maximum Enter the maximum B and H values to be displayed on the axes.Intercept View-only field showing the B and H values at the point where

the BH-curve intersects the B-axis. The H value represents thematerial’s magnetic coercivity, Hc, and the B value represents itsmagnetic retentivity, Br.

ampere/meter,oersted

Lets you select the units in which H values are entered and dis-played. Click the left mouse button on this field to display a menuof units. H values may be entered in ampere/meter (the default)or oersted.

tesla,gauss

Lets you select the units in which B values are entered and dis-played. Click the left mouse button on this field to display a menuof units. B values may be entered in tesla (the default) or gauss.

Accept Accepts the new axes settings and units.Cancel Cancels the new axes settings and units, reverting to the previ-

ous settings.Round Off Rounds off the minimum and maximum B and H values to better

display the BH-curve.











Go Back

Contents

Index

View Graph

Choose View Graph to view the entire BH-curve. A graph of the BH-curve is displayed.Three new buttons appear beneath the viewing window:

These buttons operate the same way as the following commands in the PlotData utility:

• Plot/Show Coordinates• Plot/Format Axes• Plot/Format Graphs

Show Coords Displays the B and H-coordinates of the selected points.Plot Set Specifies axis scales, tick marks, labels, plot headings, minimum and

maximum B and H values to be plotted, and whether a plot legendand axes are displayed.

Graph Set Specifies the color, line thickness, line style, name and marker type ofthe BH-curve. Also specifies whether the curve is visible on the plot. Ifyou do not choose to show the markers or the line, the curve does notappear on the plot.

Note: You cannot make changes to the BH-curve while viewing a graph of it. Toedit the BH-curve, choose Edit Curve.











Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Nonlinear Permanent Magnets

A ferromagnetic material exhibits an overall constructive response as a function of theinfluences that it experiences. One can supply a magnetic field to a volume containing aferromagnetic material, and the overall magnetic field in that volume will be larger than themagnetic field supplied. This physics relationship is represented by:

where:

• B is the total magnetic field.• H is the supplied field.• M is the response of the material to the supplied field.

These are vectorial references, and it is not necessary for B, H, and M to all be aligned ina parallel direction.

One subclass of ferromagnetic materials is the permanent magnet subclass. The materi-als are unique in that they ‘store’ part of the supplied magnetic field in the form of energy.This storage of magnetic energy is represented by how the material behaves in what iscalled the second quadrant of the hysteresis curve. In general, this curve is nonlinear innature in the second quadrant. A large majority of permanent magnet materials are actu-ally linear in the second quadrant, and this allows us to more easily compute and providethe appropriate physics within a device where they are used. Additionally, a full range ofoperating conditions can be determined readily, where reluctance and variations in sup-plied fields can be taken into account.

When the material is actually nonlinear in the second quadrant, the material behavior is afunction of history, and of the overall supplied fields throughout the volume of the material.To correctly model a nonlinear permanent magnet, one would have to maintain a full his-tory of the supplied fields and determine multiple recoil minor loop characteristics from theoriginal nonlinear curve. Each of these new characteristic curves depends upon the local

B µ0H µ0M+( )=











Go Back

Contents

Index

amplitude and direction of the supplied field, as well as the overall reluctance.

Figure A depicts a nonlinear material with a particular shape and overall reluctance. Fig-ure B shows the same material type with a different shape. Note the difference in theoperating points associated with the geometry alone.

In general, one cannot consider the appropriate handling of this type of material whenusing the formulations and assumptions associated within a magnetostatic solution. Thesoftware interpolates along the nonlinear curve to determine static operating conditionsfor the magnetic materials in question, and this provides an appropriate solution undertwo very significant conditions.

In Air Demagnetization

If a nonlinear permanent magnet is ‘charged’ or energized in a magnetizing fixture, thenremoved from the fixture, the material will demagnetize itself based on its geometric pro-portions. This behavior will traverse along the second quadrant nonlinear curve. Maxwellwill provide the correct operating point.

A B











Go Back

Contents

Index

In Device Demagnetization

If one assembles a device with a nonlinear permanent magnet in a non-energized condi-tion, and then magnetizes the magnet in the assembly the magnet will demagnetize itselfbased on its geometric proportions as well as taking into consideration the additional pas-sive components in the assembly. This is generally the preferred manner to handle nonlin-ear permanent magnet assemblies as it allows for a larger amount of energy to be stored,then used in assembly operation.

Other Device Considerations

Under all additional operating conditions the appropriate operating point and thus magne-tization character of the nonlinear permanent magnet will be incorrectly handled. Thismeans that permanent magnet devices, which rely on history, or on additionally suppliedfields acting near or on the permanent magnets, will not be computed correctly by a singlemagnetostatic solution.

In these cases, you can sequentially iterate from one solution to another to create apseudo-history simulation, and derive the correct results.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Functional Material PropertiesAny material property that can be specified by entering a constant can also be specifiedusing a mathematical function, which you can define. Functional material properties canbe used to:

• Define material properties that vary in magnitude according to their position inside anobject.

• Define material properties whose value is given by a mathematical relationship — forinstance, one relating it to another property’s value.

• If you have a license for the Parametric Analysis Module, define properties whosevalues vary during a parametric sweep. These properties are set to constantfunctional values.

> In general, to define a functional material property:1. Add or derive a Local material.2. Choose Options to specify which material properties are constant and which are

functional.3. Choose Functions to define math functions that describe the material property’s

behavior.4. Enter the appropriate function name as the value for the desired material property.

Functional Properties in RZ Solvers

You may use functional materials in RZ models as long as the value of the function doesnot vary with position in the material. Therefore, the material property value may not be afunction of spatial coordinates. If you attempt to exit the Material Manager after assigninga function that violates this restriction, you get the following error message which requiresyou to execute a Yes/No option to proceed. The procedure for recovering from this error isthe same as that described under Nonlinear, Functionally Defined, and Anisotropic Mate-rials.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Options

Choose Options to do the following:

• Specify whether the material properties vary as functions of position, or are constantin a new or derived material.

• For magnetostatic or electrostatic problems, select which two material properties areto be entered (this defines the two that are computed from them).

A window similar to the following one appears, listing the available material properties:

For each material property, select one of the following:

• Constant. The material property’s value is constant throughout an object (the default).• Functional. The material property’s value is a function of position.

• For scalar properties like relative permittivity, relative permeability, conductivity,and so forth, the function defines the value of the property at all points.

• For vector properties such as polarization and magnetization, the function definesthe magnitude of the vector at all points. Its direction is constant and is definedwhen you assign the material to an object.

• Vector Fn. If a material property (such as magnetization) is a vector, specify whetherits direction and magnitude are constant or are a function of position. This option alsoallows you to define radial and tangential vector material properties such as tangentialmagnetization in a material.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material Properties

In magnetostatic and electrostatic problems, only two of the four available material prop-erties need to be specified. The values of the other two properties are dependent onthese properties, and can be computed from the two you enter. This prevents you fromover-specifying a material’s properties.

Use the Options command to pick the properties you’d like to enter for a material. Toselect an “editable” property, click on the select button next to the desired property.

Magnetostatic Properties

In magnetostatic problems, select two of the following:

These properties are related by:

where:

• B is the magnetic flux density.• H is the magnetic field.• µ0 is the permeability of free space, 4π×10-7 webers/ampere-meter.• µr is the relative permeability.• Hc is the magnetic coercivity.• Mp is the permanent dipole magnetization.• χm is the magnetic susceptibility.

The magnetic retentivity, Br, represents the value of B in a material when H goes to zero.These relationships then reduce to:

Mu The relative permeability, µr.Hc The magnetic coercivity, Hc.Br The magnetic retentivity, Br.Mp The permanent dipole magnetization, Mp.

B µo 1 χm+( )H M p+( ) µo µrH M p+( )= =

B µoµr H Hc+( )=

Br µoM p µoµrHc= =











Go Back

Contents

Index

Thus, only two quantities are needed to specify the magnetic properties of the material.The other two can be obtained using this relationship.

Electrostatic Properties

In electrostatic problems, select two of the following:

These properties are related by:

where:

• E is the electric field intensity.• D is the electric flux density.• ε0 is the permittivity of free space, 8.854×10-12 coulombs2/newton-meter2.• εr is the relative permittivity.• Ec is the electric coercivity.• χ is the electric susceptibility.

The electric retentivity, Dr, is the magnitude of D in a material when E equals zero. Therelationships above then become:

Again, only two of these quantities are needed; the value of the other two can be foundusing this relationship.

Er The relative permittivity, εr.Ec The electric coercivity, Ec.Dr The electric retentivity, Dr.Pp The permanent polarization, Pp.

D εo 1 χ+( )E PpεoεrE Pp+ +=

D εr εoE E+ c( )=

Dr Pp εrEc= =











Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Functions

Choose Functions to define mathematical functions that give a material property’s value.The Function Definitions window appears:

> In general, to define a function:1. Enter the function name in the field left of the equals sign.2. Enter the numeric value or mathematical expression for the function in the field to

the right of the equals sign (above the Add button). To view a listing of validoperators and expressions, choose Help.

3. Choose Add or press Return. The function is listed in the following columns:

4. Optionally, choose Datasets to define a piecewise linear expression for the

Note: The pre-defined variables X, Y, PHI, and R (XY problems) or R, Z, THETA,and RHO (RZ problems) must be entered in capital letters. If you have pur-chased RMxprt, P (position), S (speed), and T (time) are also pre-defined,and must be entered in capital letters.

Name Displays the name of the function.Value Displays the numeric value of the function (if applicable).Expression Displays the function.











Go Back

Contents

Index









function.5. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until you have defined all the necessary functions.6. When you finish adding functions, choose Done to return to the Material

Manager.

You can now use the functions you created to specify the value of material properties.

Modifying a Function

Any function in the Function Definitions window can be modified to allow for new vari-ables, operators, trigonometric function, or constants.

> To modify an existing function:1. Select the function to modify.2. Change the desired values in the function.3. Choose Update.

The updated function is displayed.

Deleting a Function

Delete any unwanted functions from the Function Definitions window.

> To delete a function:1. Select the function to delete.2. Choose Delete.

The selected function is deleted.

Transient Function Variables

If you have purchased EMpulse, three new functional variables are available to you:

• P is the position variable.• S is the speed variable.• T is the time variable.

Note: For more information on the defining functions — including a list of validoperators, pre-defined constants, intrinsic functions, uses, and datasets —choose Help in the Function Definitions window.



Go Back

Contents

More

Index









Vector Functions

Choose Vector Fn to identify whether the direction and magnitude of vector materialproperties (such as magnetization) are constant or functional. Use this option to definevector properties in which the magnitude and the direction of one or more components ofthe vector property vary as a function of position.

When you choose Vector Fn, the following window appears:

> To define a vector function:1. If the values for the x- and y-components of the vector are constants, enter the

value in the X Component and Y Component fields.2. If the value of either component is functional, select the Function button to the

right of each field, and enter the function name in X Component or Y Component.

A vector is defined by its x- and y-components as shown below. The direction in which itpoints depends on whether you have specified constant or functional values for the x- andy- components. If they are constant, the vector will point in a uniform direction. The mag-netization vector shown, M, varies in both magnitude and direction according to the rela-



Go Back

Contents

Index









tionship Mx=X and My=Y:

Use this type of vector function to represent material properties that vary according to anytype of function. You enter the x- and y-components and define whether they are func-tional or constant. The orientation of the vector with the model’s coordinate system isdefined when you assign the material to an object.

M

x

y

Mx = X

My = Y


Maxwell 2D — Setup Boundaries/SourcesTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Setup Boundaries/SourcesChoose Setup Boundaries/Sources from the Executive Commands menu of Maxwell2D to access the Boundary Manager.

Boundary Manager

Use the Boundary Manager to do the following:

• Define sources of voltage, current, and charge.• Define boundary conditions which allow you to model the behavior of the electric or

magnetic field on inside surfaces or edges of the problem space.

A window similar to the following one appears:

All existing boundaries and sources are listed in the box on the left side of the BoundaryManager window. (If none have been defined, this area is blank.) The geometric modelappears in the display area on the upper right side. If you select the name of a boundaryor source, information about it appears in the box beneath the geometric model. You canthen view or change the boundary or source values.

Setup Boundaries/SourcesBoundary Manager

Modifying the Boundary andSource Setup

Boundary Manager Com-mands

Boundary Manager Tool BarGeneral ProcedureBoundaries and Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Modifying the Boundary and Source SetupIf you choose Setup Boundaries/Sources after generating a field solution, the followingmessage appears:

If you make changes to the boundary setup and save thosechanges, all solution data will be deleted and will have to berecomputed. Pick “View Only” if no changes are to be saved,“Modify if changes are to be saved or “Cancel” to cancel thisoperation.

> Do one of the following:• Choose View Only to access the Boundary Manager in view-only mode. You will be

able to select and view all boundary conditions and sources; however, you will not beable to change them.

• Choose Modify to change the existing boundary conditions. Be aware that you mustre-solve the problem after doing so.

• Choose Cancel to return to the Executive Commands menu.

Setup Boundaries/SourcesModifying the Boundaryand Source Setup





Go Back

Contents

Index

Boundary Manager CommandsThe following commands are available in the Boundary Manager:

File Allows you to save the boundary, voltage, current, or charge informa-tion that you define, and exit the Boundary Manager. This commandalso allows you to reset the boundaries and sources to their defaults.

Edit Allows you to select, deselect, and delete objects, edges, boundaries,and sources.

Assign Allows you to assign boundary types, voltages, currents, and chargedensities to the edges and objects that you have selected using theEdit/Select commands, using the available boundary conditions andsources for the solver you have selected.

Model Allows you to define the size and units of the drawing region, snapmode, and default colors. Measures the distances between two pointsin the viewing window. Displays the attributes of the objects in themodel.

Window Allows you to create and arrange viewing windows.

Setup Boundaries/SourcesModifying the Boundary andSource Setup





Go Back

Contents

Index

Boundary Manager Tool BarThe tool bar serves as a shortcut for executing various Boundary Manager commands.

> Each button in the tool bar represents a different Boundary Manager command.• To execute a command, click on the desired icon.• To view a brief description of a command, click and hold down on an icon. The

description appears in the message bar at the bottom of the screen.

Note: If a tool bar icon appears to do nothing when you click on it, the commandmay not be available at the time. For instance, you cannot access any of theAssign commands from the tool bar if you have not yet selected an edge orobject as a boundary.



Boundary Manager ToolBar

General ProcedureBoundaries and Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

General ProcedureAssign boundaries and sources to the objects whose field affects you wish to observe.

> To define boundary conditions and sources for a model:1. Choose one of the Edit/Select commands to identify the location of an object or

edge at which you wish to specify a particular voltage, current, or field alignment(boundary condition).

2. Choose one of the Assign commands to assign a source or boundary condition tothe selected object or edge.• Choose an Assign/Boundary command to assign a boundary condition that

specifies how the electric or magnetic field behaves on a selected outside edge orobject interface.

• Choose an Assign/Source command to assign a specific voltage, current, orcharge to the selected object or edges.

3. Choose Assign at the bottom of the screen. This completes the assignment to theselected object of all the boundary or source values that you have entered.

4. If you are defining many boundaries or sources, choose File/Save every so oftento save them — they are not saved automatically.

5. Choose File/Exit to exit the Boundary Manager.

Warning: In order to set up a valid problem, you must have at least one source of cur-rent, charge, voltage, or electric or magnetic field.

Note: Edges that are not explicitly assigned boundary conditions or sources useMaxwell 2D’s default boundary condition (Neumann for outside edges; natu-ral for object interfaces). The field behavior on these boundaries is differentfor each solver, and is described later in this chapter.



Boundary Manager Tool BarGeneral Procedure

Modifying Boundariesand Sources

Deleting Boundaries andSources

Exiting Setup Boundaries/Sources

Boundaries and Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Modifying Boundaries and Sources

Once assigned, any boundary or source can be modified.

> To modify an existing boundary or source:1. Select the boundary or source that you wish to modify. The system highlights the

name of that boundary or source and displays all relevant information about it atthe bottom of the screen.

2. Do one of the following:• To assign a different type of boundary condition or source to the selected

boundary:a. Choose one of the Assign/Boundary or Assign/Source commands. If you

have selected more than one existing boundary, a message then appears,warning you that the existing boundary will be incorporated in the newboundary. This actually means that the old boundary or source assignmentwill be replaced by the new.

b. Choose Yes to change the boundary or source type.c. Enter the new charge, current, voltage, or symmetry values for the

boundary or source.• To change a selected boundary or source’s charge, current, voltage, or symmetry

value:a. Select the parameter for which you want to change the value(s).b. Change the displayed entry field value(s).c. Choose the Accept command next to the Options button at the bottom of

the screen to get the software to accept the values that you have typed inthe entry fields.

3. Choose Assign at the bottom of the screen to enter the change or Cancel tocancel the change.










Go Back

Contents

Index

Deleting Boundaries and Sources

Delete unwanted boundaries and sources in the model. Deleted boundaries and sourcesretain their original default boundary conditions. Deleting any boundary or source willnecessitate generating a new solution for the model.

> To delete a boundary or source after it has been defined:1. Click on the boundary or source that you wish to delete. The system highlights the

name of that boundary or source.2. Choose Edit/Clear. The highlighted boundary or source is then removed from the

list of boundaries and sources.

Choose Edit/Undo Clear to retrieve boundaries and sources that are deleted by mistake.However, only the most recently-deleted boundary or source can be retrieved.


Once you have finished assigning the boundaries and sources, exit the Boundary Man-ager.

> To exit after all necessary boundary conditions have been specified:1. Choose File/Exit. If no changes were made, you automatically exit.2. If you have made changes to the model’s boundary conditions, the following

message appears:

Save changes before closing?

Do one of the following:• Choose Yes to save the changes and exit.• Choose No to exit without saving your changes.• Choose Cancel to continue setting boundaries and sources.

Note: Deleted boundaries and sources revert to the Neumann or natural boundarycondition — the default boundary condition for Maxwell 2D.






Exiting Setup Bound-aries/Sources




Go Back

Contents

Index

Boundaries and SourcesEach field solver available in the Maxwell 2D allows different boundary conditions andsources for a problem. These boundary conditions and sources can be set up by:

• The Assign/Boundary commands. These commands give you access to allboundary conditions that may be defined for object interfaces and outside edges ofthe model — including the solver’s default boundary conditions.

• The Assign/Source commands. These commands give you access to allelectromagnetic sources that may be defined for objects or edges.

Boundary Conditions

Boundary conditions define the behavior of the electric or magnetic field at object inter-faces or edges of the problem region. They can be used to:

• Identify structures that are magnetically isolated, electrically insulated, or electricallyisolated.

• Set the electric or magnetic potential at a surface to a constant value or a function ofposition, in order to define the behavior of the electric or magnetic field on that surface

• Simulate the field patterns that would exist in a structure while modeling only part of it.To do this, you can define planes of symmetry where electric or magnetic fields areeither tangential to or normal to the surface. Additionally, you can define planes ofsymmetry where the field on one surface matches the magnitude and direction (oropposite direction) of the field on another surface.

• Simulate the field patterns produced by thin resistive layers on conductors (DCconduction solver) or eddy currents with very tiny skin depths in conductors (eddycurrent solver), without having to explicitly draw, assign materials to, or solve for fieldsinside the objects in question.




Boundary ConditionsSourcesRequired ElectromagneticSources

References for Electric orMagnetic Potential

Functional Boundariesand Sources

Modeling External FieldsUsing SymmetryBoundaries and Sourcesin Axisymmetric Models



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Sources

Sources define how charges, voltages, or currents are distributed in a model — whetherfor edges or solid objects.

• Solid sources are used to model distributions of current, charge, or voltage on objects.• Sheet sources are used to model edge voltages, charge sheets, or current sheets. To

simulate uniform distributions of charge, voltage or current on an edge, they can bedefined as constants. To simulate distributions of charge, voltage, or current that varyas a function of position, they can be defined as math functions.

The behavior of the electric or magnetic field for the object or edge is not directly speci-fied, but is determined by the type of source you defined.

Required Electromagnetic Sources

To compute fields for a structure, you must define a source of charge, voltage, current, orelectric or magnetic fields for your model. Assign at least one object or edge as either asource (such as a current, charge, or voltage) or a value boundary.

Permanently polarized or magnetized materials also act as sources of charge or magneticfield (respectively). If you do not identify some type of source, the Maxwell 2D will not beable to generate a solution.

The field quantities computed by each solver — and the required electromagnetic sources— are given in the following table:

Field Solver Sources Field Computed Derived FieldQuantities

Magnetostatic DC currents; externalstatic magnetic fields;permanent magnets

AZ (XY models),Aφ (RZ models)

H, B

Electrostatic Voltages; charges;permanently polarizedmaterials

φ E, D

Eddy Current AC currents; externalAC magnetic fields.

AZ(t) (XY models),Aφ(t) (RZ models)

JZ(t) (XY models),Jφ(t) (RZ models),H(t), B(t),




Boundary ConditionsSourcesRequired Electromag-netic Sources






Go Back

Contents

Index

where:

• A is the magnetic vector potential.• H is the magnetic field.• B is the magnetic flux density.• φ is the electric potential.• E is the electric field.• D is the electric flux density.• J is the current density.

These quantities are phasors in AC simulations.

AC Conduction AC voltages φ(t) E(t), J(t)

DC Conduction DC voltages φ E, D, J

Eddy Axial External AC mag-netic fields

HZ(t) E(t), D(t), J(t)

Transient Transient voltagesand currents.

AZ (XY and RZmodels)

H, B

Thermal none temperature, T

Field Solver Sources Field Computed Derived FieldQuantities




Boundary ConditionsSourcesRequired Electromag-netic Sources






Go Back

Contents

Index

References for Electric or Magnetic Potential

You must specify a reference for electric scalar potential or magnetic vector potential thatMaxwell 2D can use when computing fields. To do so, assign one of the following bound-ary or source types to at least one surface in your model:

• Value boundary• Voltage source• Odd symmetry boundary• Balloon boundary

If you do not set a reference for electric or magnetic potential, the model is not uniquelydefined and an error message appears when you try to generate a field solution. Thisproblem usually occurs when you set up:

• Electrostatic problems that contain only charge sources. The electrostatic field solverrequires that a reference voltage be defined in order to compute the electric potential(and from it, the electric field) in the problem region.

• Magnetostatic and eddy current problems that contain only current sources. Thesesolvers require that a reference value of AZ or rAφ reference value be set in order tocompute the magnetic vector potential (Az) and from it, the magnetic field in theproblem region.

Click here for more information on computing solutions.

Functional Boundaries and Sources

Functional boundaries and sources have defined by math functions, and are used:

• To model distributions of charge, current or voltage that vary as a function of position.• To model external fields that vary as functions of position.• To define voltage, current, charge or boundary values as variables to be used in a

parametric sweep.





References for Electricor Magnetic Potential





Go Back

Contents

Index

Modeling External Fields

Use value boundaries to model external magnetic or electric fields. In the example shownbelow, a constant external magnetic field produced the magnetic field and axial currentsin the cracked solenoid. The external field (which points in the z direction “into” the cross-section of the solenoid) was modeled using a value boundary on the outside edge of theair space in the problem:

For more information about value boundaries for a particular field solver, refer to thedescription of its boundary conditions in this chapter.

3zoomx

y

H(z)

5.0000e+02 4.4373e+02 3.8746e+02 3.3119e+02 2.7492e+02 2.1866e+02 1.6239e+02 1.0612e+02 4.9849e+01 -6.4194e+00 -6.2688e+01

Value boundary of500 H/m










Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Using Symmetry

When modeling a structure that is geometrically and electrically symmetrical, you cantake advantage of the symmetry by modeling only part of the structure. The two types ofsymmetry boundaries that can be modeled in Maxwell 2D are even and odd. An exampleof an even symmetry boundary is shown below:

EVEN SYMMETRY

Image Drawing Region

o

oo

oo

oo

xx

xx

xx

xo

o

o

o

o

o

xx

xx

x

xxo

Current inCurrent in

The B-field is perpendicular toan even symmetry boundary.

The E-field is tangential to aneven symmetry boundary.

+

+

+ ++

++++

+

PositiveCharge

PositiveCharge

++++++

+

++++

+










Go Back

Contents

Index

An example of an odd symmetry boundary is shown below:

Given a fixed amount of computer memory, modeling a portion of a problem allows you tocompute fields for larger structures than would be possible if the entire geometry wasmodeled. It also allows the system to generate solutions more quickly than it would withthe full model.

To specify the location of a symmetry boundary, follow the same general procedure that isused to define sources and boundaries. That is, first identify the location of the boundarywith an Edit/Select command; then assign the boundary with the Assign/Boundary/Symmetry command.

ODD SYMMETRY

Image Drawing Region

o

oo

oo

oo

xx

xx

xx

xo

o

o

o

o

oo

Current inCurrent out

The B-field is tangential to anodd symmetry boundary.

The E-field is perpendicular toan odd symmetry boundary.

+

++ +

+

+++

+PositiveCharge

NegativeCharge

...

..

..

--

--

--

-










Go Back

Contents

Index

Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models

In general, boundary conditions and sources operate the same way for axisymmetric (RZ)models as they do for cartesian (XY) models. However, be aware of the following whenyou are setting boundaries for each type of model.

Outside Boundaries

In axisymmetric models, Maxwell 2D ignores any boundary conditions or sourcesassigned to the left edge of the problem space.

As shown below, the left edge of the problem space is used as the axis of rotational sym-metry in an axisymmetric geometry. To model the axis of symmetry, the system automati-cally imposes a boundary condition on that edge of the problem region. It overrides anyother boundary conditions or sources that may be assigned to the left edge of the model.

The edge is still listed in the Boundary Manager as being assigned the boundary condi-tion or source you specified, even though the axisymmetric solvers ignore it during thesolution.

y

x

Z

R

Outside Edges Outside Edges

Axis ofSymmetry

Cartesian (XY) Axisymmetric (RZ)

Uses assigned boundarycondition or source on alloutside edges.

Uses assigned boundarycondition or source on alloutside edges except axisof symmetry.










Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Value Boundaries in Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Problems

In axisymmetric magnetostatic and eddy current problems, equipotential lines of rAφ coin-cide with lines of magnetic flux. To define a boundary that coincides with a magnetic fluxline, specify constant values or functions of rAφ (not Aφ) when setting value boundaries.

Axisymmetric External Fields

All external fields modeled with value boundaries must be symmetric about the axis ofrotation (the z-axis).

For instance, to set up a uniform B-field in the z-direction for the axisymmetric modelshown above, define boundaries as follows:

• Set the right boundary to a constant value of rAφ.• Leave the top, bottom and left (z-axis) boundaries set to their default boundary

conditions.

R is constant on the right edge, which causes the first term to drop out of the followingequation:

This indicates that the B-field is uniform and points only in the z direction.

B

Top boundary - Neumann (default)

Bottom boundary - Neumann (default)

Right boundary -Value

rAφ = constant

Left boundary -Axis of

(default)

z

r

symmetry

B Aφ∇×z∂

∂ Aφr–1r---

r∂∂

rAφ( ) z+= =










Go Back

Contents

Index

When defining external fields for eddy current and magnetostatic problems, alwaysremember that you are specifying value of rAφ, not Aφ. For instance, setting the top andbottom boundaries as shown below produces a magnetic field that points in the r direc-tion:

The value of r is always increasing, creating a diverging B-field — which is not physicallyvalid.

Symmetry Boundaries

To use symmetry boundaries in axisymmetric problems, all vector quantities — includingexternal fields modeled with boundary conditions — must be symmetric about the axis ofrotation (the z-axis).

Top boundary - Value (rAφ = constant)

B (diverging)

Bottom boundary - Value (rAφ = 0)

Right boundary -Left boundary -Axis of

(default)

z

r

symmetryNeumann(default)










Go Back

Contents

Index

Electrostatic Boundary ConditionsThe following boundary types are available for electrostatic models:

• Default (Neumann and Natural)• Value• Balloon• Symmetry• Matching (Master and Slave)

Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries

The default boundary conditions for the electrostatic field solver are Neumann and naturalboundaries. Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for an electrostatic model,all surfaces are set to one of the following:

• All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, thetangential components of E and the normal components of D arecontinuous across the boundary. On a boundary at the edge of the drawing region, thenormal component of E is zero, forcing the field to be tangential to the boundary.

• All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that E iscontinuous across the object surface, according to the following relationships:

where:• Et is the electric field intensity tangential to the interface.• Dn is the electric flux density (displacement), εE, normal to the interface.• ρs is the surface charge density.

Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to reset sources and boundaries to their default Neu-mann/natural state. Deleted boundaries and sources also revert to the Neumann/naturalboundary condition.

φ∇–( ) ε φ∇–( )

Et1 Et2=

Dn1 Dn2 ρs+=

Electrostatic BoundaryConditions

Default (Neumann andNatural) Boundaries

Value BoundariesBalloon BoundariesSymmetry Boundaries

Odd SymmetryEven Symmetry

Matching (Master andSlave) Boundaries

Electrostatic SourcesMagnetostatic BoundaryConditions

Magnetostatic Sources



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Value Boundaries

Use value boundaries to set the electric scalar potential, φ, to a constant value on aboundary. The potential can also be defined as a function of position using math func-tions. Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the voltages on conduc-tors and outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between two objects toa potential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between the objects.

Value boundaries are set using Assign/Boundary/Value. They are sometimes calledDirichlet boundaries.

It’s important to note that the potential on the surface of a conductor is all that the electro-static solver needs to know about that conductor. Because the region inside the conductoris at the same potential, no E-field exists inside the conductor. The electrostatic field sim-ulator does not solve for the potential inside the conductor — whatever value you specifyon the boundary is the potential throughout the conductor. (Because no solution is com-puted inside the conductor, the simulator models the potential inside these conductors asbeing equal to zero — even though it is not actually this value. The potential set via thevalue boundary is considered to apply to the surface of the conductor.)

The behavior of the E-field on a value boundary depends on whether you define a con-stant or functional potential on the boundary.

• If the potential is constant, the tangential component of E is zero, forcing E tobe perpendicular to the boundary.

• If the potential is a function of position, E may not be perpendicular to the boundary.Its behavior depends on what type of math function was used to specify the potential.For instance, in the following figure, the potential on the left edge of the problemspace was defined using the relationship φ=10 y +1. The tangential component ofE on the boundary is not equal to zero, since φ is constantly changing on

φ∇–( )

φ∇–( )










Go Back

Contents

Index

the boundary.

3x

y

Voltage

1.0000e+01 8.0000e+00 6.0000e+00 4.0000e+00 2.0000e+00 0.0000e+00 -2.0000e+00 -4.0000e+00 -6.0000e+00 -8.0000e+00 -1.0000e+01

Balloon boundary

FunctionalValue boundaryValue boundary










Go Back

Contents

Index

Balloon Boundaries

Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly “infi-nitely” large — effectively isolating the model from other voltage or charge sources.Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to assign this type of boundary to the outside edgesof the model. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edgesidentified as balloon boundaries.

Two types of balloon boundaries are available for electrostatic models:

A balloon boundary is shown on the bottom edge of the structure in the previous figure.As can be seen in the field plot, the E-field is neither tangential to nor normal to a balloonboundary.

Symmetry Boundaries

A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of bound-ary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in astructure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model and conserve computingresources. You could even assign symmetry boundaries to the entire outside of the prob-lem region, but you would have to make sure that all source voltages and currents sum tozero. You could also assign different boundary types (including symmetry) to differentedges of the outside of your problem space. Two types of symmetry boundaries — Oddand Even — may be defined for an electrostatic model.

Charge Models the case where the charge at infinity matches the charge in thesolution region, forcing the net charge to be zero. Physically, this repre-sents an electrically insulated system.

Voltage Models the case where the voltage at infinity is zero. Physically, thisrepresents an electrically grounded system. In most cases, the resultswill be very similar to those produced with the Charge option; however,the charge at infinity may not exactly match the charge in the drawingregion.










Go Back

Contents

Index

Odd Symmetry

An odd symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) ofall charges and voltages on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those onthe other side. The electric field is perpendicular to this type of boundary, and contours ofequal potential are tangential to it. To define an odd symmetry boundary, the simulatorsets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a voltage of zero.

For instance, the plane of symmetry shown in the following figure is modeled by an oddsymmetry boundary, since the signs of the voltage sources on the left side of the symme-try plane are the opposite of the voltage sources on the right side of the plane (the partthat is modeled):

3x

y

Voltage

1.0000e+00 8.0000e-01 6.0000e-01 4.0000e-01 2.0000e-01 0.0000e+00 -2.0000e-01 -4.0000e-01 -6.0000e-01 -8.0000e-01 -1.0000e+00

Odd

Sym

met

ry B

ound

ary










Go Back

Contents

Index

Even Symmetry

An even symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative)of the voltages and charges on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those onthe other side. The electric field is tangential to this type of boundary, and contours ofequal potential are perpendicular to it. To define an even symmetry boundary, the simula-tor sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary — acting as an electrical mirror to themodel.

For instance, the plane of symmetry shown in the following figure could be modeled by aneven symmetry boundary, since the signs of the voltage sources on the left side of thesymmetry plane are the same as that of the voltage sources on the right side of the sym-metry plane (the part that is modeled):

R di P i

3x

y

Voltage

1.0000e+00 8.0000e-01 6.0000e-01 4.0000e-01 2.0000e-01 0.0000e+00 -2.0000e-01 -4.0000e-01 -6.0000e-01 -8.0000e-01 -1.0000e+00

Eve

n S

ymm

etry

Bou

ndar

y










Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries

Matching boundaries, which are intended for use on your model’s outside boundaryedges, allow you to reduce the size of a model by taking advantage of its periodicity. Mas-ter/slave boundaries may be defined on the edges of the background surface. A modelneed not be symmetric to be periodic.

For example, the following figure shows the geometric model for a simple electrostaticmicromotor:

The rotor is held at zero volts while the six stator poles are switched between three differ-ent voltages, causing the rotor to rotate. The electric field pattern at any snapshot of timerepeats itself every 180 degrees. Therefore, the field in one half of the motor matches thefield in other half. Using matching boundaries allows you to simplify this particular deviceby modeling only half of the structure. The only requirement is that the E-field over the tophalf of the left boundary must match the E-field over the bottom half of the left boundary.Matching boundaries allow you to enforce this condition.

To define matching boundaries, you must define both a “master” matching boundary anda “slave” matching boundary. These boundaries are defined using the Assign/Boundary/Master and Assign/Boundary/Slave commands. In order to be true matching bound-aries, the magnitude of the electric field at each point on one surface (the “slave” surface)must match the electric field at each corresponding point on the other surface (the “mas-










Go Back

Contents

Index

ter” surface). The field on the slave boundary must also point in the same direction — orin the opposite direction — as the field on the master boundary.

Note that a symmetry, value, or Neumann boundary cannot be used in place of matchingboundaries. The electric field is not necessarily either perpendicular or tangential to peri-odic surfaces. For example, in the following figure, the electric field would be exactly tan-gential to the left bounding surface of the half-model only when the poles of the rotor arealigned with the poles of the stator. For all other positions of the rotor, matching bound-aries are required.

Some structures have a periodic electric field that repeats every 120 degrees, 90degrees, or less. In such cases, model the smallest possible periodic segment of thestructure.

Slave Master

Eslave Emaster

0 volts

100 volts

-100 volts










Go Back

Contents

Index

Electrostatic SourcesThere are a number of different sources available for electrostatic models:

Solid Voltage

This type of source specifies the total DC voltage (electric potential) on a conductor. Volt-ages can be defined as constants or as math functions; however, the potential on a con-ductor is constant over the entire conductor. Note that conductors that touch should be setto the same voltage or defined as a single voltage source, since their potentials are identi-cal.

Solid voltage sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command.

Edge Voltage

This type of source specifies the total DC voltage on the selected edge or edges. Voltagescan be defined as constant or as functions of position (for instance, to model a specificdistribution of potential on the surface of a dielectric).

Edge voltage sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Sheet command.

Solid Charge Sources

This type of charge source defines the total charge on an object. The electrostatic fieldsimulator computes the object’s potential during the field solution.

Solid charge sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command. Two typesof solid charge sources are available.

Floating Charge Sources (Floating Conductors)

This type of source specifies the total charge on a conductor, identifying it as a floatingconductor. Charge is assumed to be evenly distributed on the object’s surface. Its valuecan be defined as a constant or as a function of position; however, charge is distributedover a conductor so that the electric potential is constant throughout the conductor.Because of this, the E-field is equal to zero in this region and no solution is computedinside the conductor.

Electrostatic Boundary Con-ditions

Electrostatic SourcesSolid VoltageEdge VoltageSolid Charge Sources

Floating ChargeSources (FloatingConductors)

Charge Sources forNon-Conductors

Charge SheetMagnetostatic BoundaryConditions




Go Back

Contents

Index

Charge Sources for Non-Conductors

This type of source specifies the total charge or charge density on a non-conductingobject.

• If the total charge is specified, charge is assumed to be uniformly distributedthroughout the interior of the object.

• If a constant value for the charge density is specified, charge is assumed to beuniformly distributed throughout the object. The charge density can also be specifiedas a function of position to model a distribution of charge that varies inside the object.

Charge Sheet

This type of source specifies the charge on the selected edge or edges. It is used prima-rily to assign surface charges to non-conductors. The “surfaces” being referred to arethose created by extending the edge in the z direction (cartesian models) or revolving itaround the z-axis (axisymmetric models). Specify either the total charge or the chargedensity.

• If the total charge is specified, charge is assumed to be evenly distributed on theselected surface.

• If the charge density is specified, you can define either a uniform charge density orone that varies as a function of position — to model specific distributions of charge onthe surface.

The electrostatic field simulator computes the electric potential on the edge during thesolution.

Charge sheets are defined using the Assign/Source/Sheet command.


Electrostatic SourcesSolid VoltageEdge VoltageSolid Charge Sources

Floating ChargeSources (Floating Con-ductors)

Charge Sources forNon-Conductors

Charge SheetMagnetostatic BoundaryConditions




Go Back

Contents

Index

Magnetostatic Boundary ConditionsIn the magnetostatic solver, each type of boundary condition has an effect on the staticmagnetic fields in your model. The following boundary types are available for magneto-static models:

• Default (Neumann)• Value• Balloon• Symmetry• Matching (Master and Slave)


Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for a magnetostatic model, all surfacesare set to one of the following:

• All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, thetangential component of H is zero, forcing the magnetic field to be perpendicular to theboundary. (Usually, you will want to change the default outside boundary condition.)

• All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that thetangential component of H and the normal component of B are continuous across theobject surface, according to the following relationships:

where:• Ht is the magnetic field intensity tangential to the interface.• Bn is the magnetic flux density normal to the interface.• Js is the surface current density.


Ht1 Ht2 Js+=

Bn1 Bn2=




Value BoundariesValue Boundaries inAxisymmetric Models

Balloon BoundariesSymmetry Boundaries






Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Value Boundaries

Use value boundaries to set the magnetic vector potential, AZ, to a constant value on aboundary. The potential can also be defined as a function of position using math func-tions. Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the potential of conduc-tors and outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between two objects toa potential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between the objects.

Value boundaries are set using the Assign/Boundary/Value command. They are some-times called Dirichlet boundaries.

The behavior of the magnetic field on a value boundary depends on whether you define aconstant or functional potential on the boundary. Remember that the magnetic vectorpotential, A, is defined to be a field that satisfies the equation:

Since the magnetostatic field solver assumes that A has a z-component only and B lies inthe xy-plane, the relationship of B to A is given by the following:

• If AZ is constant along a horizontal boundary, the partial derivatives of AZ with respectto x will be zero — forcing B to have an x-component only, and be tangential to theboundary. Likewise, if AZ is constant along a vertical boundary, the partial of AZ withrespect to y will be zero — forcing B to have a y-component only and again indicatingthat the field will be tangential.In general, the magnetic field will be tangential to any boundary on which AZ hasbeen set to a constant. This condition is shown in the following figure, where theright edge of the problem space has been defined as a value boundary with aconstant potential of -10 weber/meter and the left edge has been defined as a

A∇× B=

By∂

∂Az xx∂

∂Az y–=











Go Back

Contents

Index

value boundary with a constant potential of +10 weber/meter.

• If the potential is a function of position, the partial derivatives of AZ with respect to xand y will not necessarily be zero. It all depends on what type of math function wasused to specify the potential. Thus, B may not be tangential to the boundary and someflux will cross it.

Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models

In axisymmetric models, A is assumed to have only a φ-component and B is assumed tolie only in the rz-plane. The relationship between Aφ and B is given by:

Because equipotential lines of rAφ in axisymmetric models coincide with the lines of mag-netic flux, you must specify values or functions of rA (not A) when setting value bound-aries.

3x

y

Flux Lines

1.0000e+01 9.0000e+00 8.0000e+00 7.0000e+00 6.0000e+00 5.0000e+00 4.0000e+00 3.0000e+00 2.0000e+00 1.0000e+00 0.0000e+00

Value Boundary Default (Neumann) Boundary Value Boundary

Balloon Boundary

B1r---

z∂∂– r Aφ( ) r

r∂∂

r Aφ( ) z+=











Go Back

Contents

Index

Balloon Boundaries

Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly “infi-nitely” large — effectively isolating the model from other sources of current or magneticfields. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edges identifiedas balloon boundaries. The magnetic vector potential, AZ or Aφ, goes to zero at infinity.

Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to assign this type of boundary to the outside edges ofthe model.

A balloon boundary is shown on the bottom of the previous figure. As can be seen in thisfield plot, the lines of magnetic flux are neither tangential to nor normal to a balloonboundary.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Symmetry Boundaries

A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of bound-ary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in astructure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model — allowing you to con-serve computing resources. Two types of symmetry boundaries — Odd and Even — maybe defined for an inductance model.

Odd Symmetry

An odd symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) ofall currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the other side.The magnetic field is tangential to this type of boundary. To define an odd symmetryboundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a mag-netic vector potential of zero — acting as a magnetic mirror to the model.

For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below is modeled by an odd symmetry bound-ary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of the symmetryplane is the opposite of the current flow in the conductor on the right side of the plane (theside that is modeled):

3x

y

Flux Lines

6.3717e-05 5.7345e-05 5.0973e-05 4.4602e-05 3.8230e-05 3.1858e-05 2.5487e-05 1.9115e-05 1.2743e-05 6.3717e-06 0.0000e+00

Odd

Sym

met

ry B

ound

ary











Go Back

Contents

Index

Even Symmetry

An even symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative)of the currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side.The magnetic field is perpendicular to this type of boundary. To define an even symmetryboundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary.

For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below could be modeled by an even symme-try boundary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of thesymmetry plane is the same as that of the current flow in the conductor on the right sideof the plane (the side that is modeled):

3x

y

Eve

n S

ymm

etry

Bou

ndar

y











Go Back

Contents

More

Index


Matching boundaries allow you to take advantage of periodicity in a structure. For exam-ple, the following figure shows the cross section of a DC motor. The field in such a motorrepeats itself every 120 degrees; that is, the field pattern in one third of the motor matchesthe magnitude and direction (or the opposite of the direction) of the field pattern in theother two thirds.

Matching boundaries force the magnetic field at each point on one boundary (the “slave”boundary) to match the magnetic field at each corresponding point on the other surface(the “master” boundary). Modeling one third of the structure allows you to make efficientuse of the available computing resources:

To define matching boundaries, you must define both a master matching boundary and aslave matching boundary using the Assign/Boundary/Master and Assign/Boundary/Slave commands. The condition that needs to be enforced, as illustrated in the followingfigure, is that the magnitude of the magnetic field at each point on the slave boundary sur-face must match the magnetic field at each corresponding point on the master boundarysurface. The field on the slave boundary must point in either the same direction or in the

File Edit Reshape Arrange Object Constraint Model Window

pm_match [read-only]pm_motor [read-only]











Go Back

Contents

Index

exact opposite direction as the field on the master boundary:

Note that a value (Dirichlet), Neumann or symmetry boundary cannot be used to simulateperiodicity because the magnetic field is not necessarily either perpendicular or tangentialto periodic surfaces. For example, in the quarter model shown above, the magnetic field isexactly perpendicular to the bounding surfaces only when the gap separating the perma-nent magnets is perfectly horizontal or vertical. For all other positions of the rotor, match-ing boundaries are required to take advantage of symmetry.

+

+

+—

—

—

S

S

N

N

Hm

Hs

+

+

+

+—

—

—

—

S

S

N

N

One-quarter of a periodic structure (DC motor) modeledusing matching boundaries.

Master

SlaveHm = Hs











Go Back

Contents

Index

Magnetostatic SourcesThere are a number of different DC current sources available for magnetostatic models.

Current

This type of source specifies the DC current flowing in a conductor. You can set either thetotal current or the current density flowing in the object.

• If total current is specified, the current density is assumed to be uniform throughoutthe object.

• If current density is specified, you may define a uniform current density or one thatvaries as a function of position.

Solid current sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command.

Perfect Current

This describes the case in which all current in a perfect conductor flows only on the sur-face of the conductor. Magnetic fields cannot penetrate this type of conductor. You canonly specify the total DC current when defining a perfect conductor as a current source.

Perfect current sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command.

Current Sheet

This type of source specifies the surface current on an edge or edges — defining a cur-rent sheet. You can set either the total surface current or the surface current density.

• If the total surface current is specified, the current density is assumed to be uniform.• If the surface current density is specified, you may define a uniform current density or

one that varies as a function of position to model specific distributions of current on thesurface.

Current sheets are defined using the Assign/Source/Sheet command.

Note: You cannot define a perfect conductor as a current sheet.



Magnetostatic SourcesCurrentPerfect CurrentCurrent Sheet



Go Back

Contents

Index

Eddy Current Boundary ConditionsEach type of boundary condition has an effect on the time-varying magnetic fields in yourmodel.The following boundary types are available for eddy current models:

• Default (Neumann and natural)• Value• Balloon• Symmetry• Impedance• Matching (Master and Slave)


The default boundary conditions for the eddy current field solver are Neumann and natu-ral boundaries. Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for an eddy currentmodel, all surfaces are set to one of the following:

• All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, thetangential component of H(t) is zero, forcing the magnetic field to be perpendicular tothe boundary.

• All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that thetangential component of H(t) and the normal component of B(t) are continuous acrossthe object surface, according to the following relationships:

where:• Ht(t) is the magnetic field intensity tangential to the interface.• Bn(t) is the magnetic flux density normal to the interface.• Js(t) is the surface current density.


Ht1 t( ) Ht2 t( ) Js t( )+=

Bn1 t( ) Bn2 t( )=

Eddy Current BoundaryConditions



Balloon BoundariesSymmetry BoundariesImpedance BoundariesMatching (Master andSlave) Boundaries

Eddy Current SourcesActive Conductors

Solid, Stranded, andParallel Current Srcs

Current Sources forTouching Conductors

Current Sources forPerfect Conductors

Current SheetsPassive ConductorsSpecifying Phase In Sin-gle and Multi-Phase Sys-tems



Go Back

Contents

Index

Value Boundaries

Use value boundaries to set the magnetic vector potential, AZ(t) to a constant value on aboundary. In eddy current problems, the magnetic vector potential is a time-varying quan-tity in the form:

where Am is the magnitude of the potential and θ is its phase angle — its offset from apure cosine wave. Therefore, when specifying AZ on a boundary, you must enter both itsmagnitude and phase. The magnitude and phase of the potential can also be defined as afunction of position using math functions.

Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the potential of conductorsand outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between two objects to apotential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between the objects.



Since the eddy current field solver assumes that A has a z-component only and B lies inthe xy-plane, the relationship of B to A is given by the following expression:

• If AZ is constant, the magnetic field will be tangential to the boundary.• If the magnetic vector potential is a function of position, the partial derivatives of AZ

with respect to x and y will not necessarily be zero. It all depends on what type of mathfunction was used to specify the potential. Thus, B may not be tangential to theboundary and some flux may cross it.

AZ t( ) Am ωt θ+( )cos=

A∇× B=

By∂

∂Az xx∂

∂Az y–=












Go Back

Contents

Index

Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models

In axisymmetric models, A is assumed to have only a φ-component and B is assumed tolie only in the rz-plane. The relationship between A and B is given by:

Equipotential lines of rAφ in axisymmetric models coincide with the lines of magnetic flux,as shown below. When you define value boundaries for axisymmetric eddy current prob-lems, specify values or functions of rAφ (not Aφ):

B1r---

z∂∂– r Aφ( ) r

r∂∂

r Aφ( ) z+=


Reading Points



Maximumsxy

Minimumsxy


Mouse Left

Mouse Right

Unitsmm

0.0000e+00

1.0000e+02

-3.5000e+01

3.5000e+01

MENU PICK

3x

y

Flux Lines

1.0000e-01 9.0000e-02 8.0000e-02 7.0000e-02 6.0000e-02 5.0000e-02 4.0000e-02 3.0000e-02 2.0000e-02 1.0000e-02 0.0000e+00

2x

y

Flux Lines

7.7117e-03 6.9178e-03 6.1238e-03 5.3299e-03 4.5360e-03 3.7420e-03 2.9481e-03 2.1541e-03 1.3602e-03 5.6623e-04 -2.2772e-04

Axis ofSymmetry

θ=0°

θ=90°

Axis ofSymmetry

Default boundary

Default boundary

Balloon boundary

Balloon boundary

ValueboundaryrAφ = 0.1 wb

ValueboundaryrAφ = 0.1 wb












Go Back

Contents

Index

Balloon Boundaries

Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly “infi-nitely” large — effectively isolating the model from other sources of current or magneticfields. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edges identifiedas balloon boundaries. The magnetic vector potential, AZ or Aφ, goes to zero at infinity.The lines of magnetic flux are neither tangential to nor normal to a balloon boundary.

Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to assign this type of boundary to the outside edgesof the model.

Symmetry Boundaries

A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of bound-ary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in astructure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model — allowing you to con-serve computing resources. Two types of symmetry boundaries — Odd and Even — maybe defined for an eddy current model.












Go Back

Contents

Index

Odd Symmetry

An “odd” symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative)of all currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the otherside. The magnetic field is tangential to this type of boundary. The field on one side of theboundary oscillates in the opposite direction from the field on the other side of the bound-ary — that is, they are 180° out of phase.

To define an odd symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value(Dirichlet) boundary with a magnitude and phase angle of zero — acting as a magneticmirror to the model.

For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below is modeled by an odd symmetry bound-ary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of the symmetryplane is opposite to the direction of current flow in the conductor on the right side of theplane (the side that is modeled). The field patterns on the boundary at phase angles ofθ=0° and θ=90° are shown:




Maximumsxy

Minimumsxy


Mouse Left

Mouse Right

Unitsmm

-5.0000e+01

5.0000e+01

-3.5000e+01

3.5000e+01

MENU PICK

3x

y

Flux Lines

6.3806e-06 5.7425e-06 5.1045e-06 4.4664e-06 3.8283e-06 3.1903e-06 2.5522e-06 1.9142e-06 1.2761e-06 6.3806e-07 0.0000e+00

2x

y

Flux Lines

6.5483e-08 5.6293e-08 4.7103e-08 3.7913e-08 2.8723e-08 1.9533e-08 1.0343e-08 1.1532e-09 -8.0368e-09 -1.7227e-08 -2.6417e-08

OddSymmetryBoundaryθ=0°

OddSymmetryBoundaryθ=90°












Go Back

Contents

Index

Even Symmetry

An “even” symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative)of the currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side.The magnetic field is perpendicular to this type of boundary. The fields on both sides ofthe boundary oscillate in the same direction — that is, they are in phase. To define aneven symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary.

For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below is modeled by an even symmetryboundary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of thesymmetry plane is the same as that of the current in the conductor on the right side of theplane (the side that is modeled).The field patterns on the boundary at phase angles ofθ=0° and θ=90° are shown:




Maximumsxy

Minimumsxy


Mouse Left

Mouse Right

Unitsmm

-5.0000e+01

5.0000e+01

-3.5000e+01

3.5000e+01

MENU PICK

3x

y

Flux Lines

1.6386e-05 1.5884e-05 1.5381e-05 1.4878e-05 1.4375e-05 1.3872e-05 1.3369e-05 1.2866e-05 1.2363e-05 1.1860e-05 1.1357e-05

2x

y

Flux Lines

5.4881e-08 4.8326e-08 4.1772e-08 3.5218e-08 2.8664e-08 2.2110e-08 1.5555e-08 9.0013e-09 2.4471e-09 -4.1070e-09 -1.0661e-08

EvenSymmetryBoundaryθ=0°

EvenSymmetryBoundaryθ=90°












Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Impedance Boundaries

Impedance boundaries allow you to simulate the effect of induced currents in a conductorwithout explicitly computing them. The ohmic loss due to induced currents is computedfrom the tangential components of the H-field along the impedance boundary — the sur-face of the object that you are interested in.

Use this boundary condition for models where the following conditions occur:

• The skin depth in the conductor of interest is less than two orders of magnitudesmaller than the dimensions of the structure. In models like this, the Maxwell 2D’smeshmaker may not be able to create a fine enough mesh in the conductor tocompute eddy currents.

• The magnetic field decays much more rapidly inside the conductor in the direction thatis normal to the surface than it does in directions that are tangential to the surface.

• The AC current source is relatively far away from the surface where eddy currentsoccur, compared to the size of the skin depth.

The object itself is not included in the solution region. Instead, when drawing the geome-try, make the surface along which eddy currents are to be computed an outer surface ofthe problem region. Then, when defining boundaries, assign an impedance boundary tothis surface. To assign an impedance boundary, choose Assign/Boundary/Impedance.By entering the conductivity, σ, and the relative permeability, µr, of the object, you specifythe skin depth of induced eddy currents. The simulator uses this skin depth when comput-ing the electromagnetic field solution. It assumes that the H-field falls off exponentiallyinside the conductor.

For instance, suppose you want to compute eddy current losses in the conductor next to












Go Back

Contents

More

Index

the current source shown below.

If AC current is passing through the current source at a frequency of 1 MHz, the skindepth in the conductor is given by the following relationship:

where:

• ω = 2πf = 2π x 106 = 6.28 x 106 radians/second• σ = 5.8 x 107 siemens/meter• µr = 1• µ0 = 4π x 10-7 henries/meter

Substituting these values into this equation, the skin depth is found to be 6.6x10-5 meters.Since this is much smaller than the thickness of the conductor and the surface where cur-rents are induced is relatively far away from the current source, an impedance boundarycan be used to model the induced currents in the conductor, as shown below. The con-ductor itself is not included in the model; instead, the outside boundary of the model ismoved to the inside surface of the conductor. This outside surface is defined as an imped-

Current Sourceat 1 MHz

.5 m

Skin Depth = 6.6x10-5 m

Conductorµr=1σ=5.8x107

Thickness1x10-3m

δ 2ωσµrµ0--------------------=












Go Back

Contents

Index

ance boundary, using the conductivity and permeability specified previously.

After generating a solution, you can compute the ohmic loss for the surface using theplane calculator and plot the loss density on the boundary.

For impedance boundaries, ohmic loss is given by:

where:

• ω is the angular frequency, which is equal to 2πf.

• σ is the conductor’s conductivity in siemens/meter.

• µr is the conductor’s relative permeability.

• µ0 is the permeability of free space, which is equal to 4π x 10–7 H/m.

• Ht is the tangential component of H on the impedance boundary.

• Ht* is the complex conjugate tangential component of H on the impedance boundary.

Note: Keep in mind that an impedance boundary approximates the effect of eddycurrents acting at a shallow skin depth; it does not directly compute them. Ingeneral, the fields modeled using an impedance boundary will closely matchthe field patterns that would actually occur in the structure. However, the fieldpatterns may be different at discontinuities in the surface such as corners.

Current Sourceat 1 MHz

.5 m

Impedance Boundaryµr=1

σ=5.8x107

Outsideedge ofproblemregion

Pωµ0µr

8σ---------------- H t H t• ∗ sd

Sur∫= (Watts)












Go Back

Contents

Index


Matching boundaries in eddy current problems operate in a similar way to matchingboundaries in magnetostatic problems. The main thing to keep in mind is that the magni-tude, direction and phase of the magnetic field on the master boundary is imposed on theslave boundary. Setting the field on the slave boundary to point in the opposite directionfrom the field on the master boundary causes it to oscillate 180° out of phase.












Go Back

Contents

Index

Eddy Current SourcesThe conductors in an eddy current model can be divided into two groups:

• “Active” conductors. These conductors are connected to an external current source.Their total current is constrained to the value you specify.

• “Passive” conductors. These conductors are not connected to an external source, butcurrent may be induced in them. Treat any conductor in which the current isconstrained to zero (an open circuit) as being connected to a zero-amp currentsource.

Active and passive conductors are shown in the figure below. In this simple transformermodel, the coil on the left is an active conductor carrying 1500 amps of current. The coilon the right is a passive conductor in which current is induced by the oscillating magneticfield. The total current is plotted.

9.8310e+06 8.8579e+06 7.8848e+06 6.9117e+06 5.9386e+06 4.9655e+06 3.9924e+06 3.0193e+06 2.0462e+06 1.0731e+06 1.0000e+05

Active Passive












Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Active ConductorsNon-perfect (Resistive) Conductors Only

Define currents for active conductors using the Assign/Source commands. Available cur-rent sources for conductors in eddy current models include the following.

Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Sources

These types of sources specify the magnitude and phase of the AC current flowingthrough a conductor. They are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command.

• Solid current sources model eddy and displacement currents in a solid conductor. Theamount of eddy current and displacement current — as well as the amount of sourcecurrent — are included in the total current you specify.

• Stranded current sources model current as being carried on strands within aconductor. They can be used to model conductors made up of many individualinsulated turns, all small enough so that eddy currents can be neglected. Eddycurrents and displacement currents are not computed inside the conductor. Either thetotal current or the current density may be specified. A uniform current density isassumed throughout the conductor, unless a functional current density is defined.

• Parallel current sources connect two or more conductors in parallel to an outsidesource. The total current flowing through all selected conductors (including eddy anddisplacement currents) is specified. However, the current flowing through individualconductors in the parallel group is unconstrained and its value is computed during thesolution.












Go Back

Contents

Index

The differences between each type of AC current source are shown below:

For solid and parallel current sources, the current you specify is the total current in theconductor:

where:

• ITotal is the total current flowing through the source. It satisfies Ohm’s law with thepotential seen by the source.

• ISource is the current due to the potential difference generated by the external source.It is the current that the source would supply if you reduced the potential difference bythe back EMF produced by the eddy and displacement currents in the conductor.

• IEddy is the eddy current induced in the conductor due to time-varying magnetic fieldspenetrating the conductor.

• IDisplacement is the displacement current due to time-varying electric fields in theconductor. It becomes significant only at very high frequencies.

For stranded current sources, the current you specify is the total source current (or sourcecurrent density), Itotal = Isource. Eddy current and displacement current effects areneglected.

I(t)=i1(t)+i2(t)SolidStranded Parallel

SkinDepth

i1(t) i2(t)

i

R

i

R

Total current;includes eddyand displacementcurrents. Modelsskin effect.

Total current;no eddy ordisplacementcurrents. Uniformcurrent density.

Total current throughall selected conductors;includes eddy anddisplacement currents.Models skin effect.

ITotal ISource IEddy IDisplacement+ +=












Go Back

Contents

Index

Current Sources for Touching Conductors

Conductors whose surfaces touch are assigned sources as follows:

• If they are not assigned the same material, these conductors must be defined as aparallel source. Otherwise, they will behave as if they are separated by a thin layer ofinsulating material.

• If they are assigned the same material, these conductors may be defined either as aparallel source or as grouped conductors assigned a solid source.

This distributes current appropriately across the surfaces of the conductors.

Current Sources for Perfect Conductors

A perfect current source specifies the magnitude and phase of the AC current flowingthrough a perfect conductor. All currents in perfect conductors are surface currents, simu-lating the conductor’s behavior at very high frequencies. You can only specify the magni-tude and phase of the total current.

Perfect current sources are set via the Assign/Source/Solid command. Sheet currentsources cannot be defined for perfect conductors.

Current Sheets

This type of source specifies the magnitude and phase of the AC current on an edge —defining a current sheet. Eddy current effects are not modeled, since all currents are sur-face currents. Specify either the total surface current or the surface current density.

• The total surface current is assumed to be distributed uniformly across the edge.• The surface current density can be defined as a function of position or as a uniform

current density.

Surface currents are set via the Assign/Source/Sheet command.












Go Back

Contents

Index

Passive Conductors

Passive conductors can have eddy and displacement currents flowing through them, buthave no component of source current. Two types of passive conductors may be defined:

• To define a passive conductor modeling a short circuit, simply assign a conductingmaterial to the desired object. Do not assign source current to it. There are noconstraints on the eddy and displacement currents flowing in this type of passiveconductor. For cartesian models, visualize this type of conductor as being infinitelylong and eventually looping back on itself. For axisymmetric models, visualize thistype of conductor as a conducting ring that carries no source current.

• To define a passive conductor modeling an open circuit, assign a solid current sourcewith a magnitude and phase of zero to it. Current may be induced in it, but the netcurrent is constrained to zero amps. In cartesian models, visualize this type ofconductor as an infinitely long conducting rod with no return path for current. Inaxisymmetric models, visualize this type of conductor as a conducting ring with a gapin it.












Go Back

Contents

Index

Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems

Remember, all AC currents are time-varying quantities in the form:

where Im is the magnitude of the current and θ is its phase angle — the offset of the cur-rent from a pure cosine wave. Therefore, when specifying a current or current density, youmust enter both its magnitude and phase.

• In a single-phase system, time t=0 is usually chosen so that the phase angle, θ, iszero — that is, the current peaks at t=0.

• In multi-phase systems involving currents that are out of phase with each other, timet=0 is usually chosen so that one current has a phase angle equal to zero. Forexample, phase angles in a three-phase system could be assigned as shown here:

I Im ωt θ+( )cos=

120°

120°Phase A = Imcos(ωt+0°)

Phase C= Imcos(ωt+240°)

Phase B= Imcos(ωt+120°)

Real

Imaginary









Current SheetsPassive ConductorsSpecifying Phase In Sin-gle and Multi-PhaseSystems



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

DC Conduction Boundary ConditionsEach type of boundary condition has an effect on the fields and conduction currents inyour model.The following boundary types are available for DC conduction models:

• Default (Neumann and natural)• Value• Balloon• Symmetry• Resistance• Matching (Master and Slave)


The default boundary conditions for the DC conduction field solver are Neumann and Nat-ural boundaries. Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for an DC conductionmodel, all surfaces are set to one of the following:

• All outside edges and edges of objects that have been declared to be non-existent aredefined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, the tangential componentsof E(-vφ) and the normal components of J(σE) are continuous along the boundary. Onsuch boundaries, the normal component of E is zero, forcing it and the conductioncurrent, J, to be tangential to the boundary. As a consequence, current flow will alsobe tangential to the boundary — modeling the condition where no current is allowed toflow into the non-existent object or the area outside the solution region. Physically, thisrepresents the interface between a conducting area and a non-conducting area (like ahole in a plate), since materials whose conductivities are zero are automaticallyexcluded from the DC conduction solution.

• All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that E andJ are continuous across the object surface, according to the following relationships:

where:• Et is the electric field intensity tangential to the interface.• Jn is the conduction current density normal to the interface.Accept this boundary condition at all object interfaces where the potential is not

Et1 Et2=

Jn1 Jn2=

DC Conduction BoundaryConditions




Resistance BoundariesMatching (Master andSlave) Boundaries

DC Conduction SourcesAC Conduction BoundaryConditions

AC Conduction SourcesEddy Axial Boundary Condi-tions

Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

known.









Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Value Boundaries

Use value boundaries to set the electric scalar potential, φ, to a constant value on aboundary. The potential can also be defined as a function of position using math func-tions. Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the voltages on conduc-tors and outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between two objects toa potential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between the objects.


The behavior of conduction currents and the electric field on a value boundary dependson whether you define a constant or functional potential on the boundary.

• If the potential is constant, the tangential components of E(-vφ) and J(-σvφ) are zero,forcing them to be perpendicular to the boundary. The equipotential contours of φ arethen parallel to the boundary, as shown below:

• If the potential is a function of position, E and J may not be perpendicular to theboundary. It all depends on what type of math function was used to specify thepotential. The tangential components of E(-vφ) and J(-σvφ) on the boundary will not beequal to zero if φ is constantly changing on the boundary, and the equipotentialcontours of φ will not be parallel to the boundary.

Value boundary — V = 3 Volts

Defaultboundary

Defaultboundary

Defaultboundary

Value boundary — V = 0 Volts








Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Balloon Boundaries

Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly “infi-nitely” large — effectively isolating the model from other voltage sources.

Use the Assign/Boundary/Balloon command to assign this type of boundary to thebackground object of the model, provided that it is not included in the material setup. Visu-alize the background object as extending to infinity along the edges identified as balloonboundaries. The electric potential, φ, goes to zero at infinity. The lines of equal potentialare neither tangential to nor normal to a balloon boundary.

If the background is filled with a conductive material it will not be excluded. Then the bal-loon boundary can be assigned to the entire background object (as opposed to an edge)and the solution becomes valid.

The balloon boundary adds layers of large triangles outside the edges of the definedproblem region. These triangles have the same material property as the backgroundobject but have no relation to the object or material that borders the edge of the problemspace. A value boundary is placed at the outside edge of the balloon triangles. This isdesigned to move your boundary condition sufficiently away so that the fields in the prob-lem region are unconstrained.

Typically, assign a balloon boundary to all outside edges of the problem. It would beimpractical to balloon only part of an outside edge, because the “side” of the balloon trian-gles would be left with a Neumann boundary that acts as an even symmetry boundaryalong a line other than the edge. This “side” rests along a line running from the origin ofthe problem space through the endpoint of the selected edge.

Note: In electrostatic models, no value boundaries are placed for a zero-chargeballoon boundary. A Neumann boundary is placed at the outside edgeinstead.








Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Symmetry Boundaries

A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. use this type of bound-ary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in astructure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model — allowing you to con-serve computing resources. Two types of symmetry boundaries — Odd and Even — maybe defined for a DC conduction model.

Odd Symmetry

An “odd” symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative)of all voltages on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the otherside. E and J are perpendicular to this type of boundary. To define an odd symmetryboundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a volt-age of zero.

Even Symmetry

An “even” symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative)of the voltages on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side.E and J are tangential to this type of boundary. To define an even symmetry boundary, thesimulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary — acting as an electrical mirrorto the model.








Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Resistance Boundaries

A resistance boundary models a very thin layer of resistive material (such as that causedby deposits or oxidation on a metallic surface) on a conductor at a known potential. Usethis boundary condition when the resistive layer’s thickness is much smaller than the otherdimensions of the model.

For instance, in the following example, the resistive layer on the conductor is 5x10-6

meters thick. Since this is four orders of magnitude smaller than the dimensions of themodel, use a resistance boundary on the conductor to avoid having to create a very thinobject modeling the layer — which could cause problems when the Maxwell 2D generatesa mesh for the model and solves for its conduction currents.

To assign a resistance boundary, choose Assign/Boundary/Resistance. Specify thethickness and conductivity of the resistive material, and the potential of the conductor.Resistance boundaries can only be applied to outer boundaries and to the edges of

Conducting Plate

Conductor (V=10 Volts)

Conductor with

0.05 m 0.35 m

0.15 m

0.4 m

0.15 m

0.05 m

Resistive Layer(V=5 Volts, LayerThickness=5x10-6 m)

0.1 m








Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

excluded objects. (For example, the conductor with the resistive layer above would bedefined as an excluded object when assigning materials.)


Matching boundaries in DC conduction problems operate in a similar way to matchingboundaries in electrostatic problems. The main thing to keep in mind is that the magnitudeand direction of the electric field on the master boundary is imposed on the slave bound-ary.

DC Conduction SourcesThere are several different sources available for DC conduction models.

Solid Voltage

This type of source specifies the total DC voltage (electric potential) on a conductor. Volt-ages can be defined as constants or as functions; however, the voltage is assumed to beuniform over the source.


Edge Voltage

This type of source specifies the total DC voltage on the selected edge or edges. Voltagescan be defined as constants or as functions of position to model specific distributions ofpotential on a dielectric’s surface.







DC Conduction SourcesSolid VoltageEdge Voltage

AC Conduction BoundaryConditions


Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

AC Conduction Boundary ConditionsEach type of boundary condition has an effect on the fields and conduction currents inyour model.The following boundary types are available for AC conduction models:

• Default (Neumann and Natural)• Value• Balloon• Symmetry• Matching (Master and Slave)


The default boundary conditions for the AC conduction field solver are Neumann and nat-ural boundaries. Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for an AC conductionmodel, all surfaces are set to one of the following:

• All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, thetangential components of E(-vφ) and the normal components of J(-σvφ) arecontinuous along the boundary. On a boundary at the edge of the drawing region, thenormal component of E is zero, forcing the field to be tangential to the boundary. Theconduction current, J, is also tangential.

• All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that E andJ are continuous across the object surface, according to the following relationships:

where:• Et is the electric field intensity tangential to the interface.• Jn is the conduction current density normal to the interface.


Et1 Et2=

Jn1 Jn2=








Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Value Boundaries

Use value boundaries to set the electric scalar potential, φ, on a boundary. In AC conduc-tion models, the electric potential is a time-varying quantity in the form:

where φm is the magnitude of the potential and θ is its phase angle — its offset from apure cosine wave. Therefore, when specifying φ on a boundary, you must enter both itsmagnitude and phase. The magnitude and phase of the potential can also be defined as afunction of position using math functions.


Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the voltages on conductorsand outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between two objects to apotential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between the objects.

The behavior of the E-field on a value boundary depends on whether you define a con-stant or functional potential on the boundary.

• If the potential is constant, the tangential components of E(-vφ) and J(-σvφ) are zero,forcing them to be perpendicular to the boundary. The equipotential contours of φ arethen parallel to the boundary.

• If the potential is a function of position, E may not be perpendicular to the boundary. Itall depends on what type of math function was used to specify the potential. Thetangential components of E(-vφ) and J(-σvφ) on the boundary will not be equal to zeroif φ is constantly changing on the boundary, and the equipotential contours of φ will notbe parallel to the boundary.

Balloon Boundaries

Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly “infi-nitely” large — effectively isolating the model from other voltage sources.

Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to assign this type of boundary to the outside edgesof the model. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edgesidentified as balloon boundaries. The electric potential, φ, goes to zero at infinity. The linesof equal potential are neither tangential to nor normal to a balloon boundary.

φ t( ) φm ωt θ+( )cos=








Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Symmetry Boundaries

A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of bound-ary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in astructure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model — allowing you to con-serve computing resources. Two types of symmetry boundaries — Odd and Even — maybe defined for an AC conduction model.

Odd Symmetry

An “odd” symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative)of all voltages on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the otherside. J and E are perpendicular to this type of boundary. The field on one side of theboundary oscillates in the opposite direction from field on the other side of the boundary— that is, they are 180° out of phase. To define an odd symmetry boundary, the simulatorsets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a voltage of zero and a phaseangle of zero.

Even Symmetry

An “even” symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative)of the voltages on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side.J and E are tangential to this type of boundary. The field on both sides of the boundaryoscillates in the same direction — that is, in phase. To define an even symmetry bound-ary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary — acting as an electri-cal mirror to the model.


Matching boundaries in AC conduction problems operate in a way that is similar to match-ing boundaries in electrostatic problems. The main thing to keep in mind is that the magni-tude, direction and phase of the electric field on the master boundary is imposed on theslave boundary. Setting the field on the slave boundary to point in the opposite directionfrom the field on the master boundary causes it to oscillate 180° out of phase.








Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

AC Conduction SourcesThere are several sources available for AC conduction models.

Solid Voltage

This type of source specifies the magnitude and phase of the AC voltage (electric poten-tial) on a conductor. Voltages can be defined as constants or as math functions; however,the voltage is assumed to be uniform over the source.


Edge Voltage

This type of source specifies the magnitude and phase of the AC voltage on the selectededge or edges. Voltages can be defined as constants or as functions of position to modelspecific distributions of potential on the surfaces of dielectrics.


Note: Remember, all voltages in AC conduction models are time-varying quantitiesin the form:

where Vm is the magnitude of the voltage and θ is its phase angle — the off-set of the current from a pure cosine wave. Therefore, when specifying avoltage, you must enter both its magnitude and phase.

V t( ) V m ωt θ+( )cos=



AC Conduction SourcesSolid VoltageEdge Voltage

Eddy Axial Boundary Condi-tions

Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Eddy Axial Boundary ConditionsThe following boundary types are available for eddy axial models:

• Default (Neumann and Natural)• Value• Balloon• symmetry• Matching (Master and Slave)

This section describes each type of boundary condition and its effect on the fields andconduction currents in your model.


The default boundary conditions for the eddy axial field solver are Neumann and naturalboundaries. Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for an eddy axial model, allsurfaces are set to one of the following:

• All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, thetangential component of E is zero, forcing the electric field to be perpendicular to theboundary.

• All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that thetangential component of E and the normal component of J are continuous across theobject surface, according to the following relationships:

where:• Et(t) is the electric field tangential to the interface.• Jn(t) is the current density normal to the interface.


Et1 t( ) Et2 t( )=

Jn1 t( ) Jn2 t( )=



AC Conduction SourcesEddy Axial Boundary Con-ditions




Matching BoundariesEddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Value Boundaries

Use value boundaries to set the magnetic field, H, to a constant value on a boundary. Nor-mally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the strength of external magneticfields in a model — the only excitations available in the eddy axial field solver. Valueboundaries are sometimes called Dirichlet boundaries.

In eddy axial problems, the magnetic field is a time-varying quantity in the form:

where Hm is the magnitude of the potential and θ is its phase angle — its offset from apure cosine wave. Therefore, when specifying H on a boundary, you must enter both itsmagnitude and phase. The magnitude and phase of the magnetic field can also bedefined as a function of position using math functions. The eddy axial field solverassumes that H has a z-component only.

The behavior of the magnetic field on a value boundary depends on whether you define aconstant or functional value boundary.

• If HZ is constant, the electric field and conduction current will be tangential to theboundary.

• If the potential is a function of position, the partial derivatives of HZ with respect to xand y will not necessarily be zero. It all depends on what type of math function wasused to specify the potential. Thus, J may not be tangential to the boundary and somecurrent will cross it.

Balloon Boundaries

Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly “infi-nitely” large — effectively isolating the model from other magnetic field sources.

Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to assign this type of boundary to the outside edgesof the model. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edgesidentified as balloon boundaries. The magnetic field, HZ, goes to zero at infinity.

H t( ) Hm ωt θ+( )cos=










Go Back

Contents

Index

Symmetry Boundaries

A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of bound-ary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in astructure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model — allowing you to con-serve computing resources. Two types of symmetry boundaries — Odd and Even — maybe defined for an eddy axial model.

Odd Symmetry

An “odd” symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative)of all magnetic field sources on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those onthe other side. The resulting electric field is tangential to this type of boundary. The fieldon one side of the boundary oscillates in the opposite direction from the field on the otherside of the boundary — that is, they are 180° out of phase. To define an odd symmetryboundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a mag-netic field value of zero and a phase angle of zero.

Even Symmetry

An “even” symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative)of the magnetic sources on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on theother side. The magnetic field is perpendicular to this type of boundary. The field on bothsides of the boundary oscillates in the same direction — that is, in phase. To define aneven symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary.

Matching Boundaries

Matching boundaries in eddy axial problems operate in a similar way to matching bound-aries in magnetostatic and eddy current problems. The main thing to keep in mind is thatthe magnitude, direction and phase of the electric field on the master boundary isimposed on the slave boundary. Setting the field on the slave boundary to point in theopposite direction from the field on the master boundary causes it to oscillate 180° out ofphase.










Go Back

Contents

Index

Eddy Axial SourcesThe only sources available for the eddy axial field solver are applied magnetic fields.Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to define the boundary conditions modeling thesefields.




Eddy Axial Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Transient Boundary ConditionsEMpulse only.

In the transient solver, each type of boundary condition has an effect on the static mag-netic fields in your model. The following boundary types are available for transient models:

• Default (Neumann)• Value• Balloon• Symmetry• Matching (Master and Slave)


Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for a transient model, all surfaces areset to the following:

• All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, thenormal component of H is zero, forcing the magnetic field to be tangential to theboundary. (Usually, you will want to change the default outside boundary condition.)

• All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This means that the tangentialcomponent of H and the normal component of B are continuous across the objectsurface, according to the following relationships:

where:• Ht is the magnetic field intensity tangential to the interface.• Bn is the magnetic flux density normal to the interface.• Js is the surface current density.


Ht1 Ht2 Js+=

Bn1 Bn2=

Transient Boundary Condi-tions





Transient SourcesSolid CurrentSolid VoltageCurrent Sheet



Go Back

Contents

Index

Value Boundaries

Use value, or Dirichlet, boundaries to set the magnetic vector potential, AZ, to a constantvalue on a boundary. The potential can also be defined as a function of position usingmath functions. Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the potentialof conductors and outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between twoobjects to a potential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between theobjects.

Value boundaries are set using the Assign/Boundary/Value command.


Since the transient solver assumes that A has a z-component only and B lies in the xy-plane, the relationship of B to A is given by the following:

• If AZ is constant along a horizontal boundary, the partial derivatives of AZ with respectto x will be zero — forcing B to have an x-component only, and to be tangential to theboundary. Likewise, if AZ is constant along a vertical boundary, the partial of AZ withrespect to y will be zero — forcing B to have a y-component only and again indicatingthat the field will be tangential.

In general, the magnetic field will be tangential to any boundary on which AZ hasbeen set to a constant. This condition is shown in the following figure, where theright edge of the problem space has been defined as a value boundary with aconstant potential of -10 weber/meter and the left edge has been defined as a

A∇× B=

By∂

∂Az xx∂

∂Az y–=









Go Back

Contents

Index

value boundary with a constant potential of +10 weber/meter.

• If the potential is a function of position, the partial derivatives of AZ with respect to xand y will not necessarily be zero. It all depends on what type of math function wasused to specify the potential. Thus, B may not be tangential to the boundary and someflux will cross it.

3x

y

Flux Lines

1.0000e+01 9.0000e+00 8.0000e+00 7.0000e+00 6.0000e+00 5.0000e+00 4.0000e+00 3.0000e+00 2.0000e+00 1.0000e+00 0.0000e+00

Value Boundary Default (Neumann) Boundary Value Boundary

Balloon Boundary









Go Back

Contents

Index

Balloon Boundaries

Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly “infi-nitely” large — effectively isolating the model from other sources of current or magneticfields. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edges identifiedas balloon boundaries. The magnetic vector potential AZ goes to zero at infinity.

Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to assign this type of boundary to the outside edgesof the model.

A balloon boundary is shown on the bottom of the previous figure. As can be seen in thisfield plot, the lines of magnetic flux are neither tangential to nor normal to a balloonboundary.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Symmetry Boundaries

A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of bound-ary condition to take advantage of geometric and electrical symmetry in a structure. Doingso enables you to reduce the size of your model — allowing you to conserve computingresources. Two types of symmetry boundaries — Odd and Even — may be defined for amodel. Choose Assign/Boundary/Symmetry to define the symmetry boundaries.

Odd Symmetry

An odd symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) ofall currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the other side.The magnetic field is tangential to this type of boundary. To define an odd symmetryboundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a mag-netic vector potential of zero — acting as a magnetic mirror to the model.

For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below is modeled by an odd symmetry bound-ary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of the symmetryplane is the opposite of the current flow in the conductor on the right side of the plane (theside that is modeled):

3x

y

Flux Lines

6.3717e-05 5.7345e-05 5.0973e-05 4.4602e-05 3.8230e-05 3.1858e-05 2.5487e-05 1.9115e-05 1.2743e-05 6.3717e-06 0.0000e+00

Odd

Sym

met

ry B

ound

ary









Go Back

Contents

Index

Even Symmetry

An even symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative)of the currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side.The magnetic field is perpendicular to this type of boundary. To define an even symmetryboundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary.

For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below could be modeled by an even symme-try boundary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of thesymmetry plane is the same as that of the current flow in the conductor on the right sideof the plane (the side that is modeled):

3x

y

Eve

n S

ymm

etry

Bou

ndar

y









Go Back

Contents

More

Index


Matching boundaries allow you to take advantage of periodicity in a structure. For exam-ple, the following figure shows the cross-section of a DC motor. The field in such a motorrepeats itself every 120 degrees; that is, the field pattern in one third of the motor matchesthe magnitude and direction (or the opposite of the direction) of the field pattern in theother two thirds.

Matching boundaries force the magnetic field at each point on one boundary (the “slave”boundary) to match the magnetic field at each corresponding point on the other surface(the “master” boundary). Modeling one third of the structure allows you to make efficientuse of the available computing resources:

To define matching boundaries, you must define both a master matching boundary and aslave matching boundary using the Assign/Boundary/Master and Assign/Boundary/Slave commands. The condition that needs to be enforced, as illustrated in the followingfigure, is that the magnitude of the magnetic field at each point on the slave boundary sur-face must match the magnetic field at each corresponding point on the master boundarysurface. The field on the slave boundary must point in either the same direction or in theexact opposite direction as the field on the master boundary.

Note that a value, Neumann, or symmetry boundary cannot be used to simulate periodic-ity because the magnetic field is not necessarily either perpendicular or tangential to peri-

File Edit Reshape Arrange Object Constraint Model Window

pm_match [read-only]pm_motor [read-only]









Go Back

Contents

Index

odic surfaces. For example, in the quarter model shown below, the magnetic field isexactly perpendicular to the bounding surfaces only when the gap separating the perma-nent magnets is perfectly horizontal or vertical. For all other positions of the rotor, match-ing boundaries are required to take advantage of symmetry.

+

+

+—

—

—

S

S

N

N

Hm

Hs

+

+

+

+—

—

—

—

S

S

N

N

One-quarter of a periodic structure (DC motor) modeledusing matching boundaries.

Master

SlaveHm = Hs









Go Back

Contents

Index

Transient SourcesYou may assign solid or sheet sources to a transient model.

Solid Current

This type of source specifies the current flowing in a conductor. You can set either thetotal current or the current density flowing in the object.

• If total current is specified, the current density is assumed to be uniform throughoutthe object.

• If current density is specified, you may define a uniform current density or one thatvaries as a function of position.

Solid current sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command.

Solid Voltage

This type of source specifies the total voltage drop (electric potential) over the length of aconductor. Voltage drops can be defined as constants or as math functions; however, thepotential on a conductor is constant over the entire cross-section of the conductor. Notethat conductors that touch should be set to the same voltage or defined as a single volt-age source, since their potentials are identical.


Current Sheet

This type of source specifies the surface current on an edge or edges — defining a cur-rent sheet. You can set either the total surface current or the surface current density.

• If the total surface current is specified, the current density is assumed to be uniform.• If the surface current density is specified, you may define a uniform current density or

one that varies as a function of position to model specific distributions of current on thesurface.

Current sheets are defined using the Assign/Source/Sheet command.








Boundary Manager — Edit MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Edit Menu (Boundary Manager)Use the Edit commands to:

• Select objects to be assigned boundaries and sources.• Deselect objects.• Delete and undelete boundaries and sources.

When you choose Edit from the Boundary Manager menu bar, the following menuappears:

Edit Menu (Boundary Man-ager)

Boundary Manager EditCommands

Edit/Undo ClearEdit/ClearEdit/Select

Edit/Select/ObjectsEdit/Select/Objects/ByClicking

Edit/Select/Objects/ByArea

Edit/Select/Objects/ByName

Edit/Select/EdgeEdit/Select/TraceThings to ConsiderEdit/Select/Object Inter-sect

Edit/Deselect All



Go Back

Contents

Index

Boundary Manager Edit CommandsThe following commands appear in the Boundary Manager’s Edit menu:

Undo Clear Reverses the effect of the last Clear command.Clear Deletes the selected boundary.Select Selects items to be edited:

Object Selects all items in a rectangular area.Edge Selects the edge of an object.Trace Selects the trace layers.Object Intersect Selects the intersection of two objects.

Deselect All Deselects all selected objects.








Edit/Deselect All



Go Back

Contents

Index

Edit/Undo ClearChoose this command to reverse the effect of the Edit/Clear command. All boundaries inthe active project window that were deleted using the most recent Edit/Clear commandare restored and displayed in their original locations. The restored boundary remainsselected until you deselect them.

Edit/Undo Clear only restores boundaries deleted by the latest Edit/Clear command; itcannot restore boundaries deleted in previous Edit/Clear commands. It also cannotrestore boundaries after other boundaries have been cut, copied, or pasted.

Edit/ClearChoose this command to delete all selected boundaries.

> To clear items:1. Select the desired boundary by clicking on it or by using one of the Edit/Select

commands.2. Choose Edit/Clear. The selected boundaries are deleted from the screen.

Edit/Undo Clear restores the latest set of boundaries deleted with Edit/Clear. However,previously cleared boundaries are lost.








Edit/Deselect All



Go Back

Contents

Index

Edit/SelectUse the Edit/Select commands to select the items to which you will assign the bound-aries or sources. You can also select (and deselect) objects by clicking the left mouse but-ton on them. The number of selected items is displayed in the message bar at the bottomof the 2D Boundary/Source Manager window. The commands on the Edit/Select menuare listed below:

You must select an item or group of items with one of the Edit/Select commands beforeentering the commands in the following table. Selecting identifies the objects and text onwhich those commands act. The following commands require a selection in the BoundaryManager:

Object Selects items:By Clicking Selects objects by clicking on them.By Area Selects objects in a defined area.By Name Selects the object by choosing its name.

Edge Selects the geometric edge of an object.Trace Selects edges by tracing them with a polyline.Object Intersect Selects the intersecting region of two objects.

Edit Menu Assign Menu

Clear Boundary

Deselect All Source

End Connection








Edit/Deselect All



Go Back

Contents

Index

Edit/Select/Objects

Choose the Edit/Select/Objects commands to select the objects in the model to which toassign boundaries and sources.

Edit/Select/Objects/By Clicking

Choose this command to select or deselect individual objects by clicking on them.

> To select or deselect objects by clicking:1. Choose Edit/Select/Objects/By Clicking.2. Click on the object you wish to select or deselect.

The selected objects are highlighted.

Edit/Select/Objects/By Area

Choose this command to select all the objects contained within a specified area.

> To select objects in a defined area:1. Choose Edit/Select/Objects/By Area. The cursor changes to crosshairs.2. Click on a point that represents a corner of the region in which the objects will be

selected.3. Click on the point that represents the opposite corner.

The objects within the area are selected. Grouped objects are only selected if the entiregroup falls within the selected area.

Edit/Select/Objects/By Name

Choose this command to select individual objects by entering their names.

> To select all objects by name:1. Choose Edit/Select/Objects/By Name. A window appears.2. Enter the name of the object to select in the blank field. WIldcards and similar

expressions may also be entered in this field.3. Choose OK. The object is highlighted, indicating that it has been selected.

By Clicking Selects objects by clicking on them.By Area Selects objects in a defined area.By Name Selects the object by choosing its name.




Edit/Select/ObjectsEdit/Select/Objects/By Clicking

Edit/Select/Objects/By Area

Edit/Select/Objects/By Name


Edit/Deselect All



Go Back

Contents

Index

Edit/Select/Edge

Choose Edit/Select/Edge to select an object edge (a single straight or curved segment ofthe object’s outline) by clicking on it. This command can also be used to select edges ofthe background object.

> To select an edge (or edges):1. Choose Edit/Select/Edge.2. Move the cursor to the desired edge.3. Click the left mouse button. The system highlights the selected edge. If you select

an edge by mistake, you may deselect it by clicking on it a second time.4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional edges.5. To exit the command, click the right mouse button anywhere within the geometric

model’s display area.








Edit/Deselect All



Go Back

Contents

Index

Edit/Select/Trace

Choose Edit/Select/Trace to select object edges by tracing a line over them. This com-mand can also be used to select edges of the background object.

One difference between Edit/Select/Trace and Edit/Select/Edge is that while Edit/Select/Edge forces you to select the entire edge between two object vertices, Edit/Select/Trace allows you to trace along a portion of an edge, turn at the intersection withanother object, and follow the edge of the other object. Another distinction is that an edgemay be curved, but a trace must be comprised of straight line segments.

> To select object edges by tracing them:1. Choose Edit/Select/Trace.2. Move the cursor to one corner of an object edge and click the left mouse button.

The system anchors the trace-line at that corner.3. Move the cursor along the object edge to another object corner, possibly one from

another object that touches the first edge. Click the left mouse button again.4. Repeat step 3 to continue tracing along the desired path.

5. When you’ve finished outlining the desired boundary, click the left mouse buttontwice on the same corner.

Things to Consider

In general, use the Edit/Select/Edge command to select edges to be assigned matchingboundaries. If you select these edges using the Edit/Select/Trace command, you musttrace edges between object vertex points. If necessary, insert an extra vertex at the endpoint of the trace using the Reshape/Vertex/Insert command in the 2D Modeler.

Note: To delete the previously selected corner, click the right mouse button. If youattempt to delete a point when no other points are selected, the command iscancelled.








Edit/Deselect All



Go Back

Contents

Index

Edit/Select/Object Intersect

Choose Edit/Select/Object Intersect to select edges shared by two adjacent, closedgeometric objects. The objects must share at least part of one edge.

> To select the intersection of two object edges as a boundary:1. Choose Edit/Select/Object Intersect.2. Select the first object. You may select the background as an object if an adjacent

closed object lies on the edge of the background.

3. Select the second object.

The system selects those edges (or portions of edges) that are shared by the two objects.

Edit/Deselect AllChoose Edit/Deselect All to deselect any items that are currently selected.

To deselect individual items, toggle them using the Edit/Select/Object/By Clicking com-mand.

Note: To cancel this command while selecting objects, click the right mouse button.








Edit/Deselect All


Boundary Manager — Assign MenuTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Assign MenuAfter selecting the desired object(s) or edge(s) with the Edit/Select commands, use theAssign commands (shown below) to:

• Assign a boundary condition, defining the behavior of the electric or magnetic field onthat surface.

• Assign a voltage, current, or charge source.• Assign an end connection to the conductors in the model.

After assigning your boundaries or sources, you can define boundaries and sources thatuse mathematical functions.

When you choose Assign from the 2D Boundary/Source Manager menu bar, the follow-ing menu appears:


Setting Default BoundaryConditions

Assigning Boundary Condi-tions

Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Assign CommandsThe Assign commands are:

Depending on which field solver you selected, different types of boundary conditions andsources are available.

Boundary Assigns a boundary condition to a selected edge or object, specifyingthe behavior of the electric or magnetic field.

Source Assigns a distribution of voltages, charges, or currents to an object.EndConnection

EMpulse only. Assigns an end connection to the objects in the model.

Note: The sources and boundaries that you define with the Assign commands areused during all field, force, torque, current flow, and flux linkage solutions.However, during a matrix solution, the current or voltage sources assigned tothe conductors in the model are modified to enable the simulator to computethe inductance, capacitance, impedance, admittance, or conductance of thesystem.




Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

General Procedure> In general, to assign a boundary condition or source:

1. Select the desired edge(s) or object(s) using one of the Edit/Select commands.2. Do one of the following:

• To assign a boundary condition to the selected edge or object, choose one of theAssign/Boundary commands.

• To assign a source to the selected edge or object, choose one of the Assign/Source commands.

3. Enter the required information for the boundary or source (such as the value of theelectric or magnetic potential, the phase angle, the type of symmetry, the currentdensity, and so forth) in the fields that appear beneath the geometric model.• If boundary or source quantities are constant, enter the values for these

parameters in the appropriate fields.• If boundary or source quantities are to be defined using math functions, do the

following:a. Choose Options to identify which quantities are functional.b. Choose Functions to create math functions specifying the values of the

quantities.c. Choose Orientation to define each function’s orientation to the model’s

coordinate system.These commands appear beneath the boundary or source fields.

4. Choose Assign at the bottom left of the window to assign the specified boundarycondition or source to the selected edge.

Repeat this procedure for each boundary condition or source to be assigned.

Warning: In order to set up a valid problem, you must identify a source of electric ormagnetic field from the boundary conditions, sources, and materials that canserve as field sources.




Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Setting Default Boundary Conditions

By default, the outside edges of the problem region are defined as Neumann boundaries.The edges of objects are automatically defined as natural boundaries, which simplymeans that the electric or magnetic field is continuous across the edge. These defaultboundary conditions are set regardless of which solver you selected for the model.

> To reset a boundary or source to its default condition, do one of the following:• To completely delete the boundary or source, select it and choose Edit/Clear. The

edge resets to its default Neumann or natural boundary condition.• To delete the assigned boundary condition or source without deleting the boundary

itself, choose Assign/Boundary/Value. Deselect the Value option, and chooseAssign. The boundary then displays as an “unassigned” boundary and is reset to itsdefault boundary condition.

Assigning Boundary ConditionsThe boundary conditions that may be specified for each solver are listed in the followingtables. For detailed descriptions of these boundary conditions, click on the ones that areof interest to you:

• Electrostatic Boundary Conditions• Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions• Eddy Current Boundary Conditions• DC Conduction Boundary Conditions• AC Conduction Boundary Conditions• Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions• Transient Boundary Conditions


Setting Default Bound-ary Conditions

Assigning Boundary Con-ditions

Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

BoundaryType Magnetic Field Behavior Used to model...

Neumann B and H are perpendicular to the outer edges ofthe problem space.

Default outer boundary condition.

Natural Normal components of B and tangential compo-nents of H are continuous across the edge.

Default boundary betweenobjects.

Value(Dirichlet)

Sets the magnetic vector potential, AZ or rAφ, onthe boundary. The behavior of H depends onwhether AZ or rAφ is constant or functional.

Outer boundaries at specific vec-tor potentials; externally appliedmagnetic fields.

Balloon Models the case where the structure is “infi-nitely” far away from other magnetic fields orcurrent sources.

Magnetically isolated structures.

EvenSymmetry

H is perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns (plus or minus) of all cur-rents are the same on both sidesof the boundary.

OddSymmetry

H is tangential to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns (plus or minus) of all cur-rents are opposite to those on theother side of the boundary.

“Master”MatchingBoundary

H has the same magnitude and direction (or thesame magnitude and opposite direction) on themaster boundary and all slave boundaries thatare assigned to it.

Planes of symmetry in periodicstructures where H is neither tan-gential to nor perpendicular to theboundary.

“Slave”MatchingBoundary

The H-field on the boundary is forced to matchthe magnitude and direction (or opposite direc-tion) of the H-field on the master boundary towhich it is assigned.

Planes of symmetry in periodicstructures where H is neither tan-gential to, nor perpendicular to,the boundary.




Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

BoundaryType Electric Field Behavior Used to Model...

Neumann E and D are tangential to the boundary. Default outer boundary.

Natural E is continuous across the boundary. Default boundary betweenobjects.

Value Sets the electric potential, φ, on the boundary.The behavior of E depends on whether φ is con-stant or functional.

Boundaries at known voltages.

Balloon Two options are available:• Charge — The charge at “infinity”

balances the charge in the drawingregion. The net charge is zero.

• Voltage — The voltage at “infinity” is zero.

Electrically insulated structures(Charge option) or electricallygrounded structures (Voltageoption).

EvenSymmetry

E is tangential to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns (plus or minus) of all volt-ages and charges are the sameon both sides of the boundary.

OddSymmetry

E is perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns (plus or minus) of all volt-ages and charges on one side ofthe boundary are opposite thoseon the other side.


E has the same magnitude and direction (or thesame magnitude and opposite direction) on themaster boundary and all slave boundaries thatare assigned to it.

Planes of symmetry in periodicstructures where E is neither tan-gential to nor perpendicular to theboundary.


The E-field on the boundary is forced to matchthe magnitude and direction (or opposite direc-tion) of the E-field on the master boundary towhich it is assigned.





Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

BoundaryType Eddy Current Field Behavior Used to model...

Neumann B(t) and H(t) are perpendicular to theouter edges of the problem space


Natural Normal components of B(t) and tangentialcomponents of H(t) are continuous.

Default boundary between objects.

Value(Dirichlet)

Sets the magnetic vector potential, AZ(t) orrAφ(t), on the boundary. The behavior ofH(t) depends on whether AZ(t) or rAφ(t) isconstant or functional.

Outer boundaries at specific vectorpotentials; externally applied magneticfields.

Balloon Models the case where the structure isinfinitely far away from other magneticfields or current sources.


EvenSymmetry

H(t) is perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where the signs(plus or minus) of all currents are thesame on both sides of the boundary.

OddSymmetry

H(t) is tangential to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where the signs(plus or minus) of currents are oppositethose on the other side of the boundary.


H(t) has the same magnitude, phase, anddirection (or the same magnitude andopposite direction and phase) on the mas-ter all assigned slave boundaries.

Planes of symmetry in periodic struc-tures where H(t) is neither tangential tonor perpendicular to the boundary.


The H-field on the boundary is forced tomatch the magnitude and direction (oropposite direction) of the H-field on themaster boundary to which it is assigned.

Planes of symmetry in periodic struc-tures where H(t) is neither tangential tonor perpendicular to the boundary.

Impedance Includes the effect of induced currentsbeyond the boundary surface.

Conductors whose skin depths are verytiny compared to the dimensions of therest of the structure.




Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

BoundaryType AC Conduction Behavior Used to model...

Neumann E and J are tangential to the boundary. Default outer boundary condition.

Natural E and J are continuous across the boundary. Default boundary between objects.

Value Sets the electric potential, φ, on the bound-ary. The behavior of E and J depends onwhether φ is constant or functional.

Boundaries at known voltages.

Balloon Models the case where the structure is “infi-nitely” far away from other voltage sources.

Electrically grounded structures,where ground is a long way off.

Resistor The effect of a thin layer of resistive materialon fields and conduction currents is com-puted.

Very thin resistive layers on conduc-tors at known voltages.

EvenSymmetryBoundary

E and J are tangential to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns of the voltages are the sameon both sides of the boundary.

OddSymmetryBoundary

E and J are perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns (plus or minus) of voltages onone side of the boundary are oppo-site those on the other side.


E has the same magnitude and direction (orthe same magnitude and opposite direction)on the master boundary and all slave bound-aries assigned to it.



The E-field on the boundary is forced tomatch the magnitude and direction (or oppo-site direction) of the E-field on its assignedmaster boundary.





Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Boundary Type DC Conduction Field Behavior Used to model...

Neumann E(t) and J(t) are tangential to the boundary. Default outer boundary condition.

Natural E(t) and J(t) are continuous across the bound-ary.


Value Sets the electric potential, φ, on the boundary.The behavior of E(t) and J(t) depends onwhether φ is constant or functional.

Boundaries at known voltages andphases.

Balloon Models the case where the structure is “infi-nitely” far away from other voltage sources.

Electrically grounded structures.

Resistor Computes the effect of a thin layer of resistivematerial on fields and conduction currents.

Very thin resistive layers on con-ductors with known voltages.

EvenSymmetryBoundary

E(t) and J(t) are tangential to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns of all voltages are the sameon both sides of the boundary.

OddSymme-tryBoundary

E(t) and J(t) are perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns (plus or minus) of all voltageson one side of the boundary areopposite those on the other side.


E(t) has the same magnitude, phase, and direc-tion (or the same magnitude and oppositephase and direction) on the master boundaryand all slave boundaries that are assigned to it.

Planes of symmetry in periodicstructures where E(t) is neither tan-gential to nor perpendicular to theboundary.


The E-field on the boundary is forced to matchthe magnitude, phase, and direction (or oppo-site phase) of the E-field on its assigned masterboundary.

Planes of symmetry in periodicstructures where E(t) is neither tan-gential to nor perpendicular to theboundary.




Sources



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

BoundaryType Eddy Axial Field Behavior Used to model...

Neumann E(t) and J(t) are perpendicular to the outeredges of the problem space.


Natural Tangential components of E(t) and J(t) arecontinuous.


Value(Dirichlet)

Sets the magnetic field, HZ(t), on the bound-ary. HZ(t) can be constant or functional.

External magnetic fields (the only“sources” that can be defined foreddy axial models).



EvenSymmetry

E(t) is perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns (plus or minus) of all fieldsare the same on both sides of theboundary.

OddSymmetry

E(t) is tangential to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns (plus or minus) of all fieldsare opposite to those on the otherside of the boundary.


E(t) has the same magnitude, phase, anddirection (or the same magnitude and oppo-site direction) on the master boundary andall slave boundaries that are assigned to it.

Planes of symmetry in periodicstructures where E(t) is neithertangential to nor perpendicular tothe boundary.


The E-field on the boundary is forced tomatch the magnitude and direction (or oppo-site direction) of the E-field on the masterboundary to which it is assigned.

Planes of symmetry in periodicstructures where E(t) is neithertangential to nor perpendicular tothe boundary.




Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

BoundaryType Transient Field Behavior Used to model...

Neumann B and H are perpendicular to the outer edges ofthe problem space.


Natural Normal components of B and tangential compo-nents of H are continuous across the edge.

Default boundary betweenobjects.

Value(Dirichlet)

Sets the magnetic vector potential, AZ, on theboundary. The behavior of H depends onwhether AZ is constant or functional.

Outer boundaries at specific vec-tor potentials; externally appliedmagnetic fields.



EvenSymmetry

H is perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns (plus or minus) of all cur-rents are the same on both sidesof the boundary.

OddSymmetry

H is tangential to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where thesigns (plus or minus) of all cur-rents are opposite to those on theother side of the boundary.


H has the same magnitude and direction (or thesame magnitude and opposite direction) on themaster boundary and all slave boundaries thatare assigned to it.

Planes of symmetry in periodicstructures where H is neither tan-gential to nor perpendicular to theboundary.


The H-field on the boundary is forced to matchthe magnitude and direction (or opposite direc-tion) of the H-field on the master boundary towhich it is assigned.

Planes of symmetry in periodicstructures where H is neither tan-gential to, nor perpendicular to,the boundary.




Sources



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Sources

The types of sources that may be specified for each solver are listed in the tables below.Click here for detailed explanations of the sources available for each type of mode.

Permanent magnets also act as sources of magnetic fields.

Some of the electric field sources include the following:

Magnetic Source Type of excitation

Current or perfectcurrent

DC current flowing in an object (either the total current orthe current density).

Current sheet or per-fect current sheet

DC surface current on an edge or edges (either the totalsurface current or the surface current density).

Electric Source Type of excitation

Voltage Total DC voltage on a closed geometric object.

Edge voltage Total DC voltage on an edge.

Charge Charge on an object (total charge or charge density). Theobject’s potential is computed during the solution.

Charge sheet Charge on an edge (total charge or charge density). Theedge’s potential is computed during the solution.




Sources



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Permanently polarized materials also act as sources of electric field.

The following DC conduction sources are available.

AC ConductionSource Type of excitation

Current sheet orperfect currentsheet

Magnitude and phase of AC surface current on an edge oredges (either the total current or the current density).

Current orperfect current

Magnitude and phase of AC current flowing in an object. Canbe one of the following:• Solid — Models eddy currents in a conductor.• Parallel — Connects two or more conductors in parallel

to an outside source. The total current flowing throughall selected conductors (including eddy currents) isspecified.

• Stranded — Models current as being carried onstrands within the conductor, with no eddy ordisplacement currents. Either the total current or thecurrent density may be specified. Current density isuniform, unless a functional current density is defined.

Eddy effects are not modeled in a perfect conductor, but cur-rent is distributed on its surface so that no fields penetrate.

DC ConductionSource Type of Excitation

Voltage Total DC voltage on a closed geometric object.

Edge voltage Total DC voltage on an edge.




Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

The following AC voltage sources are available:

The following eddy axial source is available:

(EMpulse only.) The following transient sources are available:

(Thermal only.) The following thermal sources are available:

AC Voltage Source Type of Excitation

Voltage Magnitude and phase of the AC voltage on a closed geo-metric object.

Edge voltage Magnitude and phase of the AC voltage on an edge.

Eddy Axial Source Type of Excitation

Applied magneticfield

Magnitude and phase of an external magnetic field (definedusing boundary conditions).

Transient Source Type of Excitation

Solid Current or voltage on a closed geometric object.

Sheet DC surface current on an edge or edges (either the totalsurface current or voltage or the surface current density).

Transient Source Type of Excitation

Solid Heat source on a closed geometric object.

Sheet Heat source sheet on an edge or edges.




Sources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Assign/BoundaryAfter selecting the desired edges or objects using the Edit/Select commands, chooseone of the Assign/Boundary commands to define the behavior of the electric and mag-netic fields on that surface. Available boundary conditions are:

Depending on which field solver you selected, not all of the boundary conditions listedhere will be available. If you selected the thermal solver, none of these options will appear.The field solvers to which a particular boundary condition applies are listed next to thedescription of that command.

Value Sets the value of the electric scalar potential, magnetic vector poten-tial, or magnetic field on the boundary. (The specific field quantitydepends on which solver you selected.)

Balloon Models the case in which the structure is far away from external fields.Symmetry Models a plane of symmetry in which the electric or magnetic field is

either perpendicular or tangential to a boundary.Impedance (Eddy current.) Models the effects of eddy currents in conductors with

tiny skin depths, allowing you to simulate induced currents and energylosses without having to explicitly solve for currents inside the conduc-tor.

Resistance (DC conduction.) Models a very thin resistive layer on a conductor at aknown potential, allowing you to model its presence without explicitlydrawing it.

Master Defines a “master” matching boundary. Matching boundaries are usedto model symmetry planes in periodic structures where the field pat-tern on one boundary matches the magnitude and direction (or oppo-site direction) of the field pattern on another boundary. The fieldpattern on a master boundary is imposed on the “slave” boundariesthat are assigned to it.

Slave Defines a “slave” matching boundary. The field pattern on a slaveboundary is forced to match the magnitude and direction (or the oppo-site direction) of the field pattern on the master boundary to which it isassigned.

Assign/BoundaryAssign/Boundary (Ther-mal)

Assign/Boundary/ValueAssign/Boundary/Symme-try

Assign/Boundary/BalloonAssign/Boundary/Resis-tance

Assign/Boundary/Imped-ance

Assign/Boundary/MasterAssign/Boundary/Slave



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Assign/Boundary (Thermal)

Thermal solutions only.

When solving a thermal problem, choose Assign/Boundary to define the thermal bound-ary conditions for the objects in the model.

When you choose Assign/Boundary, the following window appears:

> To define the thermal settings:1. Select the object to which to assign the thermal boundary condition.2. Choose Assign/Boundary. New fields appear below the viewing window.3. Enter a Name for the boundary condition or accept the default.4. Select a Color for the boundary.5. Select Temperature, and enter a new temperature for the model in the blank field.

Temperature is entered in degrees C.6. Select Convection & Radiation and define the convention and radiation settings.7. Select Flux Boundary, and enter a new value for the thermal flux density in W/m2.








Go Back

Contents

Index

8. Optionally, choose Options and select which values are to be made functional.Choose OK when you have finished defining the options.

9. Optionally, choose Functions and define any functional values for the boundaryconditions. Choose Done when you have finished defining the functional values.

10.Choose Assign to assign the boundary condition to the selected object.

Remember that you must assign a heat sink to correspond to the thermal sources.

Convection & Radiation> To define the convection and radiation characteristics:

• Select Convection & Radiation, and define the heat sinks by entering the followingvalues:• Convection Cff. This is the convection coefficient, which typically ranges from 5 to

15. This value depends on factors such as the roughness of the surface of theobject, or the object’s orientation (vertical or horizontal). The factor increases forobjects which can dissipate heat more efficiently.

• Eff Radiation. This is the effective radiation which varies between 0 (for noradiation) and 1 (for a perfectly radiating black-body).

• Reference Temp. This is the reference temperature, in degrees C.• Alpha Factor. This is the power factor for the radiation and temperature quantity

which varies between 0 and 1.

Note: The thermal solver cannot solve natural convection for objects surroundedby air. To solve these types of problems, exclude the air background in theMaterial Manager and assign a convection and radiation boundary in theBoundary Manager using an effective radiation of zero. The thermal rise of agiven object will be independent from the temperature of any nearby objects.








Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Assign/Boundary/Value All solvers

Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to:

• Set the value of the electric scalar potential, magnetic vector potential, or magneticfield on the boundary. The field quantity that is set depends on which solver youselected. For eddy current, AC conduction, and eddy axial models, you can alsospecify the phase angle of the field at the boundary (relative to the phase of othersources in the problem).

• Reset the boundary to its default, “unassigned” state (a Neumann boundary).

For a more detailed explanation of how a value boundary works for a particular field solver— including how it affects the electric or magnetic field — see the description of thatsolver’s boundary conditions. The field quantities that may be set on a value boundary areshown below:

Solver Field Quantity set on Value Boundary

Electrostatic Voltage (the electric potential, φ).

Magnetostatic AZ for XY models; rAφ for RZ models. (Magnetic vector potential).

Eddy Current AZ(t) for XY models; rAφ(t) for RZ models. (Magnetic vector potential).

Eddy Axial HZ(t) (Magnetic field). Note that external magnetic fields are the onlytype of electromagnetic source that can be defined for eddy axialmodels.

DC Conduction Voltage (The electric potential, φ).

AC Conduction Voltage (The electric potential, φ(t)).

Transient (EMpulse only.) AZ for XY models. (The magnetic vector potential.)








Go Back

Contents

More

Index

> After identifying an edge or object using one of the Edit/Select commands, do thefollowing to define it to be a value boundary:1. Choose Assign/Boundary/Value. The fields shown below appear at the bottom of

the Boundary Manager window. (The example shown is for an eddy currentproblem; however, similar fields appear for other types of models.) Additionally, aname (such as value1 or value2) is assigned to the new boundary — and appearsin the list of boundary names.

The field quantity to be set on the boundary (in the figure above, the magneticvector potential, AZ) is listed next to a check box. If an AC field quantity is beingcomputed, fields for entering the magnitude and phase of the field quantity on theboundary appear; if a DC field quantity is being computed, a single field forentering its value appears.

2. Leave the check box next to the field quantity selected to set its value on theboundary.

3. Set the voltage, vector potential, magnetic potential, or magnetic field on theboundary:• If you selected the Electrostatic, Magnetostatic, Transient, or DC Conduction

solver for the model, enter the value of the field quantity on the boundary in theValue field.

• If you selected the Eddy Current, Eddy Axial, or AC Conduction solver for themodel, do the following:

Note: To reset the boundary to its default, “unassigned” state (a Neumann or natu-ral boundary), click on the check box to deselect it.








Go Back

Contents

Index

a. Enter the magnitude of the field quantity on the boundary in the Magnitudefield.

b. Enter its phase angle (relative to other sources in the model) in the Phasefield. Phase angles are entered in degrees.

You can specify constant or functional values for the magnitude and/or phase ofthe field quantity on the boundary.

4. Choose Assign to record the value of the potential on the boundary or Cancel tocancel the boundary assignment.








Go Back

Contents

Index

Assign/Boundary/Symmetry All Solvers

Choose Assign/Boundary/Symmetry to define a plane of symmetry on the edge of theproblem space. Two types of symmetry are available:

After selecting an edge of the drawing region using the Edit/Select commands, you candefine that edge as a symmetry boundary.

> To define a symmetry boundary:1. Choose Assign/Boundary/Symmetry. The fields Even and Odd appear beneath

the geometric model. In addition, a name (such as symmetry1 or symmetry2) isassigned to the edge that you have selected — and appears in the list of boundarynames.

2. Select the type of symmetry (Even or Odd) to be defined on the boundary.3. Select Assign to define the boundary or Cancel to cancel the boundary

assignment.

Even Models the case in which the sign (plus or minus) of all currents, voltages, andcharges is the same on both sides of the boundary. In such cases, the electricfield is tangential to the boundary and the magnetic field is perpendicular to theboundary. The fields on both sides of an even symmetry boundary will oscillatein the same direction (in phase) in AC field simulations.

Odd Models the case in which the sign (plus or minus) of all currents, voltages, andcharges on one side of the boundary is opposite that on the other side. In suchcases, the electric field is perpendicular to the boundary and the magnetic fieldis tangential to the boundary. The fields on each side of an odd symmetryboundary will oscillate in the opposite direction (180° out of phase) in AC fieldsimulations.


Assign/Boundary/ValueAssign/Boundary/Sym-metry






Go Back

Contents

Index

Assign/Boundary/Balloon All Solvers

Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to model the case in which the empty space aroundthe structure extends infinitely out into space — isolating it from other sources of electricor magnetic fields. Balloon boundaries can only be assigned to outside edges of themodel.

> To assign a balloon boundary:1. Select one or more edges of the drawing region to which to assign a balloon

boundary.2. Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon. A name, such as balloon1 or balloon2, is

assigned to the group of edges that you have selected — and appears in the list ofboundary names.

3. If you selected Electrostatic as the solver for your model, choose one of thefollowing balloon boundary types:• Select Charge to model the case in which the charge at infinity balances the

charge in the drawing region, forcing the net charge to be zero (an electricallyinsulated system).

• Select Voltage to model the case in which the voltage at infinity is zero (anelectrically grounded system). In most cases, the results will be very similar to thatproduced with the Charge option; however, the charge at infinity may not exactlybalance the charge in the drawing region.

4. Select Assign to assign the balloon boundary to the selected edge or Cancel tocancel the boundary assignment.

If all four edges of the drawing region have been defined to be balloon boundaries, visual-ize the drawing region — that is, the background — as extending to “infinity” in all direc-tions. If only one, two, or three edges have been defined to be balloon boundaries,visualize the background as extending to infinity in those directions alone.



Assign/Boundary/Bal-loon

Assign/Boundary/Resis-tance





Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Assign/Boundary/Resistance DC Conduction

Choose Assign/Boundary/Resistance to model a very thin layer of a resistive materialon a conductor at a known voltage. Use this type of boundary when the thickness of theresistive layer is very tiny in comparison to the model’s dimensions. You do not need toexplicitly draw the resistive layer; instead, you specify its thickness and conductivity whenyou define the boundary. The Maxwell 2D then simulates the behavior of conduction cur-rents and the electric field as if the layer was actually present.

This type of resistance boundary can only be used on outer boundaries or on non-existent(excluded) objects such as conductors.

> To define a resistance boundary:1. Choose Assign/Boundary/Resistance. The following fields appear beneath the

geometric model. A name (such as resistance1 or resistance2) is assigned to thegroup of edges you have selected, and is listed in the boundary names:

2. Enter the Thickness of the resistive layer (in meters).3. Enter the conductivity (σ) of the resistive layer in the Cond field.

4. Enter the conductor’s voltage in the Value field.5. Select Assign to assign the resistance boundary to the selected edge or Cancel

to cancel the boundary assignment.

Note: To define the conductivity or thickness using math functions, follow theinstructions under Functional Boundaries and Sources.








Go Back

Contents

Index

Assign/Boundary/ImpedanceEddy Current

Choose Assign/Boundary/Impedance to model the effect of eddy currents in conduc-tors with very small skin depths. Use this type of boundary when the conductor’s skindepth is very small compared to the dimensions of the model. Modeling thin skin depthwith impedance boundaries lets you simulate induced surface currents and energy losseswithout having to actually compute the currents inside the conductor.

This impedance boundary condition can only be assigned to a selected edge of the prob-lem space.

> To define an impedance boundary:1. Choose Assign/Boundary/Impedance. The following fields appear beneath the

geometric model. Additionally, a name (such as impedance1 or impedance2) isassigned to the group of edges that you have selected — and appears in the list ofboundary names.

2. Enter the conductor’s conductivity (σ) under Cond.3. Enter its relative permeability (µr) under Rel. Perm.

4. Select Assign to assign the impedance boundary to the selected edge or Cancelto cancel the boundary assignment.

Note: To define the conductivity or relative permeability as math functions, followthe instructions under Functional Boundaries and Sources.




Assign/Boundary/Impedance




Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Assign/Boundary/Master All Solvers

Choose Assign/Boundary/Master to define a “master” matching boundary. Matchingboundaries are used to model periodic structures in which the E-field or the H-field hasthe same magnitude and direction (or the same magnitude and opposite direction) on oneor more boundaries.

The field on a master boundary is imposed on all slave boundaries assigned to it. In eddycurrent, AC conduction, and eddy axial problems, the fields on the master and slaveboundaries are in phase if the directions match, or 180° out of phase if the directions areopposite.

> To define a master matching boundary:1. Select an outside edge of the drawing space.2. Choose Assign/Boundary/Master. The following fields appear beneath the

geometric model. A name (such as master1 or master2) is assigned to the groupof edges that you have selected, and appears in the list of boundary names:

3. Select Master.

Warning: The following restrictions apply to master boundaries:•A master boundary can only be assigned to a continuous outside edge

of the model; it cannot be assigned to the entire edge of a closedobject.

•The edge to be assigned a master boundary must lie between twoobject vertex points. If necessary, insert additional vertices to serveas end points for the master boundary.

•Master boundaries must be defined before slave boundaries.•A master boundary must be associated with at least one slave.





Assign/Boundary/Mas-ter

Assign/Boundary/Slave



Go Back

Contents

Index

4. The start point and end point of the master boundary must correspond to the startpoints and end points of all slave boundaries assigned to it. If these points wereselected in the opposite order of the slave boundaries, choose Swap Points toswap the beginning and end points of the master boundary so that theycorrespond to the start and end points of its slave boundaries.

5. Select Assign to assign the master boundary to the selected edge or Cancel tocancel the boundary assignment.

Initially, the master boundary is listed as an “unassigned” boundary, since its slave bound-aries have not yet been created. When you create a slave boundary to be assigned to amaster boundary, the word master appears next to the boundary name. Remember, eachmaster boundary must have at least one corresponding slave boundary.

During the field and parameter solutions, the field on the slave boundaries you selectedwill be forced to match the magnitude and direction (or the magnitude and opposite direc-tion) of the field on the master boundary.

Warning: The mesh on a master boundary must be identical to the mesh on all slaveboundaries assigned to it. Otherwise, the field solution will not match on theboundaries. To match the meshes, you must manually refine the model’sfinite element mesh after defining matching boundaries.> To create identical meshes on master and slave boundaries:

1. Under Setup Solution Options, choose Manual Mesh to accessthe 2D Meshmaker.

2. Generate a finite element mesh using the Mesh/Make command.3. Use the Mesh/Line Match command to identify the master and

slave boundary lines where the mesh is to be matched.





Assign/Boundary/Mas-ter

Assign/Boundary/Slave



Go Back

Contents

Index






Assign/Boundary/SlaveAll Solvers

Choose Assign/Boundary/Slave to define a “slave” matching boundary. The E-field or H-field of the slave boundary is forced to match the magnitude and direction (or oppositedirection) of the E-field or H-field on the master boundary to which it is assigned.

> To define a slave matching boundary:1. Define the master boundary to which the slave boundary is to be assigned, using

the Assign/Boundary/Master command.2. Select an outside edge of the drawing space using one of the Edit/Select

commands.3. Choose Assign/Boundary/Slave. The fields shown below appear beneath the

geometric model. A name (such as slave1 or slave2) is assigned to the group ofedges that you have selected — and appears in the list of boundary names. Themost recent master matching boundary that has been created is listed. It is the oneto which the slave boundary will be assigned.

4. To specify the direction of the field on the slave boundary, select one of thefollowing:

Warning: The following restrictions apply to slave boundaries:• They can only be assigned to continuous outside edges of the model,

and cannot be assigned to the entire surface of closed objects.• The edge to be assigned a slave boundary must lie between two

object vertex points. If necessary, insert additional vertices to serveas end points of the slave boundary.

• Master boundaries must be defined before slave boundaries.• Multiple slave boundaries can be assigned to a master boundary.



Go Back

Contents

Index






• Choose Slave = +Master to force the field on the slave boundary to have the samemagnitude and direction as the field on the master boundary. In eddy current, eddyaxial, and AC conduction problems, this causes the fields to be in phase.

• Choose Slave = -Master to force the field on the slave boundary to point in theopposite direction from the field on the master boundary. In eddy current, eddyaxial, and AC conduction problems, this causes the fields to be 180° out of phase.

5. The start point and end point of a slave boundary must correspond to the startpoint and end point of the master boundary to which it is assigned. If these pointswere selected in the opposite order from the master boundary, choose SwapPoints to swap the beginning and end points of the slave boundary so that theycorrespond to the start and end points of its master boundary.

6. Select Assign to assign the slave boundary to the selected edge or Cancel tocancel the boundary assignment.

When you define a slave boundary, the word slave appears next to its name in the list ofboundary conditions. During the field and parameter solutions, the field on the slaveboundary will be forced to match the magnitude and direction (or the magnitude andopposite direction) of the field on the master boundary to which it is assigned.

Warning: The mesh on a slave boundary must be identical to the mesh on the masterboundary that is assigned to it. Otherwise, the field solution will not match onthe boundaries. To match the meshes, you must manually refine the model’sfinite element mesh after defining matching boundaries.> To create identical meshes on master and slave boundaries:

1. Under Setup Solution Options, choose Manual Mesh to accessthe 2D Meshmaker.

2. Generate a finite element mesh using the Mesh/Make command.3. Use the Mesh/Line Match command to identify the master and

slave boundary lines where the mesh is to be matched.



Go Back

Contents

Index

Assign/SourceChoose Assign/Source to define specific values for voltages, currents, and charges inyour model. Two general types of sources are available:

Different types of sources may be defined for each field solver.

Solid Assigns a source to a closed geometric object. You can specify either thetotal current, charge or voltage, or a current or charge density. Unless oth-erwise specified, currents or charges are assumed to be distributedthroughout the object. Voltage is assumed to be uniform across the entireobject, but is only actually set on the edges.

Sheet Assigns a source to a selected edge or edges. You can specify the totalcurrent, charge, or voltage on the surface, or the surface current or chargedensity. Unless otherwise specified, sources are assumed to be distributeduniformly on the selected edge.

Note: Sources for eddy axial models — external magnetic fields — cannot be setusing these commands. They must be defined using value boundaries.

Assign/SourceAssign/Source/SolidAssign/Source/Sheet

Assign/End ConnectionFunctional Boundaries andSources



Go Back

Contents

Index

Assign/Source/Solid

Choose Assign/Source/Solid to assign an electromagnetic source to a selected object.This command is only available if a closed object (including the background) is selected.The following types of sources are available depending on the field solver selected:

• The total charge on an object (electrostatic models).• The total current or current density in an object (magnetostatic and eddy current

models). In eddy current models, you can specify whether the current source isstranded, solid, or in parallel; additionally, all currents are phasors.

• The total voltage on an object (electrostatic, DC conduction, and AC conductionmodels). All voltages are phasors in AC conduction models.

> In general, to assign a solid source to an object:1. Select the desired object(s) using the Edit/Select command.

2. Choose Assign/Source/Solid. Fields for the source parameters appear. A namesuch as source1 is automatically assigned to the object you selected.

3. Enter the required information for the type of source you wish to set:

4. Choose Assign to assign the source to the selected object or Cancel to cancel thesource assignment.

Note: For eddy current problems with parallel current sources where two or moreconductors are connected in parallel, you must select more than one object toenable the parallel source button.

Solid Charge Sources Defines charge sources for electrostatic models.Solid Voltage Sources Defines voltage sources for electrostatic, DC conduction,

and AC conduction models.Solid DC Current Sources Defines current sources for magnetostatic modelsSolid AC Current Sources Defines current sources for eddy current modelsTransient VoltageSources

RMxprt only. Defines voltage sources on transient, time-stepping models.

Transient CurrentSources

RMxprt only. Defines current sources on transient, time-stepping models.

Thermal Define the thermal source.





Go Back

Contents

Index

Solid Charge Sources

Electrostatic

Solid charge sources behave differently for conductors and dielectrics.

Charges on Conductors (Floating Conductors)

When you are defining a solid charge source on a conductor (that is, a floating conduc-tor), fields such as the following ones appear:

> To define the total charge on a conductor:1. Select Floating Charge as the source type.2. Enter the charge on the conductor in coulombs in the Value field. You may specify

the charge using a math function.

3. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the assignment.

Note: Charge is distributed on the surface of a floating conductor, and arrangesitself so that there is no electric field inside the conductor. If you attempt todefine the total charge as a function of position, an error message appears.However, charges can be defined as constant functions (for instance, if youare performing a parametric analysis).


Solid Charge SourcesSolid Voltage SourcesTransient VoltageSources

Solid DC CurrentSources

Solid AC CurrentSources


Solid Thermal SourcesAssign/Source/Sheet

Charge SheetsCurrent SheetsEdge VoltagesThermal Sheet Sources




Go Back

Contents

Index

Charges on Dielectrics

When you are defining a solid charge source for a non-conducting object, fields such asthe following ones appear:

> To specify the charge on the object:1. Select one of the following:

2. Enter the charge or charge density in coulombs in the Value field. You may specifythe charge using a math function.


Total Specifies the total charge on the object.Density Specifies the charge density in the object.

Note: If a constant value is entered for the charge on the object, it is assumed to beuniformly distributed throughout a dielectric.

All charges can be defined as constant functions (for instance, if you are per-forming a parametric analysis). The charge density can also be specified asa function of position. However, if you attempt to define the total charge as afunction of position, an error message appears.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Solid Voltage Sources

Electrostatic, AC Conduction, DC Conduction

When you are setting a voltage source, fields similar to the following ones appear:

> To define a solid voltage source:1. Choose Voltage as the source type. If a perfect conductor is selected as the

voltage source, choose Perfect Voltage as the source type. This simply meansthat the voltage will be distributed evenly across the conductor and that the entireconductor is at the same potential. The source will have no resistance or powerloss in AC conduction or DC conduction simulations.

2. Do one of the following:• If you are setting voltages in an electrostatic or DC conduction model, enter the

voltage on the selected object in the Voltage field.• If you are setting voltages in an AC conduction model, enter the magnitude of the

voltage in the Magnitude field, and its phase in the Phase field.


Note: In electrostatic problems, no fields are computed inside conductors. Definingthe voltage on a solid electrostatic voltage source as a function of positioncauses the surface potential to vary according to the function you defined.











Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Transient Voltage Sources

Transient only

When you are setting sources for a transient problem, the following fields appear:

> To define a transient voltage source:1. Select Voltage as the source.2. Select one of the following source types:

3. Optionally, choose Options to define the property options as either a Constantvalue or a Function.

4. Optionally, choose Functions to access the Boundary/Source Symbol Tableand define any functional values for the voltage.

5. Enter the voltage in the Value field.6. If you selected Strand, choose Winding and define the windings in the Winding

Setup for Boundary name window that appears.

Solid Assumes total current in the object, including both eddy currents anddisplacement currents.

Strand Assumes that current is carried on an infinite number of strands withinthe conductor. Eddy currents and displacement currents are neglected.











Go Back

Contents

Index

7. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the source assignment.

Note: The magnitude and phase of the following types of sources cannot be speci-fied as a function of position:• Solid AC current sources.• Parallel AC current sources.• Stranded AC current sources, where the total current is specified.However, these current sources can be defined using constant functions (forinstance, if you are performing a parametric analysis).

The magnitude and phase of the current density in stranded transient currentsources may be defined as functions of position.











Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Winding Setup

Choose the Winding Setup for Boundary name window to define the winding parame-ters:

> To define the windings:1. Select an object from the object list to which you will assign a polarity. Optionally,

you can use the Select menu to execute multiple selections.2. Select one of the following polarities for the selected object:

3. Choose Assign to assign the polarity to the object.4. Enter the Initial Current. This is the current of the terminal, in amperes.5. Enter the terminal Resistance and Inductance.6. Optionally, select Capacitance to include the capacitance values in the solution

and enter the value in the Capacitance field.7. Optionally, select Y-Connect with other windings to force the selected winding to

connect with other defined windings.8. Enter the Total turns as seen from the terminal. This is the number of turns,

Positive Defines positive polarity.Negative Defines negative polarity.Function Defines a functional polarity. Choose Functions and use the Boundary/

Source Symbol Table to define the functions.











Go Back

Contents

Index

starting from the terminal.9. Enter the Number of parallel branches.10.Optionally, choose Options. The Winding Property Options window appears:

a. Select which values are either constant or functions for the TerminalResistance, Terminal End Leakage Inductance, and Capacitance.

b. Choose OK to accept the definitions or Cancel to ignore the settings. Thewindow closes.

11.Choose OK to accept the winding information or Cancel to cancel the action

You return to the 2D Boundary/Source Manager window.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Solid DC Current Sources

Magnetostatic

When you are defining a current source in a magnetostatic model, you can define eitherthe total current or the current density in the conductor, using the following fields:

> To specify the DC current flowing in an object:1. Select one of the following:

If you are setting a Perfect Current source, you may only specify the total current.2. Enter the total current (in amperes) or the current density (in amperes per square

meter) in the Value field.


Total Specifies the total current in the object.Density Specifies the current density in the object.

Note: The total current is assumed to be evenly distributed throughout the conductoridentified as a current source. An error message appears if you attempt todefine it as a function of position. However, you can define the total current asa constant function (for example, if you are doing parametric analysis).

The current density may be defined as a function of position, representing anon-uniform current density in the object.











Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Solid AC Current Sources

Eddy Current

When you are setting sources for an eddy current problem, the following fields appear:

> To define an AC current source:1. Select one of the following source types:

If you are assigning current to a perfect conductor (a Perfect Current source), youmay only specify the total current.

2. If you selected Stranded, choose one of the following:

Total is automatically selected for Solid and Parallel sources.3. Enter the total current (in amperes) or the current density (in amperes per square

meter) in the Value field.

Solid Specifies the total current in the object — including eddy currents anddisplacement currents.

Stranded Assumes that current is carried on strands within the conductor. Eddycurrents and displacement currents are neglected.

Parallel Specifies the total current carried in two or more conductors con-nected in parallel to a source — including eddy currents and displace-ment currents. Available only if multiple conductors are selected.

Total Specifies the total source current carried in the conductor.Density Specifies the source current density in the conductor.











Go Back

Contents

Index

4. Enter the phase angle of the current (in degrees) in the Phase field.


Note: The magnitude and phase of the following types of sources cannot be speci-fied as a function of position:• Solid AC current sources.• Parallel AC current sources.• Stranded AC current sources where the total current is specified.However, these current sources can be defined using constant functions (forinstance, if you are performing a parametric analysis).

The magnitude and phase of the current density in stranded AC currentsources may be defined as function of position.











Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Transient Current Sources

Transient only

When you are setting sources for a transient problem, you have the option of defining thesource type and current type.

> To define a transient current source:1. Select Current as the source.2. Optionally, select External Connection, then Edit/External Circuit to access

Schematic Capture and modify the circuit model in that module. When you selectExternal Connection, all entry fields associated with Current become inactive.

3. Select one of the following source types:

4. Select one of the following:

5. Optionally, choose Options to define the current source as either a Constantvalue or a Function.

6. Optionally, choose Functions to access the Boundary/Source Symbol Tableand define any functional values for the voltage.

7. Enter the total current or the current density in the Value field.8. If you selected Strand and Total, choose Winding and do the following in the

Solid Specifies the total current in the object, including eddy currents and dis-placement currents. If you select this, you must use the Total source cur-rent for the conductor.

Strand Assumes that current is carried on an infinite number of strands withinthe conductor. Eddy currents and displacement currents are neglected.

Total Specifies the total source current carried in the conductor, in amps.Density Specifies the source current density in the conductor, in amps/m2.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Winding information window that appears:

a. Select one of the following polarities for the object:

b. Choose Assign to assign the polarity to the object.c. Enter the Total turns as seen from the terminal.d. Enter the Number of parallel branches.e. Choose OK to accept the winding definitions or Cancel to ignore them.


Solid Thermal Sources

Thermal only.

Choose Assign/Source/Solid to define the thermal settings for your problem.

> To define the solid thermal source:1. Select the object to which to assign the source.2. Choose Assign/Source/Solid. New fields appear below the view window.3. Select Heat Source. The Value field becomes active.4. Select Total to define the total source or Density to define the source density.5. Enter the Value of the selected thermal source and choose OK.

Positive Defines positive polarity.Negative Defines negative polarity.Function Defines a functional polarity. Choose Functions and use the

Boundary/Source Symbol Table to define the functions.






Solid ThermalSources

Assign/Source/SheetCharge SheetsCurrent SheetsEdge VoltagesThermal Sheet Sources




Go Back

Contents

Index

Assign/Source/Sheet

Choose Assign/Source/Sheet to assign an electromagnetic source to a selected edge orthe surface of a selected object. Depending on which field solver you selected, the follow-ing types of sources may be assigned:

• A charge sheet (electrostatic). The total charge or charge density on the surface maybe specified.

• A current sheet (magnetostatic, transient, and eddy current). The total current orcurrent density on the surface may be specified. All currents are phasors in eddycurrent models.

• The voltage on an object or edge (electrostatic, DC conduction, and AC conduction).All voltages are phasors in AC conduction models.

> In general, to assign a source to an object’s surface or an edge:1. Select the desired object or edge using one of the Edit/Select commands.2. Choose Assign/Source/Sheet. Fields for the source parameters appear.3. Enter the required information for the type of source you wish to set:

4. Choose Assign to assign the source to the selected edge or object, or Cancel tocancel the assignment.

Charge Sheets Defines charge sheets for electrostatic models.Current Sheets Defines current sheets for magnetostatic, eddy current, and

transient models.Edge Voltages Defines an edge as a voltage source for electrostatic, DC

conduction, or AC conduction problems.Thermal Defines sheet sources for the objects in thermal models.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Charge Sheets

Electrostatic

If you are defining a charge sheet for an electrostatic problem, the following fields appear:

> To define a charge sheet:1. Select Floating Charge Sheet as the source type.2. Enter the charge on the edge in coulombs in the Value field. You may define the

charge using a math function (for example, if it is a function of position).3. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the assignment.











Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Current Sheets

Magnetostatic, Eddy Current, Transient

Current sheets sources are defined differently in different models. The fields shown hereare for defining current sheets in eddy current models:

The fields shown here are for defining current sheets in magnetostatic models:











Go Back

Contents

Index

> To specify the surface current on an edge (a current sheet):1. Select one of the following:

2. Do one of the following:• If you are defining a current sheet in a magnetostatic or transient model, enter the

total current (in amperes) or the current density (in amperes per square meter) inthe Value field.

• If you are defining a current sheet in an eddy current model, enter the magnitude ofthe current (in amperes) or the current density (in amperes per square meter) inthe Magnitude field and its phase angle (in degrees) in the Phase field.


Total Specifies the total current on the edge.Density Specifies the current density on the edge.

Note: The total current is assumed to be evenly distributed across the selectededge, and thus cannot be specified as a function of position. However, thecurrent density on an edge may be defined as a function of position.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Edge Voltages

Electrostatic, DC Conduction, AC Conduction

When you are defining an edge as a voltage source, fields such as those shown belowappear. The fields shown are for an AC conduction model. This command operates thesame way for these solvers as the Assign/Source/Solid command, except that you canuse it to assign voltages to edges as well as to closed objects.

> To define an edge as a voltage source:1. Select Voltage as the source type.2. Do one of the following:

• If you are setting sources for a DC conduction or electrostatic model, enter thevoltage on the selected edge in the Voltage field.

• If you are setting sources for an AC conduction model, enter both the Magnitudeand Phase of the voltage on the selected edge.

You may define the voltage or its phase as a function of position.3. Choose Assign to assign the voltage source or Cancel to cancel the voltage

source assignment.











Go Back

Contents

Index

Sheet Thermal Sources

Thermal only.

Choose Assign/Source/Solid to define the thermal settings for your problem.

> To define the solid thermal source:1. Select the object to which to assign the source.2. Choose Assign/Source/Solid. New fields appear below the view window.3. Select Heat Source Sheet. The Value field becomes active.4. Select Total to define the total source or Density to define the source density.5. Enter the Value of the selected thermal source and choose OK. The source is now

defined.







Charge SheetsCurrent SheetsEdge VoltagesThermal SheetSources




Go Back

Contents

Index

Assign/End ConnectionTransient only

Choose this command to assign an end connection to a group of solid objects. Thiscauses all objects in the group to be connected electrically in parallel using a finite resis-tance and inductance between adjacent objects.

End connections are primarily used in passive conductors (with no source currentassigned) when modeling cylindrical squirrel cage induction motors.

> To assign an end connection:1. Select the object(s) to which to assign an end connection. There will be only one

object if you have previously grouped the objects.2. Choose Assign/End Connection. If you select an object to which a boundary or

source has already been assigned, a message appears, warning you that theexisting boundary or source will be incorporated into the new boundary. Do one ofthe following:• Choose Yes to continue.• Choose No to cancel the assignment.The warning message closes. New fields appear below the view window.

3. Optionally, select Passive end-connected conductor.a. Enter the End resistance between adjacent conductors.b. Enter the End inductance between adjacent conductors.

4. Enter a Name for the end connection.5. Choose the Color of the connection from the color palette.6. Choose Assign to assign the connection to the model or Cancel to cancel the

assignment.





Go Back

Contents

Index

Functional Boundaries and SourcesFunctional boundaries and sources are used to do the following:

• Define the value of a boundary or source quantity (such as the voltage, magneticvector potential, or charge density) using a mathematical relationship — such as onerelating its value to that of another quantity.

• Define the value of the voltage, current density, or charge density as a function ofposition.

• If parametric analysis capability was purchased, identify which boundary or sourcequantities are to be varied during a parametric sweep. These variables are always setto constant values.

Note: The following cannot be defined as functions of position:• In magnetostatic models, the total DC current flowing on an edge or

through a conductor.• In electrostatic models, the total charge on a floating conductor.• In eddy current models, the magnitude and phase of the total AC

current flowing on an edge or though a solid or parallel currentsource.


Assign/End ConnectionFunctional Boundariesand Sources

General ProcedureOptionsFunctions

Modifying a FunctionDeleting a Function

OrientationSpecifying Function Ori-entation



Go Back

Contents

Index

General Procedure> In general, to define a functional boundary or source:

1. Select the desired edge(s) or object(s) using one of the Edit/Select commands.2. Assign the desired boundary condition or source using one of the Assign

commands.3. While defining the boundary or source, choose Options to identify which boundary

or source quantities are constant, and which are functional.4. Choose Functions to define math functions that describe the boundary’s behavior.5. Enter the appropriate function name as the value for the desired property.6. If desired, choose Orientation to specify the function’s alignment with the

boundary or source’s local coordinate system. This is useful when definingfunctions that act at an angle to the local coordinate system, or have an origin thatis different from that of the local coordinate system.

Options

Choose Options to identify which field quantities on a boundary or source vary accordingto mathematical functions, and which are constant. A window appears listing the availablefields.

Set the desired field to Constant or Functional, then choose OK.

Constant The field’s value is constant over the boundary or source (the default).Functional The field’s value is given by a math function.








Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Functions

Choose Functions to define mathematical functions that give the value of the potential,current density, charge density, and so forth. The following window appears:

> In general, to define a function:1. Enter the function name in the field to the left of the equals sign.2. Enter the numeric value or mathematical expression for the function in the field to

the right of the equals sign.

3. Choose Add or press Return. The function is then listed in the following fields:

4. When you have finished adding functions, choose Done.

You can now use the created functions to specify the value of the desired boundary orsource quantities. Once defined, a function may be used with any boundaries or sources.

Note: The pre-defined variables X, Y, PHI, and R (XY problems); R, Z, THETA, andRHO (RZ problems); or P, S, and T (transient problems) enable you to defineboundary and source quantities as a function of their position in the geome-try. These variables must be entered in capital letters.

For more rules information on defining expressions and datasets, consult theonline documentation on the Expression Evaluator.

Name The name of the function.Value The numeric value of the function (if applicable).Expression The function expression.








Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Modifying a Function> To modify an existing function:

1. Select the function.2. Change the desired variables, operators, intrinsic functions, and so forth.3. Choose Update. The updated function is displayed.

Optionally, you may choose Datasets to define a new expression before modifying or cre-ating the function.

Deleting a Function> To delete a function:

1. Highlight the desired function.2. Choose Delete.

The selected function is deleted.

Orientation

All functions that define the values of field quantities on boundaries or sources use theboundary or source’s local coordinate system. The local coordinate system is used toevaluate field quantities that vary in magnitude or direction according to their position onthe boundary or source. It also specifies the origin and orientation of boundary or sourcequantities.

Initially, the boundary or source’s local coordinate system is aligned with the geometricmodel’s global coordinate system. To simplify defining field quantities that do not act in thedirection of the global coordinate system, use the Orientation command to specify thefollowing:

• The angle at which the x-axis of the boundary’s local coordinate system lies in relationto the global x-axis. This lets you define field quantities on the boundary that act at anangle to the coordinate system.

• The origin of the boundary’s local coordinate system, if different from that of the globalcoordinate system. This lets you define functions of position that do not have the sameorigin as the global coordinate system.

For example, suppose that the voltage on the top edge of the object in the following figurevaries according to the relationship V=2.5*X, with the voltage at Point A equal to zero. Ifyou did not draw the geometric model so that the x-coordinate of Point A was zero, this








Go Back

Contents

Index

function would have to be defined as V=2.5*(X-A), where A is the x-coordinate of thepoint. In more complicated functions, taking this offset into account would make the func-tion more difficult to define.

To simplify the function, change its orientation so that it is evaluated with its origin atPoint A. The x value of this point will then be equal to zero.

Voltage = 2.5*X

New origin of source’s local coordinate system

Origin of model’s coordinate system

Edge voltage source

V

x

u

v

y

x

Point A








Go Back

Contents

Index





OrientationSpecifying FunctionOrientation

Specifying Function Orientation> To specify the orientation of a function on a boundary or source:

1. Define the function and assign it to the desired boundary or source.2. Choose Orientation. The following window appears:

3. Select one of the following:

4. If you selected Align with a given direction, enter the angle (in degrees) of thecoordinate system in the Angle field.

5. Enter the coordinates of the new origin for the boundary’s local coordinate systemin the X and Y fields. By default, the origin is the center of the global coordinatesystem.

6. Choose OK to confirm the orientation or Cancel to cancel the orientation.

Align with an object’sorientation

Aligns the source or boundary’s local coordinate system withthe x-axis of the object’s local coordinate system.

Align with a givendirection

Aligns the source or boundary’s local coordinate system atan angle to the object’s coordinate system. This optionenables you to define a boundary property that acts at anangle to the local coordinate system.



Go Back

Contents

Index


Maxwell 2D — Setup Executive ParametersTopics:

Go Back

Contents

Index

Setup Executive ParametersChoose Setup Executive Parameters from the Executive Commands menu to requestthat one or more of the following quantities be computed during the solution:

• A capacitance, inductance, impedance, conductance, or admittance matrix.• The net torque on an object or group of objects.• The net force on an object or group of objects.• The current flow across a line or set of lines.• The magnetic or electric flux linkage across a line or set of lines.• A post-processing macro, which enables you to perform computations using the post-

processing calculators during the solution process.• The core loss on an object or group of objects.

A menu of all available executive parameters appears when you select this command.Choose the parameter to compute and enter the appropriate information in the windowthat appears. A check box appears next to all parameters that have already beenselected:

Setup Executive Parame-ters

Executive Parameters Com-mands

ForceCore LossMatrixTorqueFlux LinesCurrent FlowPost Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

Index

Executive Parameters CommandsThe Executive Parameters commands are as follows:

Force Requests that the net force on the selected objects or group ofobjects be computed.

Core Loss Requests that the core losses on the selected objects be computed.

Torque Requests that the net torque on the selected objects or group ofobjects be computed. Torques are computed about an anchor pointthat you specify.

Flux Lines Defines the flux lines in the problem.

Post ProcessorMacro

Executes an existing post-processing macro.

Current Flow Requests that the current flow be computed across a line you specify.

Matrix Requests that a capacitance, inductance, impedance, admittance, orconductance matrix be computed for the selected conductors in themodel.

Matrix/Flux (Magnetostatic, Eddy Current.) Defines any inductance matrix andflux linkage calculations.

Select MatrixEntries

Defines the entries to use in the matrices.

Select Matrix/Flux Entries

(Magnetostatic, Eddy Current.) Defines the entries to use in thematrices, including flux entries. Either all or none of the flux linkageobjects will be added to the matrix, based on your settings.

Setup Executive ParametersExecutive ParametersCommands

Available ParametersForceCore LossMatrixTorqueFlux LinesCurrent FlowPost Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

Index

Available Parameters

Depending on the solver type selected, different executive parameters are available.

Solver Available Executive Parameters

Electrostatic Matrix (capacitance); Force; Torque (XY only).

Magnetostatic Matrix (inductance); Force; Torque (XY only); Flux Linkage.

Eddy Current Matrix (impedance); Force; Torque (XY only); Flux Linkage.

AC Conduction Matrix (admittance); Current Flow.

DC Conduction Matrix (conductance); Current Flow.

Eddy Axial Current Flow.

Transient None.

Thermal None.

Setup Executive ParametersExecutive ParametersCommands

Available ParametersForceCore LossMatrixTorqueFlux LinesCurrent FlowPost Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

ForceElectrostatic, Magnetostatic, Eddy Current

Choose Force from the Setup Executive Parameters menu to find the total force on anobject or group of objects due to the distribution of the electric or magnetic field in thedevice.The system uses the principle of virtual work to compute force. The exact processfor computing force depends on which field solver you selected for the model.

When you choose Setup Executive Parameters/Force, the following window appears:

> To set up a force computation:1. Select the objects (or groups of objects) for which force is to be computed. To

select an object, click the left mouse button on its name or on the correspondingobject in the geometric model. Alternatively, use the Select commands to select

Note: For cartesian models, the units are given in newtons per meter depth.For axisymmetric models, the units of force are given in newtons.

Setup Executive ParametersExecutive Parameters Com-mands

ForceViewing the Force Solution

Core LossMatrixTorqueFlux LinesCurrent FlowPost Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

conductors by name, by area, and so forth.

2. Choose one of the following under Include Selected Objects:

3. When you finish, choose Exit. You are prompted to save your changes.• Choose Yes to save the force setup and exit.• Choose No to exit without saving.• Choose Cancel to stay in the Force window.

You return to the Executive Commands menu. If you saved the force setup, a checkappears next to the Force command on the Setup Executive Parameters menu.

Viewing the Force Solution

If you selected Parameters from the Setup Solution menu, the simulator computes theforce on the selected objects at the end of each adaptive field solution. To view the resultsof the force solutions, do one or both of the following:

• To display the force values computed after each pass (to see if force is converging toa stable value), choose Convergence from the Executive Commands menu.

• To view the final force solution, choose the Solutions/Force/Torque command fromthe Executive Commands menu. This lets you see the magnitude, direction, and the x-and y-components of the force.

Note: The objects that you select should be able to move freely. If an object isphysically attached to another object, you must select both to get a meaning-ful force calculation.If you choose more than one object, the objects are assumed to be rigidlyconnected — the final result is the force acting on all specified objects.

Yes Includes the selected objects in the force computation.No Removes the selected objects from the force computation.


ForceViewing the Force Solu-tion

Core LossMatrixTorqueFlux LinesCurrent FlowPost Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

Index

Core LossEddy Current

Choose Core Loss from the Setup Executive Parameters menu to find the total coreloss on an object or group of objects due to the distribution of the electric or magnetic fieldin the device.

When you choose Setup Executive Commands/Core Loss from the Executive Com-mands menu, the following window appears:


ForceCore Loss

Computing Core LossMatrixTorqueFlux LinesCurrent FlowPost Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Computing Core Loss

Core loss can be computed on any object in the model and is based on the type of corematerial used in the model. Either electrical sheet steel or power ferrites can be used.

> To set up a core loss calculation:1. Select the objects to include in the core loss calculation from the Objects list.2. Select Compute Core Loss on Object. New fields below the view window

become active.3. Select Electrical steel or Power ferrite from the pull-down menu as the material

type on which to base the core loss.The core loss for electrical steel is based on:

where:• Kh is the hysteresis coefficient.• Kc is the classical eddy coefficient.• Ke is the excess or anomalous eddy current coefficient due to magnetic domains.• Bmax the maximum amplitude of the flux density.• f is the solution frequency.The power ferrite core loss is based on:

where:• Cm is constant value determined by experiment.• f x is the solution frequency.• By

max is the maximum amplitude of the flux density.4. For Electrical Steel, do the following:

• Enter the Hysteresis coefficient, Kh, for the core.• Enter the Classical Eddy coefficient, Kc, for the core.• Enter the Excess coefficient, Ke, for the core.

5. For Power Ferrite, do the following:• Enter the experimental constant in the Cm field.• Enter the Steinmetz x-exponent in the Steinmetz exponent, x field.• Enter the Steinmetz y-exponent in the Steinmetz exponent, y field.

p KhBmax2

f Kc Bmax f( )2Ke Bmax f( )1.5

+ +=

p Cm fxBmax

y=


ForceCore Loss




Go Back

Contents

Index

6. Select the Core Loss Unit from the pull-down menu. Depending on themanufacturer of the core materials, the loss coefficients and constants can haveunits of W/lb, W/kg, W/m3, or kW/m3.

7. Enter the Mass Density of the selected material type. This quantity is entered inkg/m3. This is used for the core loss units of W/lb or W/kg.

8. Do one of the following to specify the solution frequency:• Select Use solution frequency (the default) to use the frequency specified in the

Solve Setup window as the solution frequency.• Select Use object frequency and enter the Frequency for the object. Optionally,

you may modify the units for the entered value using the pull-down menu to theright of the field.

9. Optionally, select View Curve to display the core loss curve. When you select this,the Bmin and Bmax fields become active, allowing you to enter new values. Bminand Bmax define the minimum and maximum core loss values for the curve.Choose Refresh at any time to refresh the core loss plot with the new values. Bydefault, View Model is selected, allowing you to observe the model in the viewwindow.

10.Choose Assign to assign the core loss settings to the object or Revert to revert tothe object’s default values.

When you assign the settings to the object, Yes appears in the Included list, and all fieldsbelow the view window become inactive.

Note: For laminated cores made of electrical sheet steel, the conductivity of thecore should be set to 0 in the Material Manager. This will correctly model thelaminations and produce the correct EM loss value in the calculator. Youshould also set the conductivity to 0 for power ferrite cores. This will correctlymodel a solid ferrite core and produce the correct EM loss in the calculator.


ForceCore Loss




Go Back

Contents

More

Index

MatrixElectrostatic, Magnetostatic, DC Conduction, AC Conduction, Eddy Current

Choose Matrix from the Setup Executive Parameters menu to request that one of thefollowing matrices be computed during the solution process. For a detailed description ofthe physical meaning of these quantities — as well as a description of how they are com-puted, consult the Technical Notes.

A window similar to the following one appears when you select this command. All objects

Matrix Solver Type

Admittance (Y-matrix) AC Conduction

Capacitance (C-matrix) Electrostatic

Conductance (G-matrix) DC Conduction

Impedance (Z-matrix) Eddy Current

Inductance (L-matrix) Magnetostatic

Note: If parallel current sources are used, the impedance matrix will not be correct.


ForceCore LossMatrix

Specifying a Return Pathfor Current

Specifying Signal andGround Lines

Viewing the Matrix Solu-tion

TorqueFlux LinesCurrent FlowPost Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

Index

in the model are listed on the left side of the window:

> To set up a matrix computation:1. Select the conductors (or groups of conductors) to include in the matrix.2. Choose Include in Matrix.3. Do one of the following:

• If you are computing an inductance matrix (magnetostatic) or an impedance matrix(eddy current), identify the return path for current in the computation.

• If you are computing a capacitance matrix (electrostatic), a conductance matrix(DC conduction), or an admittance matrix (AC conduction), identify whether theconductors are Signal Lines or Grounds.

4. Choose Assign to include the selected conductors in the matrix computation.5. When you finish selecting conductors for the matrix, choose Exit. You are

prompted to save your changes.• Choose Yes to save the matrix setup you’ve just entered and exit.• Choose No to exit without saving.• Choose Cancel to stay in the Matrix window.

If you saved the matrix setup, a check box appears next to the Matrix command on theSetup Executive Parameters menu.









Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Specifying a Return Path for Current

If you are setting up an inductance or impedance matrix computation, you must specifythe return path for current in the device that’s being modeled. All conductors that can beused as return paths are listed beneath Include in Matrix.

By default, current in an inductance or impedance computation is considered to flow intothe plane being modeled. It returns along an outside balloon, value (Dirichlet) or odd sym-metry boundary — as shown here.

As an alternative, you can identify a conductor in the model to serve as a current returnpath. For instance, if current is to return along the ground plane in the microstrip modelbelow, identify that object as the current return path.

isource

ireturn

ireturn ireturn

ireturn

ireturn

isource









Go Back

Contents

Index

> To define the return path for current in the matrix computation, do one of the following:• To use the default return path for current, choose Default.

• To identify a specific conductor as the current return path, highlight that conductor.

During the general field solution, the currents in conductors are defined by the boundaryconditions and sources specified under Setup Boundaries/Sources. However, duringthe matrix subsolutions, the currents in the conductors are defined by the matrix setup.

• During each subsolution, one ampere of current is allowed to flow through a singleconductor — a different conductor in each subsolution. No current flows through theother conductors.

• During all of the subsolutions, -1 ampere of current flows in the return path —modeling the current that’s returning from the matrix conductor.

Conductors that are not included in the matrix or identified as a return path for current aretreated as ordinary objects.

Note: If your model doesn’t include an outside balloon, value or odd symmetryboundary, do not choose Default — the inductance or impedance computa-tion will fail.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Specifying Signal and Ground Lines

If you are setting up a capacitance, admittance, or conductance matrix computation, youmust identify which conductors in the matrix are “signal-carrying” conductors or aregrounded conductors.

• Choose Signal Line to identify the selected conductors as “signal lines” — that is,conductors to include in the matrix computation. At least one conductor must beidentified as a Signal Line to set up a valid capacitance, admittance, or conductancematrix computation.

• Choose Ground to identify the selected conductor as a “ground line” — that is, aconductor that is grounded during the matrix computation. Ground conductors are notincluded in the matrix, but their presence affects its solution. Only one conductor orgroup of conductors can be identified as a Ground.

During the general field solution, the voltages on conductors identified as Signal Linesand Grounds are defined by the boundary conditions and sources specified under SetupBoundaries/Sources. However, during the matrix subsolutions, these conductors aretreated differently.

Note: You must identify all conductors to include in the matrix as Signal lines;however, you do not necessarily have to identify a Ground conductor. Selecta ground conductor only if you wish to model the effect of a grounded objectin the matrix.









Go Back

Contents

Index

Viewing the Matrix Solution

If you selected Solve for Parameters under Setup Solution parameters, Maxwell 2Dsolves for the desired matrix during the solution process. After all field solutions are com-plete, a capacitance, inductance, impedance, admittance, or conductance matrix will becomputed for the selected conductors.

> To view the capacitance, inductance, impedance, admittance, or conductance matrix:• Choose Solutions/Matrix from the Executive Commands menu.









Go Back

Contents

More

Index

TorqueElectrostatic, Magnetostatic, Eddy Current

Choose Torque from the Setup Executive Parameters menu to compute the torque onan object (or group of objects) due to the force from the electric or magnetic field. Torquesare computed about an anchor point that you specify. Depending on which field solver youselected for the model, torque is computed in one of several different ways. Torque isgiven in newton-meters per meter depth or in newtons.

The following window appears when you select this command:

> To set up a torque calculation:1. Select the objects (or groups of objects) for which torque is to be computed.

Objects are selected in the same way as for the force computation.2. Under Include Selected objects, choose Yes. This selects the objects for the

Note: Torque can only be computed for cartesian (XY) models.


ForceCore LossMatrixTorque

Viewing the Torque Solu-tion

Flux LinesCurrent FlowPost Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

Index

torque computation.3. Choose No to remove objects from the torque computation.4. Choose the anchor point from which torques are computed (the point that the

objects rotate around). By default, the anchor point is (0,0). To change the anchorpoint for the torque computation:a. Choose Set Anchor Point.b. Click the left mouse button on the desired point. (Alternately, enter the u and v-

coordinates of the point in the U and V fields at the bottom of the window.) Theanchor point is marked with an “X” in the display area.

5. When you finish, choose Exit. You are prompted to save your changes.• Choose Yes to save the torque setup you’ve just entered and exit.• Choose No to exit without saving.• Choose Cancel to stay in the Torque window.

You return to the Executive Commands menu. If you saved the torque setup, a checkappears next to the Torque command on the Setup Executive Parameters menu.

Viewing the Torque Solution

If you selected Parameters from the Setup Solution menu, the simulator computes thetorque on the selected objects at the end of each adaptive field solution. To view theresults of the torque solutions, do one or both of the following:

• To display the torque values computed after each pass, choose Convergence fromthe Executive Commands menu. This lets you see whether torque is converging to astable value.

• To view the final torque solution, choose the Solutions/Force/Torque command fromthe Executive Commands menu. This lets you see the magnitude of the torque andthe anchor point used in the torque computation.


ForceCore LossMatrixTorque

Viewing the TorqueSolution

Flux LinesCurrent FlowPost Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

More

Index

Flux LinesElectrostatic, Magnetostatic, Eddy Current

Choose Setup Executive Parameters/Flux Lines to compute the electric or magneticflux linkage across the specified lines.

• In cartesian (XY) models, the simulator solves for the flux that crosses perpendicularto the surface made by sweeping the flux line in the z direction. The flux in webers permeter of depth in the z direction is computed.

• In axisymmetric (RZ) models, the simulator solves for the total flux in webers thatpasses through the surface made by rotating the line 360° around the z-axis.

A window similar to the following one appears when you choose this command:

> To define the lines over which flux linkage is to be computed:1. Choose Add.2. Click the left mouse button on the first point in the line. Alternatively, enter its

coordinates in the U and V fields at the bottom of the screen.3. Click the left mouse button on the second point in the line. Alternatively, enter its

coordinates in the U and V fields.4. Enter the Line Name.


ForceCore LossMatrixTorqueFlux Lines

Viewing Information aboutFlux Lines

Viewing the Flux LinkageSolution

Current FlowPost Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

Index

5. Select the Line Color.6. Choose Enter to accept the line or Cancel to cancel the flux line.7. When you finish, choose Exit. You are prompted to save your changes.

• Choose Yes to save the torque setup you’ve just entered and exit.• Choose No to exit without saving.• Choose Cancel to stay in the Torque window.

Repeat this procedure for each flux line to be added. Line names appear in the list box onthe left side of the screen.



Viewing Information aboutFlux Lines

Viewing the Flux LinkageSolution




Go Back

Contents

Index

Viewing Information about Flux Lines

To view information about a flux line, select its name in the list box. The following appears:

Viewing the Flux Linkage Solution

If you selected Parameters from the Setup Solution menu, the simulator computes theflux linkage at the end of each adaptive field solution. To view the results of the flux link-age solutions, do one or both of the following:

• To display the flux linkage computed after each pass, choose Convergence from theExecutive Commands window. This displays a single value for the flux linkagecomputed across all the lines you specified, letting you see whether the flux linkagesolution is converging to a stable value.

• To view the final flux linkage solution, choose the Solutions/Flux Linkage commandfrom the Executive Commands window. This lets you see the flux linkage across theindividual lines you specified.

The flux linkage calculated using the eddy current solver contains two values. The firstone is the real component and the second is the imaginary component.

Line Name The name of the flux line. If desired, type in a new name andchoose Enter.

Line Color The color of the flux line. If desired, select a new color and chooseEnter.

First Point The coordinates of the first point in the line.Second Point The coordinates of the second point in the line.



Viewing Informationabout Flux Lines

Viewing the Flux Link-age Solution




Go Back

Contents

Index

Current FlowEddy Axial, DC Conduction, AC Conduction

Choose Current Flow from the Setup Executive Parameters menu to compute the cur-rent flow across a line you specify.

• In cartesian (XY) models, the current flow is found by integrating the normalcomponent of J along the surface made by sweeping the current flow line in the zdirection. The current flow in amperes per meter of depth in the z direction iscomputed.

• In axisymmetric (RZ) models, the current flow is found by integrating the normalcomponent of J across the surface made by rotating the line 360° around the z-axis.The total current flow in amperes through this surface is computed.

The following window appears when you choose this command:

The procedure for entering and viewing current flow lines is identical to that used forentering and viewing flux lines.


ForceCore LossMatrixTorqueFlux LinesCurrent Flow

Viewing the Current FlowSolution

Post Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

Index

Viewing the Current Flow Solution

If you selected Parameters from the Setup Solution menu, the simulator computes thecurrent flow at the end of each adaptive field solution. To view the results of the currentflow solutions, do one or both of the following:

• To display the current computed after each pass, choose Convergence from theExecutive Commands menu. This displays a single value for the current computedacross all the lines you specified, letting you see whether the current solution isconverging to a stable value.

• To view the final current solution, choose the Solutions/Current Flow command fromthe Executive Commands menu. This lets you see the current across the individuallines you specified.


ForceCore LossMatrixTorqueFlux LinesCurrent Flow

Viewing the CurrentFlow Solution

Post Processor MacrosMatrix/FluxSelect Matrix/Flux EntriesSelect Matrix Entries



Go Back

Contents

Index


ForceCore LossMatrixTorqueFlux LinesCurrent FlowPost Processor Macros

Executing MacrosDefining Macros


Post Processor MacrosAll Solvers except Transient

Choose Post Processor Macros to execute a sequence of steps that have been previ-ously defined and saved in a macro file. The following window appears:

The Available Macros list displays all macros that have been defined and saved as theuser’s macro library for the project. The box labeled Selected Macros lists the macrosthat the user has selected for automatic Post Processor execution.

Executing Macros> Do the following to execute post-processor macros during a solution:

• To add an available macro to the Selected Macros list, click on the desired entry inthe Available Macros list to select it, and then select the Add button. The new entrymoves from the Available Macros list to the Selected Macros list.

• To remove a macro from the Selected Macros list, select the entry that is to beremoved and then select the Remove button. The entry moves from the SelectedMacros list to the Available Macros list.



Go Back

Contents

Index


ForceCore LossMatrixTorqueFlux LinesCurrent FlowPost Processor Macros

Executing MacrosDefining Macros


Defining Macros

Macros are defined by having Maxwell 2D record all keystrokes and mouse clicks madewhile manually setting up a Post Processor calculation. (The procedure for defining PostProcessor macros is described elsewhere.) You will find that a Post Processor calculationand its associated macro definition cannot be set up until at least one solution has beenexecuted. If you plan to define macros, it is suggested that you run a non-adaptive solu-tion first, define the macros, and then proceed with the adaptive solutions.

Post Processor macros are especially useful when performing a parametric sweep. Exe-cuting macros during parametric sweeps enables you to solve for any quantity of interest– transformer efficiency, energy density, hysteresis, loss, and so on – that can be com-puted using the calculators. This lets you immediately compare the results of computa-tions for the different values of the variables in the sweep.

> To use Post Processor macros during a parametric sweep:1. Generate a field solution for the nominal problem. (This does not have to be an

adaptive solution unless you want to refine the mesh prior to performing aparametric sweep.)

2. Access the fields Post Processor and define the desired macros using the File/Trans commands. To be displayed during a solution, the macro must store a valuein a number register.

3. Select which macros are to be executed during the solution using the SetupExecutive Parameters/Post Processor Macros command.

During the parametric solution, the results of each Post Processing macro are displayedin their own column in the spreadsheet.



Go Back

Contents

Index



Matrix/FluxWhen you wish to define an impedance matrix for the flux linkage, choose Setup Execu-tive Parameters/Matrix/Flux to select the items to include in the matrix.

> To define the matrix entries for the flux linkage:1. Choose Setup Executive Parameters/Matrix/Flux. The Impedance Matrix and

Flux Linkage Setup window appears, listing the objects in the model:

2. Select the object to include in the matrix.3. Enter a Name for the matrix entry.4. Select Include in matrix to add the entry to the matrix. This is the default setting.5. Choose Assign. The object is added to the impedance matrix.6. Repeat this procedure for each entry until you have completed the impedance

matrix.7. Choose Exit to exit the window and save the changes as you exit.



Go Back

Contents

Index



Select Matrix/Flux EntriesChoose Setup Executive Parameters/Select Matrix/Flux Entries to define the imped-ance matrix. The matrix entries are composed of those you defined with the Setup Exec-utive Parameters/Matrix/Flux command.

> To define the impedance matrix:1. Choose Setup Executive Parameters/Select Matrix/Flux Entries. The Select

Matrix and Flux Linkage Entries window appears:

2. Select an object from the Row entry list.3. Select an object from the Column entry list.4. Choose Add to add the matrix to the selection list.5. Optionally, select Include Flux Linkage in Table to add the flux linkage

calculation to the matrix table.6. Once you have added all of the matrices to the list that you wish, choose OK to

return to the Executive Commands menu.



Go Back

Contents

Index



Removing Matrix EntriesTailoring a ParametricProblem


Select Matrix EntriesIf you have requested that capacitance, inductance, impedance, admittance, or conduc-tance matrices be computed for selected conductors in the model, and have purchasedthe parametric analysis module, choose Setup Executive Parameters/Select MatrixEntries to display their parameters in the variable spreadsheet. These parameters will beused to define the matrix entries for a parametric sweep.

> To define a matrix entry:1. Choose Setup Executive Parameters/Select Matrix Entries. A window similar to

the following one appears:

2. Select an object from the Row entry list.3. Select an object from the Column entry list.4. Choose Add to add the matrix to the selection list.5. Once you have added all of the matrices to the list that you wish, choose OK to

return to the Executive Commands menu.



Go Back

Contents

Index



Removing Matrix EntriesTailoring a ParametricProblem


Removing Matrix Entries

Similarly, you can remove a matrix entry from the list.

> To remove a matrix from the list:1. Choose Setup Executive Parameters/Select Matrix Entries.2. Select the matrix that you wish to remove from the list of selected entries.3. Choose Remove to remove the entry.4. Choose OK.

You return to the Executive Commands menu.

Tailoring a Parametric Problem

Setting up a problem for parametrics is not very different from creating a basic 2D prob-lem. The main idea is to set all of the values you wish to change during parametric solvingto variables. The areas of problem setup that you’ll need to pay special attention to aregiven below.

Define Model

If you are planning to vary the dimensions or arrangement of any of the objects in yourmodel, you will have to set those parameters to variables by using constraints. Con-straints are applied to the model using the commands on the Constraint menu.

Setup Materials

If you are planning to vary the attributes of any of the materials used in your model, youwill have to create new materials with functional properties. Define each material propertythat will be varied during the parametric sweep as a function with a constant value. Theconstant value will be used during the nominal solution.

Setup Boundaries/Sources

If you are planning to vary the values of any of the sources or boundaries in the problem,you will have to assign them functional values. Define each boundary or source propertythat will be varied during the parametric sweep as a function with a constant value. Theconstant value will be used during the nominal solution.

table of contents: maxwell 2d table of contentsread.pudn.com/downloads106/ebook/438459/ansoft... ·...

Documents